Subaru 2008 Forester 2.5X L.L. Bean User Manual

Foreword

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s

Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in

excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control

system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read

this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and

its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,

such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact

the dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest

SUBARU dealer.

The inform ation, specifications and illustrations found in this

manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY

INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and

designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any

obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles

previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and

covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some

explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your

vehicle.

Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The

next owner will need the information found herein.

FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN

is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

Black plate (2,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

This manual describes the following vehicle types.*

* The illustrated vehicle is one of the FORESTER series.

Black plate (2,1)

北米Model "ALL_MODEL_SHIRO" EDITED: 2006/ 4/ 17

Black plate (3,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Warranties

& Warranties for U.S.A.

All SUBARU vehicles distributed by

Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail

by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the

United States come with the following

warranties:

. SUBARU Limited Warranty

. Emission Control Systems Warranty

. Emissions Performance Warranty

All warranty information, including details

of coverage and exclusions, is in the

“ Warranty and Maint enance Booklet”.

Please read these warranties carefully.

& Warranties for Canada

All SUBARU vehicles distributed by

Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by

an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada

come with the following warranties:

. SUBARU Limited Warranty

. Anti-Corrosion Warranty

. Emission Control Warranty

All warranty information, including details

of coverage and exclusions, is in the

Warranty and Service Booklet. Please

read these warranties carefully.

! Vehicle with HID headlights

CAUTION

High Intensity Discharge (HID) head-

lights contain mercury. For that

reason, it is necessary to remove

HID headlights before vehicle dis-

posal. Once removed, please reuse,

recycle or dispose of the HID head-

lights as hazardous waste.

! Vehicle without HID headlights

CAUTION

This vehicle does not contain mer-

cury devices or parts.

How to use this Owner’s

Manual

& Using your Owner’s Manual

Before you operate your vehicle, carefully

read this manual. To protect yourself and

extend the service life of your vehicle,

follow the instructions in this manual.

Failure to observe these instructions may

result in serious injury and damage to your

vehicle.

This manual is composed of fourteen

chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief

table of contents, so you can usually tell at

a glance if that chapter contains the

information you want.

Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS

airbags

This chapter informs you how to use the

seat and seatbelt and contains precau-

tions for the SRS airbags.

Chapter 2: Keys and doors

This chapter informs you how to operate

the keys, locks and windows.

Chapter 3: Instruments and controls

This chapter informs you about the opera-

tion of instrument panel indicators and

how to use the instruments and other

switches.

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (4,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Chapter 4: Climate Control

This chapter informs you how to operate

the climate control.

Chapter 5: Audio

This chapter informs you how to operate

your audio system.

Chapter 6: Interior equipment

This chapter informs you how to operate

interior equipment.

Chapter 7: Starting and operating

This chapter informs you how to start and

operate your SUBARU.

Chapter 8: Driving tips

This chapter informs you how to drive your

SUBARU in various conditions and ex-

plains some safety tips on driving.

Chapter 9: In case of emergency

This chapter informs you what to do if you

have a problem while driving, such as a

flat tire or engine overheating.

Chapter 10: Appearance care

This chapter informs you how to keep your

SUBARU looking good.

Chapter 11: Maintenance and service

This chapter informs you when you need

to take your SUBARU to the dealer for

scheduled maintenance and informs you

how to keep your SUB ARU running

properly.

Chapter 12: Specifications

This chapter informs you about dimension

and capacities of your SUBARU.

Chapter 13: Consumer information and

Reporting safety defects

This chapter informs you about Uniform

tire quality grading standards and Report-

ing safety defects.

Chapter 14: Index

This is an alphabetical listing of all that’sin

this manual. You can use it to quickly find

something you want to read.

& Safety warnings

You will find a number of WARNINGs,

CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.

These safety warnings alert you to poten-

tial hazards that could result in injury to

you or others.

Please read these safety warnings as well

as all other portions of this manual care-

fully in order to gain a better understand-

ing of how to use your SUBARU vehicle

safely.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in

which serious injury or death could

result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in

which injury or damage to you r

vehicle, or both, could result if the

caution is ignored.

NOTE

A NOTE gives information or sugges-

tions how to make better use of your

vehicle.

& Safety symbol

You will find a circle with a slash through it

in this manual. This symbol means “Do

not”, “Do not do this”,or“Do not let this

happen”, depending upon the context.

Black plate (5,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Vehicle symbols

There are some of the symbols you may

see on your vehicle.

Mark Name

WARNING

CAUTION

Power door lock

Passengers’ windows lock

Fuel

Front fog lights

Parking lights

Hazard warning flasher

Engine hood

Mark Name

Seat heater

Child restraint top tether an-

chorages

Child restraint lower an-

chorages

Horn

Windshield wiper deicer

Wiper intermittent

Windshield washer

Windshield wiper mist (for

single wipe)

Rear window wiper

Rear window washer

Lights

Mark Name

Parking lights, tail lights, li-

cense plate light and instru-

ment panel illumination

Headlights

Headlight beam leveler

Illumination brightness

Fan speed

Instrument panel outlets

Instrument panel outlets and

foot outlets

Foot outlets

Windshield defroster and foot

outlets

Windshield defroster

Outside mirror defogger

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (6,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Mark Name

Rear window defogger

Air recirculation

Engine oil

Washer

Door lock (Transmitter)

Door unlock (Transmitter)

Safety precautions when

driving

& Seatbelt and SRS airbag

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle should

fasten their seatbelts BEFORE

the vehicle starts to move. Other-

wise, the possibility of serious

injury becomes greater in the

event of a sudden stop or acci-

dent.

. To obtain maximum protection in

the event of an accident, the

driver and all passengers in the

vehicle should always wear seat-

belts when the vehicle is moving.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint

System) airbag does not do away

with the need to fasten seatbelts.

In combination with the seat-

belts, it offers the best combined

protection in case of a serious

accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases

the chance of severe injury or

death in a crash even when the

vehicle has the SRS airbag.

. The SRS airbags deploy with

consider able speed and force.

Occupants who are out of proper

position when the SRS airbag

deploys could suffer very serious

injuries. Because the SRS airbag

needs enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should always

sit upright and well back in the

seat as far from the steering

wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control

and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as

possible and sit upright and well

back in the seat.

Carefully read the sections “Seatbelts”

and “*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System airbag)” in chapter 1 of this Own-

er’s Manual for instructions and precau-

tions concerning the seatbelt system and

SRS airbag system.

Black plate (7,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Child safety

WARNING

. Never hold a child on your lap or

in your arms while the vehicle is

moving. The passenger cannot

protect the child from injury in a

collision, because the child will

be caught between the passen-

ger and objects inside the vehi-

cle.

. While riding in the vehicle, in-

fants and small children should

always be placed in the REAR

seat in an infant or child restraint

system which is appropriate for

the child’s age, height and

weight. If a child is too big for a

child restraint system, the child

should sit in the REAR seat and

be restrained using the seatbelts.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating

positions than in the front seat-

ing positions. Never allow a child

to stand up or kneel on the seat.

. Put children aged 12 and under in

the REAR seat properly re-

strained at all times in a child

restraint device or in a seatbelt.

The SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed and force

and can injure or even kill chil-

dren, especially if they are 12

years of age and under and are

not restrained or improperly re-

strained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk being injured from

deployment is greater.

. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE

FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Always use the child safety locks

whenever a child rides in the rear

seat. Serious injury could result

if a child accidentally opened the

door and fell out. Refer to the

“Child safety locks” section in

chapter 2.

. Always lock the passenger’s win-

dows using the lock switch when

children are riding in the vehicle.

Failure to follow this procedure

could result in injury to a child

operating the power window. Re-

fer to the “ Windows” section in

chapter 2.

. Never leave unattended children

in the vehicle. They could acci-

dentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent op-

eration of the vehicle. Also, on

hot or sunny days, temperature

in a closed vehicle could quickly

become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries

to them.

Carefully read the sections “Child restraint

systems”, “*SRS airbag (Supplemental

Restraint System airbag)”, and “Seatbelts”

in chapter 1 of this Owner’s Manual for

instructions and precautions concerning

the child restraint system, seatbelt system

and SRS airbag system.

& Engine exhaust gas (Carbon

monoxide)

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains

carbon monoxide, a colorless

and odorless gas which is dan-

gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from enter-

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (8,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

ing the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parked

vehicle for a lengthy time while

the engine is running. If that is

unavoidable, then use the venti-

lation fan to force fresh air into

the vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation system al-

ways works properly.

. If at any time you suspect that

exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem

checked and corrected as soon

as possible. If you must drive

under these conditions, drive

only with all windows fully open.

. Keep the rear gate closed while

driving to prevent exhaust gas

from entering the vehicle.

& Drinking and driving

WARNING

Drinking and then driving is very

dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-

stream delays your reaction and

impairs your perception, judgment

and attentiveness. If you drive after

drinking – even if you drink just a

little – it will increase the risk of

being involved in a serious or fatal

accident, injuring or killing yourself,

your passengers and others. In

addition, if you are injured in the

accident, alcohol may increase the

severity of that injury.

Please don’t drink and drive.

Drunken dri ving is one of the most

frequent causes of accidents. Since alco-

hol affects all people differently, you may

have consumed too much alcohol to drive

safely even if the level of alcohol in your

blood is below the legal limit. The safest

thing you can do is never drink and drive.

However if you have no choice but to

drive, stop drinking and sober up comple-

tely before getting behind the wheel.

& Drugs and driving

WARNING

There are some drugs (over the

counter and prescription) that can

delay your reaction time and impair

your perception, judgment and at-

tentiveness. If you drive after taking

them, it may increase your, your

passengers’ and other persons’ risk

of being involved in a serious or

fatal accident.

If you are taking any drugs, check with

your doctor or pharmacist or read the

literature that accompanies the medication

to determine if the drug you are taking can

impair your driving ability. Do not drive

after taking any medications that can

make you drowsy or otherwise affect your

ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If

you have a medical condition that requires

you to take drugs, please consult with

your doctor.

Never drive if you are under the influence

of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your

own health and well-being, we urge you

not to take illegal drugs in the first place

and to seek treatment if you are addicted

to those drugs.

Black plate (9,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Driving when tired or sleepy

WARNING

When you are tired or sleepy, your

reaction will be delayed and your

perception, judgment and attentive-

ness will be impaired. If you drive

when tired or sleepy, your, your

passengers’ and other persons ’

chances of being involved in a

serious accident may increase.

Please do not continue to drive but

instead find a safe place to rest if you

are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you

should make periodic rest stops to refresh

yourself before continuing on your journey.

When possible, you should share the

driving with others.

& Modification of your vehicle

CAUTION

Your vehicle should not be modified

other than with genuine Su baru

parts and accessories. Other types

of modifications could affect its

performance, safety or durability,

and may even violate governmental

regulations. In addition, damage or

performance problems resulting

from modification may not be cov-

ered under warranties.

& Car phone/cell phone and

driving

CAUTION

Do not use a car phone/cell phone

while driving; it may distract your

attention from driving and can lead

to an accident. If you use a car

phone/cell phone, pull off the road

and park in a safe place before

using your phone. In some States/

Provinces, only hands-free phones

may legally be used while driving.

& Driving with pets

Unrestrained pets can interfere with your

driving and distract your attention from

driving. In a collision or sudden stop,

unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown

around inside the vehicle and hurt you or

your passengers. Besides, the pets can

be hurt under these situations. It is also for

their own safety that pets should be

properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-

strain a pet with a special traveling

harness which can be secured to the rear

seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier

which can be secured to the rear seat by

routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s

handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers

in the front passenger’s seat. For further

information, consult your veterinarian,

local animal protection so ciety or pet

shop.

& Tire pressures

Check and, if n ecessary, adjust the

pressure of each tire (including the spare)

at least once a month and before any long

journey.

Check the tire pressure when the tires are

cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the

tire pressures to the values shown on the

tire placard.

Refer to the “Tires and wheels” section in

chapter 11 for detailed information.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to deform severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and destruction of

the tires. The resulting loss of

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (10,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

& California proposition 65

warning

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its consti-

tuents, and certain vehicle compo-

nents contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm. In addi-

tion, certain fluids in vehicles and

certain components of product wear

contain or emit chemicals known to

the State of California to cause

cancer and birth defects or other

reproductive harm.

Black plate (1,1)

Table of contents

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Keys and doors

Instruments and controls

Climate control

Audio

Interior equipment

Starting and operating

Driving tips

In case of emergency

Appearance care

Maintenance and service

Specifications

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Index

北米Model "A8130BE-B" Edited: 2007/ 7/ 25

Black plate (12,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Illustrated index

& Exterior

1) Headlight switch (page 3-20)

2) Replacing bulbs (page 11-46)

3) Engine hood (page 11-4)

4) Wiper switch (page 3-25)

5) Roof rails (page 8-13)

6) Door locks (page 2-4)

7) Tire pressure (page 11-33)

8) Flat tires (page 9-4)

9) Tire chains (page 8-10)

10) Front fog light button (page 3-24)

11) Tie-down/Towing hooks (page 9-12)

Black plate (13,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1) Rear window defogger button

(page 3-28)

2) Rear gate (page 2-20)

3) Child safety locks (page 2-17)

4) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-3)

5) Tie-down/Towing hook (page 9-12)

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (14,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Interior

! Passenger compartment area

1) Lower anchorage for child restraint sys-

tem (page 1-31)

2) Seatbelt (page 1-10)

3) Moonroof (page 2-21)

4) Parking brake lever (page 7-26)

5) Front seat (page 1-2)

6) Rear seat (page 1-7)

Black plate (15,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1) Cup holder (page 6-7)

2) Center console (page 6-4)

3) Glove box (page 6-4)

4) Front power supply socket (page 6-8)

5) Pocket (if equipped) (page 6-7)

AUX unit (if equipped) (page 6-8)

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (16,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Instrument panel

1) Door locks (page 2-4)

2) Outside mirror switch (page 3-30)

3) Light control lever (page 3-20)

4) Combination meter (page 3-6)

5) Wiper control lever (page 3-24)

6) Hazard warning flasher switch (page 3-6)

7) Audio (page 5-1)

8) Gear shift lever (MT) (page 7-9)

Selector lever (AT) (page 7-11)

9) Climate control (page 4-1)

10) Cruise control (page 7-28)

11) Horn (page 3-32)

12) SRS airbag (page 1-35)

13) Tilt steering (page 3-32)

14) Fuse (page 11-43)

15) Hood lock release knob (page 11-4)

16) Power windows (page 2-18)

Black plate (17,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Light control and wiper control levers/switches

1) Parking light switch (page 3-23)

2) Windshield wiper (page 3-24)

3) Mist (page 3-26)

4) Windshield washer (page 3-26)

5) Rear window wiper and washer switch

(page 3-26)

6) Wiper control lever (page 3-25)

7) Illumination brightness control

(page 3-23)

8) Light control lever (page 3-20)

9) Headlight ON/OFF (page 3-20)

10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam

change (page 3-21)

11) Turn signal (for lane change) (page 3-22)

12) Turn signal (page 3-22)

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (18,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Combination meter

! U.S.-spec. models

! AT vehicles

Type A

1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)

2) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)

3) Speedometer (page 3-6)

4) Tachometer (page 3-7)

5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter

reset knob (page 3-6)

6) Odometer and trip meter (page 3-6)

7) Outside temperature indicator (page 3-9)

8) Select lever position indicator

(page 3-17)

Black plate (19,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Type B

1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)

2) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)

3) Speedometer (page 3-6)

4) Tachometer (page 3-7)

5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter

reset knob (page 3-6)

6) Odometer and trip meter (page 3-6)

7) Outside temperature indicator (page 3-9)

8) Select lever position indicator

(page 3-17)

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (20,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

! MT vehicles

Type A

1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)

2) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)

3) Speedometer (page 3-6)

4) Tachometer (page 3-7)

5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter

reset knob (page 3-6)

6) Odometer and trip meter (page 3-6)

7) Outside temperature indicator (page 3-9)

Black plate (21,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Type B

1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)

2) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)

3) Speedometer (page 3-6)

4) Tachometer (page 3-7)

5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter

reset knob (page 3-6)

6) Odometer and trip meter (page 3-6)

7) Outside temperature indicator (page 3-9)

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (22,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

! Canada-spec. models

! AT vehicles

Type A

1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)

2) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)

3) Speedometer (page 3-6)

4) Tachometer (page 3-7)

5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter

reset knob (page 3-6)

6) Odometer and trip meter (page 3-6)

7) Outside temperature indicator (page 3-9)

8) Select lever position indicator

(page 3-17)

Black plate (23,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Type B

1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)

2) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)

3) Speedometer (page 3-6)

4) Tachometer (page 3-7)

5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter

reset knob (page 3-6)

6) Odometer and trip meter (page 3-6)

7) Outside temperature indicator (page 3-9)

8) Select lever position indicator

(page 3-17)

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (24,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

! MT vehicles

Type A

1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)

2) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)

3) Speedometer (page 3-6)

4) Tachometer (page 3-7)

5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter

reset knob (page 3-6)

6) Odometer and trip meter (page 3-6)

7) Outside temperature indicator (page 3-9)

Black plate (25,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Type B

1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)

2) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)

3) Speedometer (page 3-6)

4) Tachometer (page 3-7)

5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter

reset knob (page 3-6)

6) Odometer and trip meter (page 3-6)

7) Outside temperature indicator (page 3-9)

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (26,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Warning and indicator light

Mark Name Page

Seatbelt warning light 3-10

SRS airbag system warn-

ing light

3-10

Front passenger’s frontal

airbag ON indicator light

3-11

Front passenger’s frontal

airbag OFF indicator light

3-11

CHECK ENGINE warning

light/Malfunction indicator

lamp

3-12

Charge warning light 3-12

Oil pressure warning light 3-12

AT OIL temperature

warning light (AT vehicles)

3-13

or ABS warning light 3-13

Mark Name Page

Brake system warning

light

3-15

Door open warning light 3-16

All-Wheel Drive warning

light (AT vehicles)

3-16

Low fuel warning light 3-16

Turn signal indicator lights 3-17

High beam indicator light 3-17

Security indicator light (if

equipped)

2-4

Cruise control indicator

light (if equipped)

3-19

Cruise control set indica-

tor light (if equipped)

3-19

Vehicle Dynamics Control

operation indicator light (if

equipped)

3-16

Mark Name Page

Vehicle Dynamics Control

warning light/Vehicle Dy-

namics Control OFF indi-

cator light (if equipped)

3-14

Low tire pressure warning

light (if equipped)

3-17

Black plate (27,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Tire changing tools

1) Jack (page 9-15)

2) Jack handle (page 9-15)

3) Spare tire (page 9-4)

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (28,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Cargo area cover

1) Cargo area cover (page 6-13)

2) Cargo tie-down hook (page 6-14)

3) Accessory power outlet (page 6-8)

4) Shopping bag hook (page 6-14)

Black plate (1,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Front seats........................................................... 1-2

Manual seat ........................................................ 1-3

Power seat (if equipped)...................................... 1-4

Lumbar support (Driver’s seat) ............................ 1-5

Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-6

Active head restraint ........................................... 1-6

Seat heater (if equipped) .................................... 1-7

Rear seats............................................................ 1-7

Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-8

Folding down the rear seatback........................... 1-9

Armrest (if equipped) ......................................... 1-10

Seatbelts ............................................................. 1-10

Seatbelt safety tips............................................. 1-10

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................... 1-11

Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor

(A/ELR) ............................................................ 1-11

Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 1-12

Fastening the seatbelt ........................................ 1-12

Seatbelt maintenance ......................................... 1-19

Seatbelt extender ............................................... 1-19

Front seatbelt pretensioners ............................. 1-20

System monitors ................................................ 1-22

System servicing ............................................... 1-23

Precautions against vehicle modification............ 1-23

Child restraint systems ..................................... 1-24

Where to place a child restraint system.............. 1-25

Choosing a child restraint system ...................... 1-26

Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR

seatbelt ........................................................... 1-26

Installing a booster seat..................................... 1-29

Installation of child restraint systems by use of

lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .............. 1-31

Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-33

*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System airbag)................................................ 1-35

Vehicle with driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

airbags and lap/shoulder restraints .................. 1-35

Subaru advanced frontal airbag system.............. 1-39

SRS side airbag (if equipped)............................. 1-51

SRS airbag system monitors.............................. 1-56

SRS airbag system servicing ............................. 1-57

Precautions against vehicle modification............ 1-58

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Black plate (32,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Front seats

WARNING

. Never adjust the seat while driv-

ing to avoid the possibility of

loss of vehicle control and of

personal injury.

. Before adjusting the seat, make

sure the hands and feet of rear

seat passengers are clear of the

adjusting mechanism.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

well back and upright in the seat.

To reduce the risk of sliding

under the seatbelt in a collision,

the front seatbacks should be

always used in the upright posi-

tion while the vehicle is running.

If the front seatbacks are not

used in the upright position in a

collision, the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

. The SRS airbags deploy with

consider able speed and force.

Occupants who are out of proper

position when th e SRS airbag

deploys could suffer very serious

injuries. Because the SRS airbag

needs enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should always

sit upright and well back in the

seat as far from the steering

wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control

and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as

possible and sit upright and well

back in the seat.

WARNING

Put children aged 12 and under in

the rear seat properly restrained at

all times. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed and force

and can injure or even kill children,

especially if they are 12 years of age

and under and are not restrained or

improperly restrained. Because chil-

dren are lighter and weaker than

adults, their risk of being injured

from deployment is greater. Conse-

quently, we strongly recommend

that ALL children (including those

in child seats and those that have

outgrown child restraint devices) sit

in the REAR seat properly re-

strained at all times in a child

restraint device or in a seatbelt,

whichever is appropriate for the

child’s age, height and weight. Se-

cure ALL types of child restraint

devices (including forward faci ng

child seat) in the REAR seats at all

times.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-

CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT

SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS

INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD

BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD

TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating posi-

tions. For instructions and precau-

tions concerning child restraint sys-

Black plate (33,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

tems, see the “Child restraint sys-

tems” section in this chapter.

& Manual seat

! Fore and aft adjustment

Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to

the desired position. Then release the

lever and move the seat back and forth to

make sure that it is securely locked into

place.

! Reclining the seatback

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from slid-

ing under the seatbelt in the event of

a collision, always put the seatback

in the upright position while the

vehicle is in motion. Also, do not

place objects such as cushions

between the passenger and the

seatback. If you do so, the risk of

sliding under the lap belt and of the

lap belt sliding up over the abdomen

will increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the

seatback to the desired position. Then

release the l ever and make sure the

seatback is securely locked into place.

The seatback placed in a reclined position

can spring back upward with force when

released. When operating the reclining

lever to return the seatback, hold it lightly

so that it may be raised back gradually.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-3

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (34,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-4 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Seat height adjustment (Driver’s

seat)

1) Turn the dial backward to lower the seat.

2) Turn the dial forward to raise the seat.

Use the adjusting dial to adjust the height

of the seat.

& Power seat (if equipped)

! Fore and aft adjustment

To adjust the seat forward or backward,

move the control switch forward or back-

ward.

! Seat cushion angle adjustment

To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up

or push down the front end of the control

switch.

! Seat height adjustment

Black plate (35,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

To adjust the seat height, pull up or push

down the rear end of the control switch.

! Reclining the seatback

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from slid-

ing under the seatbelt in the event of

a collision, always put the seatback

in the upright position while the

vehicle is in motion. Also, do not

place objects such as cushions

between the passenger and the

seatback. If you do so, the risk of

sliding under the lap belt and of the

lap belt sliding up over the abdomen

will increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

To adjust the angle of the seatback, move

the control switch forward or backward.

& Lumbar support (Driver’s

seat)

Pull the lever forward or backward.

Pulling the lever forward will increase the

amount of support for your lower back.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-5

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (36,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-6 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

& Head restraint adjustment

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

To lower it, push the head restraint down

while pressing the release button on the

top of the seatback.

The head restraint should be adjusted so

that the center of the head restraint is

closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed because

they are designed to reduce the risk

of serious neck injury in the event

that the vehicle is struck from the

rear.

& Active head restraint

The front seats of your vehicle are

equipped with active head restraints. They

automatically tilt forward slightly in the

event the vehicle is struck from the rear,

decreasing the amount of rearward head

movement and thus reducing the risk of

whiplash. For maximum effectiveness the

head restraint should be adjust so that the

center of the head restraint is closest to

the top of the occupant’s ears.

CAUTION

. Each active head restraint is

effective only when its height is

properly adjusted and the driver/

passenger sits in the correct

position on the seat.

. If your vehicle is involved in a

rear-end collision, have an

authorized SUBARU dealer in-

spect the active head restraints.

. The active head restraints may

not operate in the event the

vehicle experiences only a slight

impact in the rear.

. The active head restraints may be

damaged if they are pushed hard

from behind or subjected to

shock. As a result, they may not

function if the vehicle suffers a

rear impact.

Black plate (37,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Seat heater (if equipped)

HI – Rapid heating

LO – Normal heating

The seat heater operates when the igni-

tion switch is either in the “Acc” or “ON”

position.

To turn on the seat heater, push the “LO”

or “HI” position on the switch, as desired,

depending on the temperature. Selecting

the “HI” position will cause the seat to heat

up quicker.

The indicator located on the switch comes

on when the seat heater is in operation.

When the vehicle’s interior is warmed

enough or before you leave the vehicle,

be sure to turn the switch off.

CAUTION

. There is a possibility that people

with delicate skin may suffer

slight burns even at low tempera-

tures if he/she uses the seat

heater for a long period of time.

When using the heater, always be

sure to warn the persons con-

cerned.

. Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates against heat,

such as a blanket, cushion, or

similar items. This may cause the

seat heater to overheat.

NOTE

Use of the seat heater for a long period

of time while the engine is not running

can cause battery discharge.

Rear seats

WARNING

Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits well

back and upright in the seat. Do not

put cushions or any other materials

between occupants and seatbacks

or seat cushions. If you do so, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

of the lap belt sliding up over the

abdomen will increase, and both can

result in serious internal injury or

death.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-7

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (38,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-8 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargo

higher than the top of the seatback

because it could tumble forward and

injure passengers in the event of a

sudden stop or accident.

& Head restraint adjustment

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed because

they are designed to reduce the risk

of serious neck injury in the event

that the vehicle is struck from the

rear.

! Rear windows side seating position

CAUTION

The head restraint is not intended to

be used at the lowest position.

Before sitting on the seat, raise the

head restraint to the click position

depending on your sitting height.

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

To lower it, push the head restraint down

while pressing the release button on the

top of the seatback.

When the seats are not occupied, lower

the head restraint to improve rearward

visibility.

! Rear center seating position

CAUTION

The head restraint is not intended to

be used at the lowest position.

Before sitting on the seat, raise the

head restraint to the click position

depending on your sitting height.

Black plate (39,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

To lower it, push the head restraint down

while pressing the release button on the

top of the seatback.

When the rear center seating position is

occupied, place the head restraint to the

click position. When the rear center seat-

ing position is not occupied, lower the

head restraint to improve rearward visibi-

lity.

& Folding down the rear seat-

back

WARNING

. After returning the rear seatback

to its original position, make

certain that the shoulder belts

are fully visible.

. Never allow passengers to ride

on the folded rear seatback or in

the cargo area. Doing so may

result in serious injury or death.

. Secure lengthy items properly to

prevent them from shooting for-

ward and causing serious injury

during a sudden stop.

1. Lower the head restraints.

2. Unlock the seatback by pulling the

release knob and then fold the seatback

down.

To return the seatback to its original

position, raise the seatback until it locks

into place and make sure that it is securely

locked.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-9

Black plate (40,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-10 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Armrest (if equipped)

To lower the armrest, pull on the top edge

of the armrest.

WARNING

To avoid the possibility of serious

injury, passengers must never be

allowed to sit on the center armrest

while the vehicle is in motion.

Seatbelts

& Seatbelt safety tips

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle should

fasten their seatbelts BEFORE

the vehicle starts to move. Other-

wise, the possibility of serious

injury becomes greater in the

event of a sudden stop or acci-

dent.

. All belts should fit snugly in order

to provide full restraint. Loose

fitting belts are not as effective in

preventing or reducing injury.

. Each seatbelt is designed to

support only one person. Never

use a single belt for two or more

persons – even children. Other-

wise, in an accident, serious

injury or death could result.

. Replace all seatbelt assemblies

including retractors and attach-

ing hardware worn by occupants

of a vehicle that has been in a

serious accident. The entire as-

sembly should be replaced even

if damage is not obvious.

. Put children aged 12 and under in

the rear seat properly restrained

at all times. The SRS airbag

deploys with considerable speed

and force and can injure or even

kill children, especially if they are

12 years of age and under and

are not restrained or improperly

restrained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

deployment is greater. Conse-

quently, we strongly recommend

that ALL children (including

those in child seats and those

that have outgrown child re-

straint devices) sit in the REAR

seat properly restrained at all

times in a child restraint device

or in a seatbe lt, whichever is

appropriate for the child’s height

and weight.

Secure ALL types of child re-

straint devices (including for-

ward facing child seats) in the

REAR seats at all times.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE

FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

Black plate (41,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating

positions than in the front seat-

ing positions. For instructions

and precautions concerning the

child restraint system, see the

“Child restraint systems” section

in this chapter.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crash

sensing and diagnostic module, which will

record the use of the seatbelt(s) by the

driver and/or front passenger when any of

the SRS frontal and side airbags deploys.

! Infants or small children

Use a child restraint system that is

suitable for your vehicle. See information

on “Child restraint systems” in this chap-

ter.

! Children

If a child is too big for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the rear seat

and be restrained using the seatbelts.

According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the

rear seating positions than in the front

seating positions. Never allow a child to

stand up or kneel on the seat.

If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses

the face or neck, adjust the shoulder belt

anchor height (window-side seating posi-

tions only) and then if necessary move the

child closer to the belt buckle to help

provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must

be taken to securely place the lap belt as

low as possible on the hips and not on the

child’s waist. If the shoulder portion of the

belt cannot be properly positioned, a child

restraint system should be used. Never

place the shoulder belt under the child’s

arm or behind the child’s back.

! Expectant mothers

Expectant mothers also need to use the

seatbelts. They should consult their doctor

for specific recommendations. The lap belt

should be worn securely and as low as

possible over the hips, not over the waist.

& Emergency Locking Retrac-

tor (ELR)

The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency

Locking Retractor (ELR).

The emergency locking retractor allows

normal body movement but the retractor

locks automatically during a sudden stop,

impact or if you pull the belt very quickly

out of the retractor.

& Automatic/Emergency Lock-

ing Retractor (A/ELR)

Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-

matic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/

ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking

Retractor normally functions as an Emer-

gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/

ELR has an additional locking mode

“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode” intended to secure a child restraint

system. When the seatbelt is once drawn

out completely and is then retracted even

slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in

that position and the seatbelt cannot be

extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks

will be heard which indicate the retractor

functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is

retracted fully, the ALR mode is released.

When securing a child restraint system on

the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt,

the seatbelt must be changed over to the

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-11

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (42,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-12 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.

When the child restraint system is re-

moved, make sure that the seatbelt

retracts fully and the retractor returned to

the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

mode.

For instructions on how to convert the

retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to

the ELR mode, see the “Child restraint

systems” section in this chapter.

& Seatbelt warning light

and chime

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt

warning device at the driver’s seat, as

required by current safety standards.

There is a seatbelt warning light in the

combination meter.

If the driver has not yet fastened the

seatbelt when the ignition switch is turned

to the “ON” position, the seatbelt warning

light will flash for 6 seconds, to warn that

the seatbelt is unfastened. If the driver’s

seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will also

sound simultaneously.

If the driver’s seatbelt is still not fastened 6

seconds later, the warning light will remain

lit for 15 seconds. If the driver’s seatbelt is

still not fastened even 15 seconds later

(21 seconds after turning ON the ignition

switch), the warning lights will alternate

between flashing and steady illumination

at 15-second intervals, and the chime will

sound while the warning light is flashing.

Alternate flashing and steady illumination

of the warning lights and sounding of the

chime will continue until the driver fastens

the seatbelt.

NOTE

. If the driver unfastens the seatbelt

after fastening, the seatbelt warning

device operates as follows according

to the vehicle speed.

. At speeds lower than appr oxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light will alternate

between flashing and steady illumi-

nation at 15-second intervals. The

chime will not sound.

. At speeds higher than approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light will alternate

between flashing and steady illumi-

nation at 15-second intervals and

the chime will sound whil e the

warning light is flashing.

. It is possible to cancel the warning

operation that follows the 6-second

warning after turning ON the ignition

switch. When the ignition switch is

turned ON next time, however, the

complete sequence of warning opera-

tion resumes. For further details about

canceling the warning operation,

please contact your SUBARU dealer.

& Fastening the seatbelt

WARNING

. Never use a belt that is twisted or

reversed. In an accident, this can

increase the risk or severity of

injury.

. Keep the lap belt as low as

possible on your hips. In a colli-

sion, this spreads the force of the

lap belt over stronger hip bones

instead of across the weaker

abdomen.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

well back and upright in the seat.

To reduce the risk of sliding

under the seatbelt in a collision,

the front seatbacks should be

always used in the upright posi-

tion while the vehicle is running.

If the front seatbacks are not

used in the upright position in a

collision, the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

Black plate (43,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

serious internal injury or death.

. Do not put cushions or any other

materials between occupants

and seatbacks or seat cushions.

If you do so, the risk of sliding

under the lap belt and of the lap

belt sliding up over the abdomen

will increase, and both can result

in seri ous internal injury or

death.

WARNING

Never place the shoulder belt under

the arm or behind the back. If an

accident occurs, this can increase

the risk or severity of injury.

CAUTION

Metallic parts of the seatbelt can

become very hot in a vehicle that

has been closed up in sunny weath-

er; they could burn an occupant. Do

not touch such hot parts until they

cool.

! Front seatbelts

1. Adjust the seat position:

Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the

upright position. Move the seat as far from

the steering wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control.

Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-

back to the upright position. Move the seat

as far back as possible.

2. Sit well back in the seat.

3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If

the belt stops before reaching the buckle,

return the belt slightly and pull it out more

slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,

let the belt retract slightly after giving it a

strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt.

6. Place the lap belt as low as possible

on your hips, not on your waist.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-13

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (44,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-14 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Adjusting the front seat shoulder

belt anchor height

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best suited for the

driver/front passenger.

To lower the anchor height, push the

release button and slide the anchor down.

To raise the anchor height, slide the

anchor up. Pull down on the anchor to

make sure that it is locked in place.

Always adjust the anchor height so that

the shoulder belt passes over the middle

of the shoulder without touching the neck.

WARNING

When wearing the seatbelts, make

sure the shoul der portion of the

webbing does not pass over your

neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt

anchor to a lower position. Placing

the shoulder belt over the neck may

result in neck injury during sudden

braking or in a collision.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

Push the button on the buckle.

Before closing the door, make sure that

the belts are retracted properly to avoid

catching the belt webbing in the door.

! Rear seatbelts (except rear center

seatbelt)

1. Sit well back in the seat.

2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If

the belt stops before reaching the buckle,

return the belt slightly and pull it out more

slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,

let the belt retract slightly after giving a

strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly

again.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

Black plate (45,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt.

5. Place the lap belt as low as possible

on your hips, not on your waist.

! Adjusting the rear seat shoulder belt

anchor height (window-side seating

positions only)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best suited for

you.

To lower the anchor height, push the

release button and slide the anchor down.

To raise the anchor height, slide the

anchor up. Pull down on the anchor to

make sure that it is locked in place.

Always adjust the anchor height so that

the shoulder belt passes over the middle

of the shoulder without touching the neck.

WARNING

When wearing the seatbelts, make

sure the shoul der portion of the

webbing does not pass over your

neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt

anchor to a lower position. Placing

the shoulder belt over the neck may

result in neck injury during sudden

braking or in a collision.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

Push the button on the buckle.

Before closing the door, make sure that

the belts are retracted properly to avoid

catching the belt webbing in the door.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-15

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (46,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-16 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Rear center seatbelt

1) Center seatbelt tongue plate

2) Connector (tongue)

3) Connector (buckle)

4) Center seatbelt buckle

WARNING

Fastening the seatbelt with the web-

bing twisted can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

When fastening the belt after it is

pulled out from the retractor, espe-

cially when inserting the connec-

tor’s tongue plate into the mating

buckle (on right-hand side), always

check that the webbing is not

twisted.

WARNING

Be sure to fasten both tongue plates

to the respective buckles. If the

seatbelt is used only as a shoulder

belt (with the connector’s tongue

plate not fastened to the connec-

tor’s buckle on the right-hand side),

it cannot properly restrain the wear-

er in position in an accident, possi-

bly resulting in serious injury or

death.

Rear center seatbelt is stowed in the

recess of the ceiling.

1. Remove the connector (tongue) plate

from the slot located at the front of the

recess by pulling the connector (tongue)

Black plate (47,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

plate rearward.

2. Pull out the seatbelt slowly from the

overhead retractor.

1) Seatbelt comfort guide

3. Pass the seatbelt through the seatbelt

comfort guide located beside the head

restraint.

4. After confirming that the webbing is not

twisted, insert the connector (tongue)

attached at the w ebbing end into the

buckle on the right-hand side until a click

is heard.

If the belt stops before reaching the

buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it

out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be

unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after

giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly

again.

5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate

into the center seatbelt buckle marked

“CENTER” on the left-hand side until it

clicks.

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-17

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (48,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-18 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

7. Place the lap belt as low as possible

on your hips, not on your waist.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

Push the release button of the center

seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to

unfasten the seatbelt.

NOTE

When the seatback is folded down for

greater cargo area, it is necessary to

disconnect the connector.

1. Insert a key or other hard pointed

object into the slot in the connector

(buckle) on the right-hand side and push

it in, and the connector (tongue) plate will

disconnect from the buckle.

2. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.

You should hold the webbing end and

guide it back into the retractor while it is

rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plates

in the recess on the ceiling and then insert

the connector (tongue) plate into the slot

located at the front of the recess.

Black plate (49,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

CAUTION

. Do not allow the retractor to roll

up the seatbelt too quickly.

Otherwise, the metal tongue

plates may hit against the trim,

resulting in damaged trim.

. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up

so that the tongue plates are

neatly stored. A hanging tongue

plate can swing and hit against

the trim during driving, causing

damage to the trim.

& Seatbelt maintenance

To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap

and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye

the belts because this could seriously

affect their strength.

Inspect the seatbelts and attachme nts

including the webbing and all hardware

periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes,

tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas.

Replace the seatbelts even if only minor

damage is found.

CAUTION

. Keep the belts free of polishes,

oils, chemicals and particularly

battery acid.

. Never attempt to make modifica-

tions or changes that will prevent

the seatbelt from operating prop-

erly.

Seatbelt extender

If the front seatbelts are not long enough

to permit the tongue plate to engage with

the seatbelt buckle, an optional seatbelt

extender is available from your SUBARU

dealer. When ordering an extender, only

order one particularly designed for your

vehicle. Several different types of exten-

ders are available to match various

varieties of front seatbelt designs. See

your SUBARU dealer for assistance.

The extender adds approximately 8

inches (200 mm) of length and it can be

used for either the driver or front passen-

ger seating position.

For the safety of others, the extender

should be removed after each use, espe-

cially if the next person using the seatbelt

does not need one.

Note that leaving the seatbelt extender’s

tongue plate engaged with the seatbelt

buckle may prevent the Subaru advanced

front airbag system from functioning cor-

rectly or cause the system to fail.

WARNING

Be sure to observe the following

when using the seatbelt extender.

Failure to follow these instructions

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-19

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (50,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-20 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

and warnings could reduce the

effectiveness of the seatbelt and

result in more serious injury in the

event of a collision.

. Never use the extender when the

belt itself is long enough to

permit it to be buckled properly.

If removal of heavy clothing is all

that is needed to permit the

seatbelt to be buckled properly,

remove the heavy clothing and

do not use the extender.

. Do not use the extender if the

buckle of the extender rests over

the abdomen.

. Do not let someone else use the

extender. Use of an extender

when it is not needed could

reduce the effectiveness of the

seatbelt and result in more ser-

ious injury in the event of a

collision.

. Use the extender only for the

front seatbelts and only for the

model for which it was originally

provided. Never use the extender

for the rear seatbelts or for a

different model.

NOTE

When the seatbelt extender is used by

a pregnant passenger, consult a doctor

to get approval in advance.

To connect the extender to the seatbelt,

insert the tongue plate into the seatbelt

buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on the

buckle-release buttons of the extender

and the seatbelt are both facing outward

as shown in the diagram. You will hear a

click when the tongue plate locks into the

buckle.

When releasing the seatbelt, press on the

buckle-release button on the extender, not

on the seatbelt. This helps to prevent

damage to the vehicle interior and ex-

tender itself.

Front seatbelt pretensioners

The driver’s and front passenger’s seat-

belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The

seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be

activated in the e vent of an accident

involving a moderate to severe frontal

collision.

Also, the seatbelt pretensioners are de-

signed to be activated in the event of an

accident involving a moderate to severe

side impact collision.

The pretensioner sensor also serves as

the frontal and side SRS airbag sensors. If

the sensors detect a certain predeter-

mined amount of force during a frontal

collision or a side impact collision, the

front seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by

Black plate (51,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

the retractor to take up the slack so that

the belt more effectively restrains the front

seat occupant.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,

an operating noise will be heard and a

small amount of smoke will be released.

These occurrences are normal and not

harmful. This smoke does not indicate a

fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been

activated, the seatbelt retractor remains

locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not

be pulled out and retracted and therefore

must be replaced.

NOTE

. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-

signed to activate in minor frontal

impacts, in minor side impacts or in

rear impacts or in roll-over accidents.

. The driver’s seat and passenger’s

seat pretensioners and frontal SRS

airbag operate simultaneously.

. The driver’s and passenger’s seat-

belt pretensioners and the SRS side

airbag operate simultaneously.

. Pretensioners are designed to func-

tion on a one-time-only basis. In the

event that a pretensioner is activated,

both the driver’s and front passenger’s

seatbelt retractor assemblies must be

replaced only by an authorized

SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-

belt retractor assemblies, use only

genuine SUBARU parts.

. If either front seatbelt does not

retract or cannot be pulled out due to

a malfunction or activation of the

pretensioner, contact your SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible.

. If the front seatbelt retractor assem-

bly or surrounding area has been

damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible.

. When you sell your vehicle, we urge

you to explain to the buyer that it has

seatbelt pretensioners by alerting him

to the contents of this section.

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection,

the occupants should sit in an

upright position with their seat-

belts properly fastened. Refer to

the “Seatbelts” section in this

chapter.

. Do not modify, remove or strike

the front seatbelt retractor as-

semblies or surrounding area.

This could result in accidental

activation of the seatbelt preten-

sioners or could make the sys-

tem inoperative, possibly result-

ing in serious injury. Seatbelt

pretensioners have no user-ser-

viceable parts. For required ser-

vicing of front seatbelt retractors

equipped with seatbelt preten-

sioners, see your nearest

SUBARU dealer.

. When discarding front seatbelt

retractor assemblies or scrap-

ping the entire vehicle due to

collision damage or for other

reasons, consult your SUBARU

dealer.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-21

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (52,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-22 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

& System monitors

A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner

while the vehicle is being driven. The

seatbelt pretensioners share the control

modulewiththeSRSairbagsystem.

Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a

seatbelt pretensioner, the S RS airbag

system warning light will illuminate. The

SRS airbag system warning light will show

normal system operation by lighting for

approximately 6 seconds when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.

The following components are monitored

by the indicator:

. Front sub sensor (Right-hand side)

. Front sub sensor (Left-hand side)

. Airbag control module (including im-

pact sensors)

. Frontal airbag module (Driver’s side)

. Frontal airbag module (Front passen-

ger’s side)

. Side airbag sensor (Center pillar right-

hand side)

. Side airbag sensor (Center pillar left-

hand side)

. Side airbag module (Driver’s side)

. Side airbag module (Front passenger’s

side)

. Seatbelt pretensioner (Driver’s side)

. Seatbelt pretensioner (Front passen-

ger’s side)

. Seatbelt buckle switch (Driver’s side)

. Seatbelt buckle switch (Front passen-

ger’s side)

. Driver’s seat position sensor

. Front passenger’s seatbelt tension

sensor

. Front passenger’s occupant detection

system weight sensor

. Front passenger’s occupant detection

control module

. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicator

. All related wiring

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, there may

be a malfunction in the seatbelt

pretensioners and/or SRS airbag

system. Immediately take your vehi-

cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer

to have the system checked. Unless

checked and properly repaired, the

seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS

airbags will not operate properly in

the event of a collision, which may

increase the risk of injury.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

. No illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous illumination of the

warning light

. Illumination of the warning light

while driving

Black plate (53,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& System servicing

WARNING

. When discarding a seatbelt re-

tractor assembly or scrapping

the entire vehicle damaged by a

collision, consult your SUBARU

dealer.

. Tampering with or disconnecting

the system’s wiring could result

in accidental activation of the

seatbelt pretensioner and/or

SRS airbag or could make the

system inoperative, which may

result in serious injury. The wir-

ing harnesses of the seatbelt

pretensioner and SRS airbag

systems are covered with yellow

insulation and the connectors of

the system are yellow for easy

identification. Do not use electri-

cal test equipment on any circuit

rel ated to the seatbelt preten-

sioner and SRS airbag systems.

For required servicing of the

seatbelt pretensioner, see your

nearest SUBARU dealer.

CAUTION

The front sub sensors are located

near the bottom of the radiator and

the side airbag sensor is located

inside each center pillar and the

SRS airbag control module includ-

ing the impact sensors is located

under the center console. If you

need service or repair in those areas

or near the front seatbelt retractors,

we recommend that you have an

authorized SUBARU dealer perform

the work.

NOTE

If the front part of the vehicle is

damaged in an accident to the extent

that the seatbelt pretensioner does not

operate, contact your SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible.

& Precautions against vehicle

modification

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if

you want to install any accessory parts to

your vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following

modifications. Such modifications

can interfere with proper operation

of the seatbelt pretensioners.

. Attachment of any equip ment

(bush bar, winches, snow plow,

skid plate, etc.) other than genu-

ine SUBARU accessory parts to

the front end.

. Modification of the suspension

system or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of different

size and construction from the

tires specified on the vehicle

placard attached to the driver’s

door pillar or specified for indivi-

dual vehicle models in this Own-

er’s Manual.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-23

Black plate (54,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-24 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Child restraint systems

Infants and small children should always

be placed in an infant or child restraint

system in the rear seat while riding in the

vehicle. You should use an infant or child

restraint system that meets Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is com-

patible with your vehicle and is appro-

priate for the child’s age and size. All child

restraint systems are designed to be

secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or

the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt

(except those covered under the section in

this manual, entitled “Installation of child

restraint systems by use of lower and

tether anchorages (LATCH)”).

Children could be endangered in an

accident if their child restraints are not

properly secured in the vehicle. When

installing the child restraint system, care-

fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the

rear seating positions than in the front

seating positions.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces

require that infants and small children be

restrained in an approved child restraint

system at all times while the vehicle is

moving.

WARNING

Never let a passenger hold a child

on his or her lap or in his or her

arms while the vehicle is moving.

The passenger cannot protect the

child from injury in a collision,

because the child will be caught

between the passenger and objects

inside the vehicle.

Additionally, holding a child in your

lap or arms in the front seat exposes

that child to another serious danger.

Since the SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed and force, the

child could be injured or even killed.

WARNING

Children should be p roperly re-

strained at all times. Never allow a

child to stand up, or to kneel on any

seat. Unrestrained children will be

Black plate (55,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

thrown forward during sudden stop

or in an accident and can be injured

seriously.

Additionally, children standing up or

kneeling on or in front of the front

seat are exposed another serious

danger. Since the SRS airbag de-

ploys with considerable speed and

force, the child could be injured or

even killed.

& Where to place a child re-

straint system

The following are SUBARU’s recommen-

dations on where to place a child restraint

system in your vehicle.

A: Front passenger ’s seat

You should not install a child restraint

system (including a booster seat) due to

the hazard to child ren posed by the

passenger’s airbag.

B: Rear seat, window-side seating

positions

Recommended positions for all types of

child restraint systems.

In these positions, Automatic/Emergency

Locking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and

lower anchorages (bars) are provided for

installing a child restraint system.

Some types of child restraints might not be

able to be secured firmly due to projection

of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use

only a child restraint system that has a

bottom base that fits snugly against the

contours of the seat cushion and can be

securely retained using the seatbelt.

C: Rear seat, center seating position

Installing a child restraint system is not

recommended, although the A/ELR seat-

belt and an upper anchorage (tether

anchorage) are provided in this position.

Some types of child restraints might not be

able to be secured firmly due to projection

of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use

only a child restraint system that has a

bottom base that fits snugly against the

contours of the seat cushion and can be

securely retained using the seatbelt.

WARNING

Put children aged 12 and under in

the rear seat properly restrained at

all times. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed and force

and can injure or even kill children,

especially if they are 12 years of age

and under and are not restrained or

improperly restrained. Because chil-

dren are lighter and weaker than

adults, their risk of being injured

from deployment is greater.

Consequently, be sure to secure

ALL types of child restraint devices

(including forward facing child

seats) in the REAR seats at all times.

You should choose a restraint de-

vice which is appropriate for the

child’s age, height and weight. Ac-

cording to accident statistics, chil-

dren are safer when properly re-

strained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating posi-

tions.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-25

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (56,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-26 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

WARNING

SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS

EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’S

SRS AIRBAG, NEVER INSTALL A

REARWARD FACING CHILD

SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PAS-

SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’SHEADTOOCLOSETO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

& Choosing a child restraint

system

Choose a child restraint system that is

appropriate for the child’s age and size

(weight and height) in order to provide the

child with proper protection. The child

restraint system should meet all applic-

able requirements of Federal Motor Vehi-

cle Safety Standards for United States or

Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

for Canada. It can be identified by looking

for the label on the child restraint system

or the manufacture’s statement of com-

pliance in the document attached to the

system. Also it is important for you to

make sure that the child restraint system

is compatible with the vehicle in which it

will be used.

& Installing child restraint sys-

tems with A/ELR seatbelt

WARNING

. Child restraint systems and seat-

belts can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny

weather; they could burn a small

child. Check the child restraint

system before you place a child

in it.

. Do not leave an unsecured child

restraint system in your vehicle.

Unsecured child restraint sys-

tems can be thrown around in-

side of the vehicle in a sudden

stop, turn or accident; they can

strike and injure vehicle occu-

pants as well as result in serious

injuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held

securely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

Black plate (57,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

! Installing a rearward facing child

restraint

1. Place the child restraint system in the

rear seating position.

2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the child restraint system

following the instructions provided by its

manufacturer.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the

retractor to change the retractor over from

the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

function. Then, allow the belt to rewind

into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,

clicks will be heard which indicate the

retractor functions as ALR.

6. Push and pull the child restraint

system forward and from side to side to

check if it is firmly secured.

Sometime a child restraint can be more

firmly secured by pushing it down into the

seat cushion and then tightening the

seatbelt.

7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt

to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR

properly functioning).

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-27

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (58,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-28 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

8. To remove the child restraint system,

press the release button on the seatbelt

buckle and allow the b elt to retract

completely. The belt will return to the

ELR mode.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-

CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT

PASSENGER’SSEAT.DOINGSO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH

TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE

SRS AIRBAG.

NOTE

When the child restraint system is no

longer in use, remove it and restore the

ELR function of the retractor. That

function is restored by allowing the

seatbelt to retract fully.

! Installing forward facing child re-

straint

1. Place the child restraint system in the

rear seating position.

2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the child restraint system

following the instructions provided by its

manufacturer.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the

retractor to change the retractor over from

the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

function. Then, allow the belt to rewind

into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,

clicks will be heard which indicate the

retractor functions as ALR.

Black plate (59,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

6. Before having a child sit in the child

restraint system, move it back and forth

and right and left to check if it is firmly

secured. Sometimes a child restraint can

be more firmly secured by pushing it down

into the seat cushion and then tightening

the seatbelt.

7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt

to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR

properly functioning).

8. If the child restraint system requires a

top tether, latch the hook onto the top

tether anchor and tighten the top tether.

See the “Top tether anchorages” for

additional instructions.

9. To remove the child restraint system,

press the release button on the seatbelt

buckle and allow the belt to retract

completely. The belt will return to the

ELR mode. Unhook the top tether hook

from the top tether anchor.

NOTE

When the child restraint system is no

longer in use, remove it and restore the

ELR function of the retractor. That

function is restored by allowing the

seatbelt to retract fully.

& Installing a booster seat

WARNING

. Child restraint systems and seat-

belts can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny

weather; they could burn a small

child. Check the child restraint

system before you place a child

in it.

. Do not leave an unsecured child

restraint system in your vehicle.

Unsecured child restraint sys-

tems can be thrown around in-

side of the vehicle in a sudden

stop, turn or accident; they can

strike and injure vehicle occu-

pants as well as result in serious

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-29

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (60,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-30 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

injuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held

securely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

1. Place the booster seat in the rear

seating position and sit the child on it. The

child should sit well back on the booster

seat.

2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the booster seat and the child

following the instructions provided by its

manufacturer.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click. Take care not to

twist the seatbelt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned

across the center of child’s shoulder and

that the lap belt is positioned as low as

possible on the child’s hips.

4. To remove the booster seat, press the

release button on the seatbelt buckle and

allow the belt to retract.

WARNING

. Never use a belt that is twisted or

reversed. In an accident, this can

increase the risk or severity of

injury to the child.

. Never place the shoulder belt

under the child’s arm or behind

the child ’s back. If an accident

occurs, this can increase the risk

or severity of injury to the child.

. The seatbelt should fit snugly in

ord er to provide full restrain t.

Loose fitting belts are not as

effective in preventing or redu-

cing injury.

. Place the lap belt as low as

possible on the child’s hips. A

high-positioned lap belt will in-

crease the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen, and

both can result in serious inter-

nal injury or death.

. Make sure the shoulder belt is

positioned across the center of

child’s shoulder. Pl acing the

shoulder belt over the neck may

result in neck injury during sud-

den braking or in a collision.

Black plate (61,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Installation of child restraint

systems by use of lower and

tether anchorages (LATCH)

WARNING

. Child restraint systems and seat-

belts can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny

weather; they could burn a small

child. Check the child restraint

system before you place a child

in it.

. Do not leave an unsecured child

restraint system in your vehicle.

Unsecured child restraint sys-

tems can be thrown around in-

side of the vehicle in a sudden

stop, turn or accident; they can

strike and injure vehicle occu-

pants as well as result in serious

injuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held

securely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

Some types of child restraint systems can

be installed on the rear seat of your

vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such

child restraint systems are secured to the

designated anchorages provided on the

vehicle body.

The lower and tether anchorages are

sometimes referred to as the LATCH

system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren).

Your vehicle is equipped with four lower

anchorages (bars) and three upper an-

chorages (tether anchorages) for accom-

modating such child restraint systems.

The lower anchorages (bars) are used for

installing a child restraint system only on

the rear seat window-side seating posi-

tions. For each window-side seating posi-

tion, two lower anchorages are provided.

Each anchor bar is located where the seat

cushion meets the seatback.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-31

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (62,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-32 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

The tether anchorages (upper an-

chorages) are provided for all the seating

positions (center and both window-side

ones) of the rear seat.

You will find marks “ ” at the bottom of

the rear seat seatbacks. These marks

indicate the positions of the lower an-

chorages (bars).

Each lower anchorage is located where

the seat cushion meets the seatback.

1. Use the “

” marks to locate the two

lower anchorages (bars) for the position

where you want to install the child restraint

system.

2. While following the instructions sup-

plied by the child restraint system manu-

facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the

lower anchorages located at “

” marks on

the bottom of the rear seatback. When the

hooks are connected, make sure the

adjacent seatbelts are not caught.

Black plate (63,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

3. [If your child restraint system is of a

flexible attachment type (which uses

tether belts to connect the child restraint

system properly to the lower anchorages)]

While pushing the child restraint into the

seat cushion, pull both left and right lower

tether belts up to secure the child restraint

system firmly by taking up the slack in the

belt.

4. Connect the top tether hook to the

tether anchorage and firmly tighten the

tether.

For information on how to set the top

tether, read the following “Top tether

anchorages”.

5. Before seating a child in the child

restraint system, try to move seat back

and forth and left and right to verify that it

is held securely in position.

6. To remove the child restraint system,

follow the reverse procedures of installa-

tion.

If you have any question concerning this

type of child restraint system, ask your

SUBARU dealer.

& Top tether anchorages

Your vehicle is equipped with three top

tether anchorages so that a child restraint

system having a top tether can be

installed in the rear seat. When installing

a child restraint system using top tether,

proceed as follows, while observing the

instructions by the child restraint system

manufacturer.

Since a top tether can provide additional

stability by offering another connection

between a child restraint system and the

vehicle, we recommend that you use a top

tether whenever one is required or avail-

able.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-33

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (64,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-34 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Anchorage location

1) For left seat

2) For center seat

3) For right seat

Three upper anchorages are installed on

the rear edge of the roof.

Open the cover flaps to use the tether

anchorages.

! To hook the top tether

1. Remove the head restraint at the

seating position where the child restraint

system has been installed with the lower

anchorages or seatbelt; lift up the head

restraint while pressing the release button.

Store the head restraint in the cargo area.

Avoid placing the head restraint in the

passenger compartment to prevent it from

being thrown around in the passenger

compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp

turn.

2. Open the cover flaps to use the

anchorages. Fasten the top tether hook

of the child restraint system to the appro-

priate top tether anchorage.

3. Tighten the top tether securely.

Black plate (65,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

CAUTION

Always remove the head restraint

when mounting a child restraint

system with a top tether. Otherwise,

it may not be possible to fasten the

top tether tightly.

*SRS airbag (Supplemental

Restraint System airbag)

*SRS: This stands for supplemental re-

straint system. This name is used be-

cause the airbag system supplements the

vehicle’s seatbelts.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crash

sensing and diagnostic module, which will

record the use of the seatbelt(s) by the

driver and/or front passenger when any of

the SRS frontal and side airbags deploys.

& Vehicle with driver’s and

front passenger’s SRS air-

bags and lap/shoulder re-

straints

Your vehicle is equipped with a supple-

mental restraint system in addition to a

lap/shoulder belt at each front seating

position.

The supplemental restraint system (SRS)

consists of two airbag (driver’s and front

passenger’s frontal airbags) or four air-

bags (driver’s and front passenger’s fron-

tal airbags and driver’s and front passen-

ger’s side airbags).

These SRS airbags are designed only

as a supplement to the primary protec-

tion provided by the seatbelt.

The system also controls front seatbelt

pretensioners. For operation instructions

and precautions concerning the seatbelt

pretensioner, see the “Front seatbelt pre-

tensioners” section in this chapter.

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection in

the event of an accident, the

driver and all passengers in the

vehicle should always wear seat-

belts when the vehicle is moving.

The SRS airbag is designed only

as a supplement to the primary

protection provided by the seat-

belt. It does not do away with the

need to fasten seatbelts. In com-

bination with the seatbelts, it

offers the best combined protec-

tion in case of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases

the chance of severe injury or

death in a crash even when the

vehicle has the SRS airbag.

For instructions and precautions

concerning the seatbelt system,

see the “ Seatbelts” section in

this chapter.

. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily

close to the SRS airbag. Because

the SRS airbag deploys with

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-35

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (66,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-36 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

considerable speed – faster than

the blink of an eye – and force to

protect in high speed collisions,

the force of an airbag can injure

an occupant whose body is too

close to SRS airbag.

It is also important to wear your

seatbelt to help avoid injuries

that can result when the SRS

airbag contacts an occupant not

in proper position such as one

thrown forward during pre-acci-

dent braking.

Even when properly positioned,

there remains a possibility that

an occupant may suffer minor

injury such as abrasions and

bruises to the face or arms

because of the SRS airbag de-

ployment force.

. The SRS airbags deploy with

consider able speed and force.

Occupants who are out of proper

position when th e SRS airbag

deploys could suffer very serious

injuries. Because the SRS airbag

needs enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should always

sit upright and well back in the

seat as far from the steering

wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control

and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as

possible and sit upright and well

back in the seat.

. Do not place any objects over or

near the SRS airbag cover or

between you and the SRS airbag.

If the SRS airbag deploys, those

objects could interfere with its

proper operation and could be

propelled inside the vehicle and

cause injury.

WARNING

. Put children aged 12 and under in

the rear seat properly restrained

at all times. The SRS airbag

deploys with considerable speed

and force and can injure or even

kill children, especially if they are

12 years of age and under and

are not restrained or improperly

restrained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

deployment is greater.

Consequently, we strongly re-

commend that ALL children (in-

cluding those in child seats and

those that have outgrown child

restraint devices) sit in the REAR

seat properly restrained at all

times in a child restraint device

or in a seatbe lt, whichever is

appropriate for the child’s age,

height and weight.

Secure ALL types of child re-

straint devices (including for-

ward facing child seats) in the

REAR seats at all times.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating

positions than in the front seat-

ing positions.

For instructions and precautions

concerning the child restraint

system, see the “Child restraint

Black plate (67,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

systems” section in this chapter.

. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE

FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Never allow a child to stand up,

or to kneel on the front passen-

ger’s seat, or never hold a child

on your lap or in your arms. The

SRS airbag deploys with consid-

erable force and can injure or

even kill the child.

CAUTION

. When the SRS airbag deploys,

some smoke will be released.

This smoke could cause breath-

ing problems for people with a

history of asthma or other

breathing trouble. If you or your

passengers have breathing pro-

blems after SRS airbag deploys,

get fresh air promptly.

. A deploying SRS airbag releases

hot gas. Occupants could get

burned if they come into direct

contact with the hot gas.

NOTE

When you sell your vehicle, we urge

you to explain to the buyer that it is

equipped with SRS airbags by alerting

him or her to the applicable section in

this Owner’s Manual.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-37

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (68,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-38 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1) Airbag control module (including impact

sensors)

2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)

3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s

side)

4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side)

5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)

6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)

7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s

side)

8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand

side)

9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-

hand side)

10) Airbag wiring (yellow)

11) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver ’s side)

12) Seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s

side)

13) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s

side)

14) Seatbelt buckle switch (driver ’s side)

15) Driver’s seat position sensor

16) Front passenger’s seatbelt tension sen-

sor

17) Front passenger’s occupant detection

system weight sensor

18) Front passenger’s occupant detection

control module

19) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicator

20) SRS airbag system warning light

Black plate (69,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Subaru advanced frontal air-

bag system

Your vehicle is equipped with a Subaru

advanced frontal airbag system that com-

plies with the new advanced frontal airbag

requirements in the amended Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)

No. 208.

The Subaru advanced frontal airbag sys-

tem automatically determines the deploy-

ment force of the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag at the time of deployment as well as

whether or not to activate the front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if

activated, the deployment force of the

SRS frontal airbag at the time of deploy-

ment.

Your vehicle has warning labels on the

driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors

beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH

ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag

attached to the glove box lid beginning

with the phrase “Even with Advanced Air

Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read

the instructions on the warning labels and

tag.

Always wear your seatbelt. The subaru

advanced frontal airbag system is a

supplemental restraint system and must

be used in combination with a seatbelt. All

occupants should wear a seatbelt or be

seated in an appropriate child restraint

system.

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed

in the center portion of the steering wheel.

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is stowed near the top of the dashboard

under an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.

In a moderate to severe frontal collision,

the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags deploy and supplement the

seatbelts by reducing the impact on the

driver’s and front passenger’s head and

chest.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-

CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT

SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS

INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD

BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD

TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

WARNING

Never allow a child to stand up, or to

kneel on the front passenger’s seat.

The SRS airbag deploys with con-

siderable force and can injure or

even kill the child.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-39

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (70,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-40 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

WARNING

Never hold a child on your lap or in

your arms. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable force and can

injure or even kill the child.

WARNING

The SRS airbag deploys with con-

siderable speed and force. Occu-

pants who are out of proper position

when the SRS airbag deploys could

suffer very serious inj uries. Be-

cause the SRS airbag needs enough

space fo r deployment, the drive r

should always sit upright and well

back in the seat as far from the

steering wheel as practical whil e

still maintaining full vehicle control

and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as

possible and sit upright and well

back in the seat.

It is also important to wear your

seatbelt to help avoid injuries that

can result when the SRS airbag

contacts an occupant not in proper

position such as one thrown toward

the front of the vehicle during pre-

accident braking.

WARNING

Do not put any objects over the

steering wheel pad and dashboard.

If the SRS frontal airbag deploys,

those objects could interfere with its

proper operation and could be pro-

pelled inside the vehicle and cause

injury.

Black plate (71,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

WARNING

Do not attach accessories to the

windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-

ror over the rear view mirror. If the

SRS airbag deploys, those objects

could become projectiles that could

seriously injure vehicle occupants.

! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a

dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in

different ways depending on the severity

of impact, backward-forward adjustment

of the driver’s seat position and whether or

not he/she is wearing the seatbelt.

The backward-forward adjustment of the

driver’s seat position is monitored by the

driver’s seat position sensor under the

driver’s seat.

Whether or not the driver is wearing the

seatbelt is monitored by the seatbelt

buckle switch.

Observe the following precautions. Failure

to do so may cause the seatbelt buckle

switch and/or the seat position sensor to

malfunction, preventing the Subaru ad-

vanced frontal airbag system from func-

tioning correctly or causing the system to

fail.

. Do not place articles/metal objects or

install any accessory other than a genuine

SUBARU accessory under the driver’s

seat. Do not allow the rear seat occupant

to kick the driver’s seat or push up its

bottom surface with his/her feet.

. Do not place a magnet near the

seatbelt buckle or under the driver’s seat.

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or the

driver’s seat position sensor have failed,

the SRS airbag system warning light will

illuminate. Although the driver’sSRS

frontal airbag can deploy regardless of

the backward-forward adjustment of the

driver ’ s seat position even when the

warning light is on, have the system

inspected by your SUBARU dealer im-

mediately if the SRS airbag system warn-

ing light comes on.

NOTE

The driver ’s SRS side airbag and

seatbelt pretensioner are not controlled

by the Subaru advanced frontal airbag

system.

! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-

bag

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator

operates in different ways depending on

the severity of impact.

The total load on the seat is monitored by

the occupant detection system’s weight

sensor located under the seat.

The system has another sensor that

monitors the tension of the front passen-

ger seatbelt. Using the total seat load and

seatbelt tension data from the sensors,

the occupant detection system determines

whether the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag should or should not be inflated.

The occupant detection system may not

inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag deploys. This is normal.

Observe the following precautions. Failure

to do so may prevent the Subaru ad-

vanced frontal airbag system from func-

tioning correctly or cause the system to

fail.

. Do not apply any strong impact to the

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-41

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (72,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-42 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

front passenger’s seat such as by kicking.

. Do not spill liquid on the front passen-

ger’s seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off

immediately.

. Do not remove or disassemble the front

passenger’s seat.

. Do not install any accessory (such as

an audio amplifier) other than a genuine

SUBARU accessory under the front pas-

senger’s seat.

. Do not place anything (shoes, umbrel-

la, etc.) under the front passenger’s seat.

. The front passenger’s seat must not be

used with the head restraint removed.

. Do not leave any article including a

child restraint system on the front passen-

ger’s seat or the seatbelt tongue and

buckle engaged when you leave your

vehicle.

. Do not place a magnet near the

seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor.

. Do not use front seats with their back-

ward-forward position and seatback not

being locked into place securely. If any of

them are not locked securely, adjust them

again. For adjusting procedure, refer to

the “Manual seat” in the front seats section

in chapter 1 in this Owner’s Manual.

(Models equipped with manual seats only)

. If you use an optional seatbelt exten-

der, remove it after each use. (Refer to the

“Seatbelt extender” section in this chap-

ter.)

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front

passenger’s occupant detection system

have failed, the SRS airbag system

warning light will illuminate. Have the

system inspected by your SUBARU deal-

er immediately if the SRS airbag system

warning light comes on.

If your vehicle has sustained impact, this

may affect the proper function of the

Subaru advanced frontal airbag system.

Have your vehicle inspected at your

SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

The front passenger’s SRS side airbag

and seatbelt pretensioner are not con-

trolled by the Subaru advanced frontal

airbag system.

! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicators

1) U.S.-spec. models

2) Canada-spec. models

or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator

or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag

OFF indicator

The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicators show you the status of

the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.

The indicators are located next to the

clock in the central portion of the instru-

ment panel.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, both the ON and OFF

indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during

which time the system is checked. Follow-

ing the syst em check, both indicators

Black plate (73,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

extinguish for 2 seconds. After this, one of

the indicators illuminates depending on

the status of the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag reached by the Subaru

advanced frontal airbag system monitor-

ing.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF

indicator will remain extinguished.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal

airbag ON indicator will remain extin-

guished whil e the OFF indi cator will

illuminate.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, if both the ON and OFF indica-

tors remain lit or extinguished simulta-

neously even after the system check

period, the system is faulty. Contact your

SUBARU dealer immediately for an in-

spection.

! Conditions in which front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not

activated

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

will not be activated when any of the

following conditions are met regarding the

front passenger’s seat:

. The seat is empty.

. The seat is equipped with a rearward

facing child restraint system and an infant

is restrained with it. (See WARNING that

follows.)

. The seat is equipped with a forward

facing child restraint system and a small

child is restrained with it. (See WARNING

that follows.)

. The seat is equipped with a booster

seat and a small child is in the booster

seat. (See WARNING that follows.)

. The seat is relieved of the occupant

load for a time exceeding the predeter-

mined period.

. The seat is occupied by a child who

has outgrown a child restraint system

(See WARNING that follows.) or a small

adult.

. The front passenger’s occupant detec-

tion system is faulty.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-

CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT

PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE

FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON-

TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be

sure to install it in the REAR seat in

a correct manner. Also, it is strongly

recommended that any forward fa-

cing child seat or booster seat be

installed in the REAR seat, and that

even children who have outgrown a

child restraint system be also

seated in the REAR seat. This is

because children sitting in the front

passenger’s seat may be killed or

severely injured shou ld the front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-

ploy. REAR seats are the safest

place for children.

When the front passenger’s seat is occu-

pied by a child, observe the following

precautions. Failure to do so may increase

the load on the front passenger’s seat,

activating the front passenger’sSRS

frontal airbag even though that seat is

occupied by a child.

. Do not place any article on the seat

other than the child occupant and a child

restraint system.

. Do not place more than one child on

the seat.

. Do not install any accessory such as a

table or TV onto the seatback.

. Do not store a heavy load in the

seatback pocket.

. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to

place his/her hands or legs on the front

passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to

pull the seatback.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-43

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (74,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-44 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! If the front passenger’s frontal air-

bag ON indicator illuminates and the

OFF indicator extinguishes even

when an infant or a small child is in

a child restraint system (including

booster seat)

Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

position if the front passenger’s frontal

airbag ON indicator illuminates and the

OFF indicator extinguishes even when an

infant or a small child is in a child restraint

system (including booster seat). Remove

the child restraint system from the seat. By

referring to the child restraint manufac-

turer’s recommendations as well as the

child restraint system installation proce-

dures in the “Child restraint systems”

section in this chapter, correctly install

the child restraint system. Turn the ignition

switch to the “ON” position and make sure

that the front passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator goes out and the OFF

indicator comes on.

If the ON indicator remains illuminated

while the OFF indicator extinguishes, take

the following actions.

. Ensure that no article is placed on the

seat other than the child restraint system

and the child occupant.

. Ensure that there is no article left in the

seatback pocket.

. Ensure that the backward-forward po-

sition and seatback of front passenger’s

seat are locked into place securely by

moving the seat back and forth. (Models

equipped with manual seats only)

If the ON indicator still illuminates while

the OFF indicator extinguishes after taking

relevant cor rective actio ns described

above, relocate the child restraint system

to the rear seat and immediately contact

your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

NOTE

When a child who has outgrown a child

restraint system or a small adult is

seated in the front passenger’s seat,

the Subaru advanced frontal airbag

system may or may not activate the

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

depending on the occupant’s seating

posture. If the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag is activated (the ON

indicator illuminates while the OFF

indicator extinguishes), take the follow-

ing actions.

. Ensure that no article is placed on

the seat other than the occupant.

. Ensure that there is no article left in

the seatback pocket.

If the ON indicator still illuminates while

the OFF indicator extinguishes despite

the fact that the actions noted above

have been taken, seat the child/small

adult in the rear seat and immediately

contact your SUBARU dealer for an

inspection. Even if the system has

passed the dealer inspection, it is

recommended that on subsequent trips

the child/small adult always take the

rear seat.

Children who have outgrown a child

restraint system should always wear the

seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag

is deactivated or activated.

! Conditions in which front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

will be activated for deployment upon

impact when any of the following condi-

tions is met regarding the front passen-

ger’s seat.

. When the seat is occupied by an adult.

. When a heavy article is placed on the

seat.

When the front passenger’s seat is occu-

pied by an adult, observe the following

precautions. Failure to do so may lessen

the load on the front passenger’s seat,

deactivating the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag despite the fact that the seat

is occupied by an adult.

Black plate (75,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to

lift the front passenger’s seat cushion

using his/her feet.

. Do not place any article under the front

passenger’s seat, or squeeze any article

from behind and under the seat. This may

lift the seat cushion.

. Do not squeeze any article between

the front passenger’s seat and side trim/

pillar, door or center console box. This

may lift the seat cushion.

! If the passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator illuminates and the ON

indicator extinguishes even when

the front passenger’s seat is occu-

pied by an adult

This can be caused by the adult incor-

rectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat.

Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

position. Ask the front passenger to set

the seatback to the upright position, sit up

straight in the center of the seat cushion,

correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/

her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to

the rearmost position. Turn the ignition

switch to the “ON” position. If the OFF

indicator remains illuminated while the ON

indicator remains extinguished, take the

following actions.

. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

position.

. Ensure that there are no articl es,

books, shoes or other objects trapped

under the seat, at the rear of the seat, or

on the side of the seat.

. Ensure that the backward-forward po-

sition and seatback of front passenger’s

seat are locked into place securely by

moving the seat back and forth. (Models

equipped with manual seats only)

. Next, turn the ignition switch to the

“ON” position and wait 6 seconds to allow

the system to complete self-checkin g.

Following the system check, both indica-

tors extinguish for 2 seconds. Now, the

ON indicator should illuminate while the

OFF indicator remains extinguished.

If the OFF indicator still illuminates while

the ON indicator remains extinguished,

ask the occupant to move to the rear seat

and immediately contact your SUBARU

dealer for an inspection.

! Effect vehicle modifications made

for persons with disabilities may

have on Subaru advanced frontal

airbag system operation (U.S. only)

Changing or moving any parts of the front

seats, seatbelts, front bumper, front side

frame, instrument panel, combination me-

ter, steering wheel, steering column, tire,

suspension or floor panel can affect the

operation of the Subaru advanced airbag

system. If you have any questions, you

may contact the following Subaru distribu-

tors:

<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District

of Columbia>

Subaru of America, Inc.

Customer Dealer Services Department

P.O. Box 6000

Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000

1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)

Servco Subaru Inc., dba Subaru Hawaii

2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, Honolulu,

HI 96819

808-839-2273

<Guam>

Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige

Automobile

491, East Marine Drive, Route 1 Dededo,

Guam

671-633-2698

Trebol Motors

P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico

00910

787-793-2828

There are currently no Subaru distributors

in any other U.S. territories. If you are in

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-45

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (76,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-46 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

such an area, please contact the Subaru

distributor or dealer from whi ch you

bought your vehicle.

Black plate (77,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

! Operation

A) Driver ’s side

B) Passenger’s side

1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.

2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not

obstructed.

The SRS airbag can function only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

The Subaru advanced frontal airbag sys-

tem is designed to determine the activa-

tion or deactivation condition of the front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag depend-

ing on the total load on the front passen-

ger’s seat monitored by the front passen-

ger’s occupant detection system weight

sensor. For this reason, only the driver’s

SRS frontal airbag may deploy in the

event of a collision, but this does not mean

failure of the system.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-47

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (78,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-48 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

If the front sub sensors inside both front

fenders and the impact sensors in the

airbag control module detect a predeter-

mined amount of force during a frontal

collision, the control module sends signals

to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s

module or both driver’s and front passen-

ger’s modules) instructing the module(s)

to inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s). The

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbags use dual stage inflators. The two

inflators of each airbag are triggered either

sequentially or simultaneously, depending

on the severity of impact, backward-

forward adjustment of the driver’s seat

position and fastening/unfastening of the

seatbelt in the case of the driver’s SRS

frontal airbag and depending on the

severity of impact and the total load on

the seat in the case of the front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag. After deploy-

ment, the SRS airbags immediately start

to deflate so that the driver’s vision is not

obstructed. The time required from detect-

ing impact to the deflation of the SRS

airbag after deployment is shorter than the

blink of an eye.

Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag deploys and the driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,

the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt

pretensioners operate at the same time.

Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS

airbag would activate in a non-accident

situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag

will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision

and will not interfere with the driver’s

ability to maintain control of the vehicle.

When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,

fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and

some smoke will be released. These

occurrences are a normal result of the

deployment. This smoke does not indicate

a fire in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS airbag system

components around the steering

wheel and dashboard with bare

hands right after deployment. Doing

so can cause burns because the

components can be very hot as a

result of deployment.

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-

signed to deploy in the event of an

accident involving a moderate to severe

frontal collision. They are basically not

designed to deploy in lesser frontal im-

pacts because the necessary protection

can be achieved by the seatbelt alone.

Also, they are basically not designed to

deploy in side or rear impacts or in roll-

over accidents because deployment of

only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbags would not help the occupant in

those situations. The driver ’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbags are de-

signed to function on a one-time-only

basis.

SRS airbag deployment depends on the

level of force experienced in the passen-

ger compartment during a collision. That

level differs from one type of collision to

another, and it may have no bearing on

the visible damage done to the vehicle

itself.

Black plate (79,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

! Examples of accidents in which the

driver’s/driver’s and front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will most

likely deploy.

A head-on collision against a thick con-

crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19

mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates

only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-

vated when the vehicle is exposed to a

frontal impact similar in fashion and

magnitude to the co llision described

above.

! Examples of the types of accidents

in which it is possible that the

driver’s/driver’s and front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will de-

ploy.

Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or

both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags may be activated when the

vehicle sustains a hard impact in the

undercarriage area from the road surface

(such as when the vehicle plunges into a

deep ditch, is severely impacted or

knocked hard against an obstacle on the

road such as a curb).

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-49

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (80,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-50 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Examples of the types of accidents

in which deployment of the driver’s/

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require deployment

of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbag(s). If the vehicle strikes

an object, such as a telephone pole or

sign pole, or if it slides under a truck’s load

bed, or if it sustains an oblique offset

frontal impact, the driver’s/driver’sand

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)

may not deploy depending on the level of

accident forces involved.

! Examples of the types of accidents

in which the driver’s/driver’s and

front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag(s) will basically not deploy.

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags are designed basically not

Black plate (81,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

to deploy if the vehicle is struck from the

side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its

side or roof, or if it is involved in a low-

speed frontal collision.

1) First impact

2) Second impact

In an accident where the vehicle is

impacted more than once, the driver’s

and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first

impact.

Example: In the case of a double collision,

first with another vehicle, then against a

concrete wall in immediate succession,

once either or both of the driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are

activated on the first impact, it/they will not

be activated on the second impact.

& SRS side airbag (if equipped)

The SRS side airbag is stored in the door

side of each front seat seatback, which

bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.

In a moderate to s evere side impact

collision, the SRS side airbag on the

impacted side of the vehicle deploys

between the occupant and the door panel

and supplements the seatbelt by reducing

the impact on the occupant ’s chest and

head.

WARNING

The SRS side airbag is designed as

only a supplement to the primary

protection provided by the seatbelt.

They do not do away with the need

to fasten seatbelts. It is also impor-

tant to wear your seatbelt to help

avoid injuries that can result when

an occupant is not seated in a

proper upright position.

WARNING

Do not sit or lean unnecessarily

close to either front door. The SRS

side airbag is stored in both front

seat seatbacks next to the door, and

it provides protection by deploying

rapidly (faster than the blink of an

eye) in the event of a side impact

collision. However, the force of SRS

side airbag deployment may cause

injuries if your head or other parts of

the body are too close to the SRS

side airbag.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-51

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (82,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-52 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

WARNING

Do not rest your arm on either front

door or its internal trim. It could be

injured in the event of SRS side

airbag deployment.

WARNING

Never allow a child to kneel on the

front passenger’s seat facing the

side window or to wrap his/her arms

around the front seat seatback. In

the event of an accident, the force of

the SRS side airbag deployment

could injure the child serio usly

because his/her head or arms or

other parts of the body are too close

to the SRS side airbag. Since your

vehicle is also equipped with a

passenger ’s SRS frontal airbag,

children aged 12 and under should

be placed in the rear seat anyway

and should be properly restrained at

all times.

WARNING

Do not attach accessories to the

door trim or near either SRS side

airbags and do not place objects

near the SRS side airbags. In the

Black plate (83,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

event of the SRS side airbag deploy-

ment, they could be propelled dan-

gerously toward the vehicle’s occu-

pants and cause injuries.

WARNING

Do not put any kind of cover or

clothes or other objects over either

front seatback and do not attach

labels or stickers to the front seat

surface on or near the SRS side

airbag. They could prevent proper

deployment of the SRS side airbag,

reducing protection available to the

front seat’s occupant.

! Operation

1) SRS side airbag deploys as soon as a

collision occurs.

2) SRS side airbag protects the front

passenger’s head and chest.

3) After deployment, SRS side airbag starts

to deflate immediately.

The SRS side airbag can function only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

side airbags deploy independently of each

other since each has its own impact

sensor. Also, the SRS side airbag deploys

independently of the frontal airbags in the

steering wheel and instrument panel.

An impact sensor is incorporated into

each of the vehicle’s center pillars. If

either sensor detects a certain predeter-

mined amount of force during a side

impact collision, the control module sends

a signal to the side airbag module on the

impacted side of the vehicle, instructing it

to inflate the SRS side airbag. Then the

side airbag module produces gas, which

instantly inflates the SRS side airbag.

After deployment, the SRS side airbag

will deflate in a few seconds.

The SRS side airbag deploys even when

no one occupies the seat on the side on

which an impact is applied.

When the SRS side airbag deploys, a

sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be

heard and some smoke will be released.

These occurrences are a normal result of

the deployment. This smoke does not

indicate a fire in the vehicle.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-53

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (84,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-54 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS side airbag

system components around the

front seat seatback with bare hands

right after deployment. Doing so can

cause burns because the compo-

nents can be very hot as a result of

deployment.

The SRS side airbag is designed to

deploy in the event of an accident invol-

ving a moderate to severe side impact

collision. It is basically not designed to

deploy in a lesser side impact. Also, it is

basically not designed to deploy in frontal

or rear impacts because SRS side airbag

deployment would not help the occupant

in those situations.

Each SRS side airbag is designed to

function on a one-time-only basis.

SRS side airbag deployment depends on

the level of force experienced in the

passenger co mpartment during a side

impact collision. That level differs from

one type of collision to another, and it may

have no bearing on the visible damage

done to the vehicle itself.

! Example of the type of accident in

which the SRS side airbag will most

likely deploy.

A severe side impact near the front seat

activates the SRS side airbag.

Black plate (85,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to

deploy.

1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique

side-on impact.

2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact in an area outside the vicinity of

the passenger compartment.

3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or

similar object.

4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact from a motorcycle.

5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require SRS side

airbag deployment. In the event of acci-

dents like those illustrated, the SRS side

airbag may not deploy depending on the

level of accident forces involved.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-55

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (86,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-56 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Examples of the types of accidents

in which the SRS side airbag will

basically not deploy.

1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision

with another vehicle (moving or station-

ary).

2) The vehicle is struck from behind.

The SRS side airbag is basic ally not

designed to deploy if the vehicle is

involved in a frontal collision or is struck

from behind. Examples of such accidents

are illustrated.

1) First impact

2) Second impact

In an accident where the vehicle is struck

from the side more than once, the SRS

side airbag deploys only once on the first

impact.

Example: In the case of a double side

impact collision, first with one vehicle and

immediately followed by another from the

same direction, once the SRS side airbag

is activated on the first impact, it will not be

activated on the second.

& SRS airbag system monitors

A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the SRS airbag system

(including front seatbelt pretensioners)

while the vehicle is being driven. The

SRS airbag system warning light “

” will

show normal system operation by lighting

for approximately 6 seconds when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

The following components are monitored

by the indicator:

. Front sub sensor (Right-hand side)

. Front sub sensor (Left-hand side)

. Airbag control module (including im-

pact sensors)

. Frontal airbag module (Driver’s side)

. Frontal airbag module (Front passen-

Black plate (87,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

ger’s side)

. Side airbag sensor (Center pillar right-

hand side)

. Side airbag sensor (Center pillar left-

hand side)

. Side airbag module (Driver’s side)

. Side airbag module (Front passenger’s

side)

. Seatbelt pretensioner (Driver’s side)

. Seatbelt pretensioner (Front passen-

ger’s side)

. Seatbelt buckle switch (Driver’s side)

. Seatbelt buckle switch (Front passen-

ger’s side)

. Driver’s seat position sensor

. Front passenger’s seatbelt tension

sensor

. Front passenger’s occupant detection

system weight sensor

. Front passenger’s occupant detection

control module

. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicator

. All related wiring

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, there may

be a malfunction in the seatbelt

pretensioners and/or SRS airbag

system. Immediately take your vehi-

cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer

to have the system checked. Unless

checked and properly repaired, the

seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS

airbags will not operate properly in

the event of a collision, which may

increase the risk of injury.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

. No illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous ill umination of the

warning light

. Illumination of the warning light

while driving

& SRS airbag system servicing

WARNING

. When discarding an airbag mod-

ule or scrapping the entire vehi-

cle damaged by a collision, con-

sult your SUBARU dealer.

. The SRS airbag has no user-

serviceable parts. Do not use

electrical test equipment on any

circuit related to the SRS airbag

system. For required servicing of

the SRS airbag, see your nearest

SUBARU dealer. Tampering with

or disconnecting the system’s

wiring could result in accidental

inflation of the SRS airbag or

could make the system inopera-

tive, which may result in serious

injury. The wiring harnesses of

the SRS airbag system are cov-

ered with yellow insulation and

system connectors are yellow for

easy identification.

CAUTION

If you need service or repair in areas

listed below, have an authorized

SUBARU dealer perform the work.

The SRS airbag control module,

impact sensors and airbag modules

are stored in these areas.

. Under the center console

. Inside each front fender

. Steering wheel and column and

nearby areas

. Top of the dashboard on front

passenger ’s side and nearby

areas

. Each front seat and nearby area

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-57

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (88,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-58 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

. Inside each center pillar

In the event that the SRS airbag is

deployed, replacement of the system

should be performed only by an author-

ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-

nents of the SRS airbag system are

replaced, use only genuine SUBARU

parts.

NOTE

In the following cases, contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

. The front part of the vehicle was

involved in an accident in which only

the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both

driver ’s and front passenger’sSRS

frontal airbags did not deploy.

. The pad section of the steering

wheel or front passenger’s frontal air-

bag cover is scratched, cracked, or

otherwise damaged.

In addition, if your vehicle is equipped

with SRS side airbags, contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible in

the following cases.

. Either center pillar or a nearby area

of the vehicle was involved in an

accident in which the SRS side airbag

did not deploy.

. The fabric or leather of either front

seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise

damaged.

& Precautions against vehicle

modification

WARNING

. To avoid accidental activation of

the system or rendering the sys-

tem inoperative, which may re-

sult in serious injury, no modifi-

cations should be made to any

components or wiring of the SRS

airbag system.

This includes following modifica-

tions:

. Installation of custom steering

wheels

. Attachment of additional trim

materials to the dashboard

. Installation of custom seats

. Replacement of seat fabric or

leather

. Installation of additional fabric

or leather on the front seat

. Installation of additional elec-

trical/electronic equipment

such as a mobile two-way

radioonorneartheSRS

airbag system components

and/or wiring is not advisable.

This could interfere with prop-

er operation of the SRS airbag

system.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following

modifications. Such modifications

can interfere with proper operation

of the SRS airbag system.

. Attachment of any equip ment

(brush bar, winches, snow plow,

skid plate, etc.) other than genu-

ine SUBARU accessory parts to

the front end.

. Modification of the suspension

system or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of different

size and construction from the

tires specified on the vehicle

placard attached to the driver’s

door pillar or specified for indivi-

dual vehicle models in this Own-

er’s Manual.

. Attachment of any equip ment

(side steps or side sill protectors,

etc.) other than genuine SUBARU

accessory parts to the side body.

Black plate (89,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if

you want to install any accessory parts on

your vehicle.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-59

Black plate (2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2006/ 1/ 17

Left Page

————————————————————————————————————————

Black plate (3,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Keys ..................................................................... 2-2

Key number ........................................................ 2-2

Immobilizer (if equipped) .................................... 2-3

Security ID plate.................................................. 2-3

Security indicator light ........................................ 2-4

Key replacement ................................................. 2-4

Door locks ........................................................... 2-4

Locking and unlocking from the outside .............. 2-4

Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-5

Power door locking switches............................. 2-6

Key lock-in prevention function ........................... 2-6

Remote keyless entry system ............................ 2-7

Locking the doors ............................................... 2-7

Unlocking the doors ............................................ 2-8

Illuminated entry ................................................. 2-8

Vehicle finder function......................................... 2-8

Sounding a panic alarm....................................... 2-8

Selecting audible signal operation ....................... 2-8

Replacing the battery .......................................... 2-9

Replacing lost transmitters.................................. 2-9

Alarm system ..................................................... 2-13

System operation............................................... 2-13

Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-13

If you have accidentally triggered the alarm

system ............................................................ 2-13

Arming the system ............................................ 2-13

Disarming the system ........................................ 2-15

Valet mode ........................................................ 2-15

Passive arming.................................................. 2-15

Tripped sensor identification .............................. 2-16

Shock sensors (dealer option)............................ 2-17

Child safety locks .............................................. 2-17

Windows............................................................. 2-18

Power windows ................................................. 2-18

Rear gate............................................................ 2-20

Moonroof (if equipped)...................................... 2-21

To open the moonroof ....................................... 2-22

To close the moonroof ....................................... 2-22

Anti-entrapment function.................................... 2-22

Sun shade ......................................................... 2-22

Keys and doors

Black plate (92,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

2-2 Keys and doors

Keys

Vehicle with immobilizer system

1) Master key (Black)

2) Submaster key (Black)

3) Valet key (Gray)

4) Key number plate

5) Security ID plate

Vehicle without immobilizer system

1) Master key

2) Submaster key

3) Valet key

4) Key number plate

Three types of keys are provided for your

vehicle:

Master key, submaster key and valet key.

The master key and submaster key fit all

locks on your vehicle.

. Ignition switch

. Driver’s door

. Glove box

The valet key fits only the ignition switch

and door lock. You can keep the glove box

locked when you leave your vehicle and

valet key at a parking facility.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder or

key case to either key. If it bangs

against your knees while you are

driving, it could turn the ignition

switch from the “ON” position to the

“Acc” or “LOCK” position, thereby

stopping the engine.

& Key number

The key number is stamped on the key

number plate attached to the key set.

Write down the key number and keep it in

another safe place, not in the vehicle. This

number is needed to make a replacement

key if you lose your key or lock it inside the

vehicle.

For information on making replacement

keys for vehicles with the immobilizer

system, refer to the “Immobilizer” section

in this chapter.

Black plate (93,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Immobilizer (if equipped)

The immobilizer system is designed to

prevent an unauthorized persons from

starting the engine. Only keys registered

with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can

be used to operate your vehicle. Even if

an unregistered key fits into the ignition

switch and can be turned to the “START”

position, the engine will automatically stop

after several seconds.

Each immobilizer key contains a trans-

ponder in which the key’s ID code is

stored. When a key is inserted into the

ignition switch and turned to the “ON”

position, the transponder transmits the

key’s ID code to the immobilizer system’s

receiver. If the transmitted ID code

matches the ID code registered in the

immobilizer system, the system allows the

engine to be started. Since the ID code is

transmitted and acted upon almost in-

stantly, the immobilizer system does not

impede normal starting of the engine.

If the engine fails to start, pull out the key

once before trying again. (Refer to the

“Ignition switch” section [chapter 3].)

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject

to the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause

undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

NOTE

To protect your vehicl e from theft,

please pay close attention to the fol-

lowing security precautions:

. Never leave your vehicle unattended

with its keys inside.

. Before leaving your vehicle, close all

windows and lock the doors and rear

gate.

. Do not leave spare keys or any

record of your key number in the

vehicle.

CAUTION

. Do not place the key under direct

sunlight or anywhere it may

become hot.

. Do not get the key wet. If the key

gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth

immediately.

& Security ID plate

1) Key number plate

2) Security ID plate

The security ID is stamped on the security

ID plate attached to the key set. Write

down the security ID and keep it in

another safe place, not in the vehicle.

This number is needed to make a replace-

ment key if you lose your key or lock it

inside the vehicle.

This number is also needed for replace-

ment or repair of the engine control

module and immobilizer control module.

Keys and doors 2-3

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (94,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

2-4 Keys and doors

& Security indicator light

The security indicator light deters potential

thieves by indicating that the vehicle is

equipped with an immobilizer system. It

begins flashing approximately 60 seconds

after the ignition switch is turned from the

“ON” position t o the “Acc” or “LOCK”

position or immediately after the key is

pulled out.

If the security indicator light does not flash,

the immobilizer system may be faulty. If

this occurs, contact your SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible.

In case an unauthorized key is used (e.g.

an imitation key), the security indicator

light comes on.

NOTE

Even if the security indicator light

flashes irregularly or its fuse blows

(the light does not flash if its fuse is

blown), the immobilizer system will

function normally.

& Key replacement

Your key number plate and security ID

plate will be required if you ever need a

replacement key made. Any new key must

be registered for use with your vehicle’s

immobilizer system before it can be used.

Up to four keys can be registered for use

with one vehicle.

For security, all the keys registered with

your vehicle’s immobilizer system will

have their ID codes erased and re-

registered when a new key is made.

Therefore, all of your vehicle’s keys must

be presented when a new key is regis-

tered. Any key that is not re-registered

when a new key is made cannot be used

after the other keys are re-registered. For

information on replacement keys and on

the registration of keys with your immo-

bilizer system, contact your SUBARU

dealer.

Door locks

& Locking and unlocking from

the outside

1) Lock

2) Unlock

To lock the driver’s door from the outside

with the key, turn the key toward the rear.

To unlock the door, turn the key toward the

front (Driver’s side only).

Pull the outside door handle to open the

unlocked door.

Black plate (95,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1) Rotate the lock lever rearward.

2) Close the door.

To lock the door from the outside without

the key, rotate the lock lever rearward and

then close the door.

To lock the door from the outside using the

power door locking switch, push the front

side of the switch (“LOCK” side) and then

close the door. In this case, all closed

doors and the rear gate are locked at the

same time.

Always make sure that all doors and the

rear gate are locked before leaving your

vehicle.

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the key

inside the vehicle when locking the

doors from the outside without the key.

& Locking and unlocking from

the inside

WARNING

Keep all doors locked when you

drive, especially when small chil-

dren are in your vehicle.

Along with the proper use of seat-

belts and child restraints, locking

the doors reduces the chance of

being thrown out of the vehicle in an

accident.

It also helps prevent passengers

from falling out if a door is acciden-

tally opened, and intruders from

unexpectedly opening doors and

entering your vehicle.

1) Lock

2) Unlock

To lock the door from the inside, rotate the

lock lever rearward. To unlock the door

from the inside, rotate the lock lever

forward.

The red mark on the lock lever appears

when the door is unlocked.

Pull the inside door handle to open an

unlocked door.

Always make sure that all doors and the

rear gate are closed before starting to

drive.

Keys and doors 2-5

Black plate (96,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

2-6 Keys and doors

Power door locking switches

1) Lock

2) Unlock

All doors and the rear gate can be locked

and unlocked by the power door locking

switches located at the driver’s side and

the front passenger’s side doors.

To lock all the doors and the rear gate,

push the “LOCK” side of the switch.

To unlock all the doors and the rear gate,

push the “UNLOCK” side of the switch.

When you close the doors after you set

the door locks, the doors remain locked.

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the key

inside the vehicle before locking the

doors from the outside using the power

door locking switches.

& Key lock-in prevention func-

tion

This function prevents the doors from

being locked with the key still in the

ignition switch.

! Behavior with key lock-in preven-

tion function operational

With the driver’s door open, the doors are

automatically kept unlocked even if the

door locking switch is pushed to the

“LOCK” side.

! Behavior with key lock-in preven-

tion function non-operational

. If the lock lever is turned to the rear

(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door

open and the driver’s door is then closed

with the lock lever in that position, the

driver’s door is locked.

. If the spare key is used to lock the

driver’s door from the outside of the

vehicle, the door is locked.

NOTE

When leaving the vehicle, make sure

you are holding the key before locking

the doors.

Black plate (97,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Remote keyless entry system

CAUTION

. Do not expose the transmitter to

severe shocks, such as those

experienced as a result of drop-

ping or throwing.

. Do not take the transmitter apart

except when replacing the bat-

tery.

. Do not get the transmitter wet. If it

gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth

immediately.

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject

to the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause

undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

Two transmitters are provided for your

vehicle.

The remote keyless entry system has the

following functions.

. Locking and unlocking the doors and

rear gate without a key

. Sounding a panic alarm

. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-

tem (if your vehicle is equipped with an

optional alarm system). See the next

section “Alarm system” for detailed infor-

mation.

The operable distance of the keyless entry

system is approximately 30 feet (10

meters). However, this distance will vary

depending on environmental conditions.

The system’s operable distance will be

shorter in areas near a facility or electronic

equipment emitting strong radio waves

such as a power plant, broadcast station,

TV tower, or remote controller of home

electronic appliances.

The keyless entry system does not oper-

ate when the key is inserted in the ignition

switch to prevent accidental lockout.

: LOCK/ARM button

Press to Lock all doors.

Press and Hold to activate panic alarm.

Press 3 times in a 5-second period to use

vehicle finder function.

: UNLOCK/DISARM button

1) Press once to Unlock driver ’s door.

2) Press a second time to Unlock all

other doors and rear gate.

& Locking the doors

Briefly press the “ ” button (for less than 2

seconds) to lock all doors and rear gate.

An electronic chirp will sound once and

the turn signal lights will flash once.

If any of the doors or the rear gate is not

fully closed, an electronic chirp will sound

5 times and the turn signal lights will flash

5 times to alert you that the doors or the

rear gate are not properly closed. When

Keys and doors 2-7

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (98,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

2-8 Keys and doors

you close the door, it will automatically

lock.

NOTE

If the “ ” button is pressed for 2

seconds or longer, the panic alarm will

sound. When locking t he doors in

normal circumstances, press the “

”

button for less than 2 seconds. For

details on the panic alarm, refer to

“Sounding a panic alarm”.

& Unlocking the doors

Briefly press the “ ” button (for less than

2 seconds) to unlock the driver’s door. An

electronic chirp will sound twice and the

turn signal lights will flash twice. To unlock

all other doors and the rear gate, briefly

press the “

” button a second time within

5 seconds.

NOTE

If the interval between the first and

second presses of the “

” button (for

unlocking of all of the doors and the

rear gate) is extremely short, the sys-

tem may not respond.

& Illuminated entry

The interior (dome and cargo area) light

will illuminate when the “

” button is

pressed. This light stay illuminated for

approximately 30 seconds if any of the

doors or the rear gate is not opened.

If the “

” button is pressed before 30

seconds have elapsed, this light will go

out.

To activate this function, set the following

interior light switches to the indicated

positions:

Dome light: Middle position

Cargo area light: DOOR position

& Vehicle finder function

Use this function to find your vehicle

parked among many vehicles in a large

parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet

(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the “

”

button 3 times in a 5-second period will

cause your vehicle’s horn to sound once

and its turn signal lights to flash 3 times.

NOTE

If the interval between presses is too

short when you press the “

” button 3

times, the system may not respond to

the signals from the remote transmitter.

& Sounding a panic alarm

To activate the alarm, keep the “ ” button

pressed for more than 2 seconds.

The horn will sound and the turn signal

lights will flash.

To deactivate it, press any button on the

remote transmitter. Unless a button on the

remote is pressed, the alarm will be

deactivated after approximately 30 sec-

onds.

& Selecting audible signal op-

eration

Using an electronic chirp, the system will

give you an audible signal when the doors

lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn

the audible signal off.

Do the following to deactivate the audible

signal. You can also use the same steps

to restore the function.

1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all

doors and the rear gate.

2. Open the driver’s door, then remove

the key from the ignition switch.

3. Hold down the “UNLOCK” side of the

power door locking switch.

4. While holding down the “UNLOCK ”

side of the power door locking switch,

insert the key into the ignition switch and

remove it again at least 6 times within 10

seconds after Step 3.

Black plate (99,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

5. While still holding down the “UNLOCK”

side of the power door locking switch,

close the driver’s door once within 10

seconds after Step 4.

6. The turn signal lights flashes 3 times to

indicate completion of the setting.

NOTE

If you do not close the driver’s door

within 10 seconds after Step 4, a flash

of the turn signal lights will signal time-

out. If this happens, repeat the whole

procedure from Step 1.

You may have the above settings done by

your SUBARU dealer.

& Replacing the battery

CAUTION

. Do not let dust, oil or water get on

or in the transmitter when repla-

cing the battery.

. Be careful not to damage the

printed circuit board in the trans-

mitter when replacing the battery.

When the transmitter battery begins to get

weak, transmitter range will begin to

decrease. Replace the battery as soon

as possible.

To replace the battery:

1. Open the transmitter case using a flat-

head screwdriver.

2. Separate the case.

3. Remove the old battery from the

holder.

1) Negative (−) side facing up

4. Replace wi th a new battery (Type

CR2025 or equivalent) making sure to

install the new battery with the negative

(−) side facing up.

5. Reinstall the back half of the transmit-

ter case by snapping it back on.

After the battery is replaced, the trans-

mitter must be synchronized with the

keyless entry system’s control unit.

Press either the “

” or “ ” button 6

times to synchronize the unit.

& Replacing lost transmitters

If you lose a transmitter or want to

purchase additional transmitters (up to

four can be programmed), you should re-

program all of your transmitters for secur-

Keys and doors 2-9

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (100,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

2-10 Keys and doors

ity reasons. It is recommended that you

have your dealer program all of your

transmitters into your system.

! Programming the transmitters

The keyless entry system is equipped with

a special code learning feature that allows

you to program new transmitter codes into

the system or to delete old ones. The

system can learn up to four unique

transmitter codes. The four transmitter

codes may be the same or different.

Programming transmitter codes into

system:

Bag containing transmitter

Transmitter circuit board

To register a new transmitter with the

keyless entry system, it is necessary to

program the transmitter’s code (identifica-

tion number) into the system. A label

showing the code is affixed to the bag

containing the transmitter, and another is

affixed to the circuit board inside the

transmitter. If there is no bag, open the

transmitter case and make a note of the

eight-digit number. Program the number

into the system in accordance with the

following procedure:

1. Firmly close the doors and the rear

gate.

2. Open the driver’s door, sit on the

driver’s seat, and close the door.

3. Perform the following steps within 45

seconds.

1) Open and close the driver’s door once.

1) ON

2) LOCK

2) Insert the key into the ignition switch,

then turn it from the “LOCK” position to the

“ON” position 10 times within 15 seconds.

Black plate (101,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

NOTE

. When you complete step 2), an

electronic tone will sound once.

. If you do not perform steps 1) and 2)

within 45 seconds, an error will occur.

An electronic tone will not sound. In

this event, perform the whole proce-

dure again beginning with part 1.

4. Open and close the door once within

15 seconds.

NOTE

. When part 4 of the procedure is

completed, an electronic tone will

sound for 30 seconds.

. If you do not perform the operations

in part 4 within 15 seconds, an error

will occur and the electronic tone will

not sound. In this event, perform the

registration steps again beginning with

part 3 of the procedure.

5. Before the electronic tone stops

sounding, push the “LOCK” side of the

power door lock switch the same number

of times as the leftmost digit of the

transmitter code. For example, push the

lock switch 8 times if the leftmost digit of

the code is 8.

NOTE

. The electronic tone will stop sound-

ing when you start entering the num-

ber.

. If you do not start entering the

number using the lock switch before

the electronic tone stops sounding, an

error will occur. In this event, perform

the registration steps again beginning

with part 3 of the procedure.

. If the interval between one push of

the switch and the next exceeds 5

seconds, an error will occur. In this

event, perform the procedure again

beginning with part 4. If an error occurs

6 times, perform the procedure again

starting with part 3.

6. When you have finished entering the

number, push the “UNLOCK” side of the

lock switch within 5 seconds.

NOTE

. An electronic tone will sound.

. If you push the “UNLOCK” side of

the lock switch when more than 5

seconds have passed, an error will

occur. In this event, perform the proce-

dure again beginning with part 4. If an

error occurs 6 times, perform the

procedure again starting with part 3.

Keys and doors 2-11

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (102,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

2-12 Keys and doors

7. Perform parts 5 and 6 of the procedure

for each of the remaining digits of the

transmitter code beginning with the sec-

ond digit (counting from the left) and

finishing with the eighth digit.

NOTE

. When you finish entering the eighth

digit, an electronic tone will sound for

30 seconds.

. If the interval between one push of

the switch and the next exceeds 5

seconds, an error will occur. In this

event, perform the procedure again

beginning with part 4. If an error occurs

6 times, perform the procedure again

starting with part 3.

8. Before the electronic tone stops

sounding, use the power door lock switch

to reenter the transmitter code beginning

with the leftmost digit.

NOTE

If you do not start entering the number

using the lock switch before the elec-

tronic tone stops sounding, an error

will occur. In this event, perform the

procedure again beginning with part 3.

9. When you have finished entering the

code a second time, an electronic tone will

sound for 1 second to indicate completion

of registration, provided the code entered

the second time is identical to that entered

the first time.

NOTE

If the code entered the second time is

not identical to the code entered the

first time, an error will occur. In this

event, perform the procedure again

beginning with part 5. If an error occurs

5 times, perform the procedure again

starting with part 3.

10. If you wish to program another trans-

mitter code into the system (up to four

transmitter codes can be programmed into

the system), perform the procedure begin-

ning with part 4. When you have finished

programming all of the necessary trans-

mitter codes into the system, remove the

key from the ignition switch.

11. Test every registered transmitter to

confirm correct operation.

! Deleting old transmitter codes

The control un it of the keyless entry

system has four memory locations to store

transmitter codes, giving it the ability to

operate with up to four transmitters. When

you lose a transmitter, the lost transmit-

ter’s code remains in the memory. For

security reasons, lost transmitter codes

should be deleted from the memory.

To delete old transmitter codes, program

four transmitter codes into the system. If

you have only one current transmitter,

program it 4 times. If you have two current

transmitters, program each one twice. If

you have three current transmitters, pro-

gram two of them once and the third one

twice. This process will leave only current

transmitter codes in the system’s memory.

NOTE

Make sure no one else is operating

their keyless entry system within range

of your vehicle when programming

transmitters. If someone else were to

operate their remote transmitter while

you are programming your transmit-

ters, it is possible that their transmitter

code will be programmed into your

system, allowing them unauthorized

access to your vehicle.

Black plate (103,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Alarm system

The alarm system helps to protect your

vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn

sounds and the turn signal lights flash if

someone attempts to break into your

vehicle. The starter motor is also inter-

rupted to preve nt starting the vehicle

without a key.

The system can be armed and disarmed

with the remote transmitter.

The system does not operate when the

key is inserted into the ignition switch.

Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set

for activation at the time of shipment from

the factory. You can set the system for

deactivation yourself or have it done by

your SUBARU dealer.

& System operation

The alarm system will give the following

alarm when triggered:

. The vehicle’s horn will sound and the

turn signal lights will flash for 30 seconds.

. If any door or the rear gate remains

open after the 30-second period, the horn

will continue to sound for a maximum of 3

minutes. If the door and the rear gate are

closed while the horn is sounding, the

horn will stop sounding with a delay of up

to 30 seconds.

The alarm is triggered by:

. Opening a door or the rear gate.

. Physical impact to the vehicle, such as

forced entry (only vehicles with shock

sensors (dealer option))

& Activating and deactivating

the alarm system

To change the setting of your vehicle’s

alarm system for activation or deactiva-

tion, do the following.

1. Disarm the alarm system (see “Dis-

arming the system” in this section).

2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all

doors and the rear gate.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

4. Hold down the UNLOCK side of the

driver’s power door locking switch, open

the driver’s door within the following 1

second, and wait 10 seconds without

releasing the switch. The setting will then

be changed as follows:

If the system was previously activated:

The horn sounds twice, indicating that the

system is now deactivated.

If the system was previously deactivated:

The horn sounds once, indicating that the

system is now activated.

NOTE

You may have the above setting

change done by your SUBARU dealer.

& If you have accidentally trig-

gered the alarm system

! To stop the alarm

Do any of the following operations:

. Press any button on the remote trans-

mitter.

. Cycle the ignition switch from the

“LOCK” to “ON” position 3 times within 5

seconds.

& Arming the system

! To arm the system using remote

transmitter

1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if

so equipped).

2. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.

3. Open the doors and get out of the

vehicle.

4. Make sure that the engine hood is

locked.

5. Close all doors and the rear gate.

Keys and doors 2-13

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (104,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

2-14 Keys and doors

: Press to Arm the system.

: Press to Disarm the system.

Security indicator light

6. Briefly press the “ ” button (for less

than 2 seconds). All doors and the rear

gate will lock, an electric chirp will sound

once, the turn signal lights will flash once,

and the indicator lights will start flashing

rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30 seconds

(standby time), the indicator lights will then

flash slowly (twice approximately every 2

seconds), indicating that the system has

been armed for surveillance.

If any of the doors or the rear gate is not

fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds 5

times, the turn signal lights flash 5 times to

alert you that the doors or the rear gate

are not properly closed. When you close

the door, the system will automatically arm

and doors will automatically lock.

! To arm the system using power

door locking switches

1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.

3. Open the doors and get out of the

vehicle.

4. Make sure that the engine hood is

locked.

5. Close the doors and the rear gate but

leave only the driver’s door or the front

passenger’s door open.

6. Push the front side (“LOCK” side) of

the power door locking switch to set the

door locks.

7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will

sound once, the turn signal lights will flash

once, and the indicator lights will start

flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30

seconds (standby time), the indicator

lights will then flash slowly (twice approxi-

mately every 2 seconds), indicating that

the system has been armed for surveil-

lance.

NOTE

. The system can be armed even if the

engine hood, the windows and/or

moonroof are opened. Always make

sure that they are fully closed before

arming the system.

Black plate (105,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

. The 30-second standby time can be

eliminated if you prefer. Have it per-

formed by your SUBARU dealer.

. The system is in the standby mode

for a 30-second period after locking the

doors with the remote transmitter. The

security indicator light will flash at

short intervals during this period.

. If any of the following actions is

done during the standby period, the

system will not switch to the surveil-

lance state.

. Doors are unlocked using the

remote transmitter.

. Any door or the rear gate is

opened.

. Ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

. The engine does not start even

when the ignition switch is turned to

the “START ” position once the alarm

system has been triggered.

& Disarming the system

Briefly press the “ ” button (for less than

2 seconds) on the remote transmitter. The

driver’s door will unlock, an electronic

chirp will sound twice, the turn signal

lights will flash twice and the indicator

light will go off.

NOTE (Models with immobilizer)

If your vehicle is equipped with an

immobilizer, the immobilizer’s function

will cause the security indicator light to

flash (approximately once every 3

seconds) even after the system is

disarmed.

NOTE

The system can be disarmed by the

following method, too.

. Cycle the ignition switch from the

“LOCK” to the “ON” position 3 times

within 5 seconds.

! Emergency disarming

If you cannot disarm the system using the

transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost,

broken or the transmitter battery is too

weak), you can disarm the system without

using the transmitter.

1. Unlock the door with the key and then

open the door.

2. Insert the key into the ignition switch

and cycle it from the “LOCK” to the “ON”

position 3 times within 5 seconds.

& Valet mode

When you choose the valet mode, the

security system does not operate. In valet

mode, the remote transmitter is used only

for locking and unlocking the doors and

rear gate and panic activation.

To enter the valet mode, change the

setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for

deactivation mode. (Refer to “Activating

and deactivating the alarm system” in this

section.) The security indicator light will

continue to flash once every 3 seconds

indicating that the system is in the valet

mode (only vehicle with an immobilizer).

To exit valet mode, change the setting of

your vehicle’s alarm system for activation

mode. (Refer to “Activating and deactivat-

ing the alarm system” in this section.)

NOTE

If your vehicle is not equipped with an

immobilizer, the security indicator light

does not flash during the valet mode.

& Passive arming

When passive arming mode has been

programmed by the dealer, arming of the

system is automatically accomplished

without using the remote transmitter. Note

that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE

MANUALLY LOCKED.

! To enter the passive mode

If you wish to program the passive arming

mode, have it done by your SUBARU

Keys and doors 2-15

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (106,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

2-16 Keys and doors

dealer.

! Arming the system

CAUTION

In passive mode, the system will

automatically activate the alarm but

WILL NOT automatically lock the

doors. In order to lock the doors

you must either lock them as in-

dicated in the following step 4 or

with the key once they have been

closed. Failure to lock the doors

manually will result in a higher

security risk.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

1) ON

2) LOCK

2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to

“LOCK” position and remove the key from

the ignition switch.

3. Open the doors and get out of the

vehicle.

4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors

with the inside door lock levers.

5. Close the doors. The system will

automatically arm after one minute.

In the passive mode, the system can also

be armed with the remote transmitter or

with the power door locking switches. If

the remote transmitter or power door

locking switch is used to lock the vehicle,

arming will take place immediately regard-

less of whether or not the passive mode

has been selected.

! Disarming the system

To disarm the system, briefly press the

“

” button on the transmitter.

& Tripped sensor identification

The security indicator light flashes when

the alarm system has been triggered.

Also, the number of flashes indicates the

location of unauthorized intrusion or the

severity of impact on the vehicle.

. When the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position, the indicator light will

light for 1 second and then flash as

follows:

When a door or rear gate was opened:

5 times

When the ignition switch was turned to

the “ON” position: 3 times

Black plate (107,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

When a strong impact or multiple

impacts were sensed: twice (only

vehicles with shock sensors (dealer

option))

When a light impact was sensed: once

(only vehicles with shock sensors

(dealer option))

NOTE

Any of the above indicator light flash-

ings will recur each time the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position.

Rearming the alarm system cancels the

flashing.

& Shock sensors (dealer op-

tion)

The shock sensors trigger the alarm

system when they sense impacts applied

to the vehicle and when any of their

electric wires is cut. The alarm system

causes the horn to sound and the turn

signal lights to flash for a short time when

the sensed impact is weak, but it warns of

a strong impact or multiple impacts by

sounding the horn and flashing the turn

signal lights, both lasting approximately 30

seconds.

If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can

connect them and set them for activation

or deactivation.

NOTE

. The shock sensors are not always

able to sense impacts caused by break-

ing in, and cannot sense an impact that

does not cause vibration (such as

breaking the glass using a rescue

hammer).

. The shock sensors may sense vi-

bration like those shown below and

trigger the alarm system. Select the

settings of the alarm system and shock

senso rs appropriately depending on

where you usually park your vehicle.

Example:

Vibration from a construction site

Vibration in a multistory parkin g

garage

Vibration from trains

. You can have the sensitivity of the

shock sensors adjusted to your pre-

ference by your SUBARU dealer.

Child safety locks

WARNING

Always use the child safety lock

whenever a child rides in the rear

seat. Serious injury could result if a

child accidentally opened the door

and fell out.

1) Lock

2) Unlock

Each rear door has a child safety lock that

prevents the doors from being opened

even if the inside door handle is pulled.

When the child safety lock lever is in the

lock position, the door cannot be opened

from inside regardless of the position of

Keys and doors 2-17

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (108,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

2-18 Keys and doors

the inner door handle lock lever. The door

can only be opened from the outside.

Windows

& Power windows

WARNING

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by entrapment, you must

do the following.

. When operating the power win-

dows, be extremely careful to

prevent anyone’s fingers, arms,

neck or head from being caught

in the window.

. Always lock the passengers’ win-

dows using the lock switch when

children are riding in the vehicle.

. Before leaving the vehicle, al-

ways remove the key from the

ignition switch for safety and

never allow an unattended child

to remain in the vehicle. Failure

to follow this procedure could

result in injury to a child operat-

ing the power window.

The power windows operate only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

! Driver’s side switches

1) Lock switch

2) For driver’s window (with one-touch auto

down feature)

3) For front passenger’s window

4) For rear left window

5) For rear right window

All door windows can be controlled by the

power window switch cluster at the driver

side door.

Black plate (109,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

! Operating the driver’s window

1) Open

2) Automatically open

3) Close

To open:

Push the switch down lightly and hold it.

The window will open as long as the

switch is held.

This switch also has a one-touch auto

down feature that allows the window to be

opened fully without holding the switch.

Push the switch down until it clicks and

release it, and the window will fully open.

To stop the window halfway, pull the

switch up lightly.

To close:

Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The

window will close as long as the switch is

held.

! Operating the passengers’ windows

To open the passengers’ windows, push

the appropriate switch down and hold it

until the win dow reaches the desired

position.

To close the window, pull the switch up

and hold it until it reaches the desired

position.

! Locking the passengers’ windows

1) Lock

2) Unlock

To lock the passengers’ windows, push

the lock switch. When the lock switch is in

the “LOCK” position, the passengers’

windows cannot be opened or closed.

Press the switch again to cancel the

passengers’ window locking.

! Passengers’ side switches

To open the window, push the switch

down and hold it until the window reaches

the desired position.

To close the window, pull the switch up

and hold it until the window reaches the

desired position.

When the lock switch on the power

Keys and doors 2-19

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (110,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

2-20 Keys and doors

window switch cluster, located on the

driver ’s side door, is in the “LOCK”

position, the passengers’ windows cannot

be operated with the passengers’

switches.

Rear gate

WARNING

. Do not attempt to shut the rear

gate while holding the inside

handle. Also avoid closing the

rear gate by pulling on the inside

handle from inside the cargo

space. There is a danger of your

hand being caught and injured.

. To prevent dangerous exhaust

gas from ent ering the vehicle,

always keep the rear gate closed

while driving.

CAUTION

. Do not jam a plastic bag in or

place cellophane tape on the rear

gate stays or scratch the stays

while loading or unloading cargo.

That could cause leakage of gas

from the stays, which may result

in their inability to hold the rear

gate open.

. Be careful not to hit your head or

face on the rear gate when open-

ing or closing the rear gate and

when loading or unloading car-

go.

The rear gate can be locked and unlocked

using either the keyless entry system or

the power door locking switches.

Refer to the “Power door locking switches”

and “Remote keyless entry system” sec-

tions in this chapter.

To open the rear gate, first unlock the rear

gate lock then pull the outside handle up.

Then, hold the rear gate and raise it as

high as it will go.

Black plate (111,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

To close the rear gate, lower it slowly and

push down firmly until the latch engages.

The rear gate can be lowered easily if you

pull down holding the recessed grip.

NOTE

If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due

to a discharged battery, a fault in the

door locking/unlocking system or other

causes, you can unlock it by manually

operating the rear gate lock release

lever.

For the procedure, refer to “Rear gate –

if the rear gate cannot be unlocked” in

chapter 9 “In case of emergency”.

Moonroof (if equipped)

WARNING

. Never let anyone’s hands, arms,

head or any objects protrude

from the moonroof. A person

could be seriously injured if the

vehicle stops suddenly or turns

sharply or if the vehicle is in-

volved in an accident.

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by entrapment, you must

do the following.

. Before closing the moonroof,

make sure that no one’s hands,

arms, head or other objects will

be accidentally caught in the

moonroof.

. Before leaving the vehicle, al-

ways remove the key from the

ignition switch for safety and

never allow an unattended child

to remain in the vehicle. Failure

to follow this procedure could

result in injury to a child operat-

ing the moonroof.

. Never try to check the anti-en-

trapment function by deliberately

placing part of your body in the

moonroof.

CAUTION

. Do not sit on the edge of the open

moonroof.

. Do not operate the moonroof if

falling snow or extremely cold

conditions have caused it to

freeze shut.

1) Open/close switch

2) Open

3) Close

The moonroof operates only when the

Keys and doors 2-21

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (112,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

2-22 Keys and doors

ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

& To open the moonroof

Push and quickly release the rear part of

the switch to open the moonroof. The sun

shade will also be opened together with

the moonroof. The moonroof will stop at a

position 20 in (50 cm) away from the fully

closed position. Push the switch again to

open the moonroof completely.

To stop the moonroof at a desired position,

simply push the opposite side of the

switch.

After washing the vehicle or after it rains,

wipe away water on the roof prior to

opening the moonroof to prevent drops

of water from falling into the passenger

compartment.

& To close the moonroof

Push and quickly release the front part of

the switch to close the moonroof. The

moonroof will stop at a position 8 in (20

cm) away from the fully closed position.

Push the switch again to close the moon-

roof completely.

To stop the moonroof at a desired position,

simply push the opposite side of the

switch.

& Anti-entrapment function

When the moonroof senses an object

trapped between its glass and the vehi-

cle’s roof during closure, it automatically

moves back by 6 in (15 cm) from that point

and then stops. The anti-entrapment

function may also be activated by a strong

shock on the moonroof even when there is

nothing trapped.

NOTE

. For the sake of safety, it is recom-

mended that you avoid driving with the

moonroof fully opened.

. Driving with the moonroof fully open

can cause an annoying sound to gen-

erate at high speeds. If such a condi-

tion has been encountered, use the

moonroof at the initial stop position of

20 in (50 cm).

. If the moonroof cannot be closed

through switch operation because of

system failure, it can be closed manu-

ally using a hex-head wrench. For the

procedure, refer to “Moonroof – if the

moonroof cannot be closed” in chapter

9 “In case of emergency”.

& Sun shade

The sun shade can be slid forward or

backward by hand while the moonroof is

closed.

If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade

also moves back.

Black plate (5,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Ignition switch ..................................................... 3-3

LOCK.................................................................. 3-3

Acc ..................................................................... 3-4

ON ...................................................................... 3-4

START ................................................................ 3-4

Key reminder chime ............................................ 3-5

Ignition switch light (if equipped) ......................... 3-5

Key interlock release (AT vehicles only) ............... 3-5

Hazard warning flasher....................................... 3-6

Meters and gauges.............................................. 3-6

Speedometer....................................................... 3-6

Odometer/Trip meter............................................ 3-6

Tachometer ......................................................... 3-7

Fuel gauge.......................................................... 3-7

Temperature gauge ............................................. 3-8

Outside temperature indicator ............................. 3-9

Warning and indicator lights .............................. 3-9

Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 3-10

SRS airbag system warning light ........................ 3-10

Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF

indicators......................................................... 3-11

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction

indicator lamp .................................................. 3-12

Charge warning light .......................................... 3-12

Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-12

AT OIL TEMPerature warning light

(AT vehicles) .................................................... 3-13

ABS warning light .............................................. 3-13

Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light (if

equipped)/Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF

indicator light (if equipped) .............................. 3-14

Brake system warning light................................ 3-15

Door open warning light .................................... 3-16

Low fuel warning light ....................................... 3-16

All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT vehicles)......... 3-16

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator

light (if equipped)............................................. 3-16

Shift position indicator (AT vehicles) .................. 3-17

Turn signal indicator lights................................. 3-17

High beam indicator light ................................... 3-17

Low tire pressure warning light (if equipped) ...... 3-17

Cruise control indicator light.............................. 3-19

Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 3-19

Clock .................................................................. 3-19

Light control switch........................................... 3-20

Headlights ......................................................... 3-20

High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................ 3-21

Headlight flasher ............................................... 3-21

Daytime running light system............................. 3-21

Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-22

Illumination brightness control......................... 3-23

Headlight beam leveler (Vehicle with HID

headlights) ...................................................... 3-23

Parking light switch........................................... 3-23

Front fog light button ........................................ 3-24

Instruments and controls

Black plate (6,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Instruments and controls

Wiper and washer .............................................. 3-24

Windshield wiper and washer switches............... 3-25

Rear window wiper and washer switch................ 3-26

Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) .............. 3-27

Rear window defogger button........................... 3-28

Mirrors ................................................................ 3-29

Inside mirror...................................................... 3-29

Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-30

Tilt steering wheel ............................................. 3-32

Horn.................................................................... 3-32

Black plate (117,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Ignition switch

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch to

“LOCK” while the vehicle is

being driven or towed because

that will lock the steering wheel,

preventing steering control. And

when the engine is turned off, it

takes a much greater effort than

usual to steer.

. Before leaving the vehicle, al-

ways remove the key from the

ignition switch for safety and

never allow an unattended child

to remain in the vehicle. Failure

to follow this procedure could

result in injury to a child or

others. Children could operate

the power windows, the sunroof

or other controls or even make

the vehicle move.

The ignition switch has four positions:

LOCK, Acc, ON and START.

NOTE

. Keep the ignition switch in the

“LOCK” position when the engine is

not running.

. Using electrical accessories for a

long time with the ignition switch in the

“ON” or “Acc” position can cause the

battery to go dead.

If the ignition switch will not move from

the “LOCK” position to the “Acc”

position, turn the steering wheel

slightly to the left and right as you turn

the ignition switch.

. If the key is attached to a keyholder

or to a large bunch of other keys,

centrifugal force may act on it as the

vehicle moves, resulting in unwanted

turning of the ignition switch. Also, if a

large keyholder is attached to the key,

your knees or hands may accidentally

touch it in a way that turns the ignition

switch.

& LOCK

The key can only be inserted or removed

in this position. The ignition switch will lock

the steering wheel when you remove the

key.

If turning the key is di fficult, turn the

steering wheel slightly to the right and left

as you turn the key.

! Automatic transmission vehicles

Instruments and controls 3-3

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (118,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

3-4 Instruments and controls

The key can be turned from “Acc” to

“LOCK” only when the selector lever is in

the “P” position.

! Manual transmission vehicles

The key can be turned from “Acc” to

“LOCK” only when the key is pushed in

while turning it.

& Acc

In this position the electrical accessories

(radio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can

be used.

& ON

This is the normal operating position after

the engine is started.

& START

CAUTION

Do not turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position while the engine

is running.

The engine is started in this position. The

starter cranks the engine to start it. When

the key is released (after the engine has

started), the key automatically returns to

the “ON” position.

! For models with immobilizer

If you fail to start your engine with your

registered key, once pull out the key (at

this time, the security indicator light

blinks), and then insert the key in the

ignition switch and turn it to the “ START”

position and again try to start your engine.

NOTE

The engine may not start in the follow-

ing cases:

. The key grip is touching another key

or a metallic key holder.

. The key is near another key that

Black plate (119,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

contains an immobilizer transponder.

. The key is near or touching another

transmitter.

& Key reminder chime

The reminder chime sounds when the

driver’s door opens and the key is in the

“LOCK” or “Acc” positions. The chime

stops when the key is removed from the

ignition switch.

NOTE

The ignition switch light flashes when

the reminder chime sounds.

& Ignition switch light (if

equipped)

For easy access to the ignition switch in

the dark, the ignition switch light comes on

when the driver’s door is opened. After

closing the door, the light remains lit for 5

seconds and then dims before it goes out.

The light flashes if you insert the key into

the ignition switch with the driver’s door

open.

& Key interlock release (AT ve-

hicles only)

If the key can not be turned to the “LOCK”

position even when the selector lever is in

the “P” position:

1. Take out the screwdriver.

2. Remove the cover under the steering

column using a Phillips screwdriver.

3. Turn the ignition key while pressing the

key interlock release lever.

Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU

dealer immediately to have the key inter-

lock system repaired.

Instruments and controls 3-5

Black plate (120,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

3-6 Instruments and controls

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher is used to

warn other drivers when you have to park

your vehicle under emergency conditions.

The hazard warning flasher works with the

ignition switch in any position.

To turn on the hazard warning flasher,

push the hazard warning button on the

instrument panel. To turn off the flasher,

push the button again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

Meters and gauges

& Speedometer

The speedometer shows the vehicle

speed.

& Odometer/Trip meter

1) Trip meter

2) Odometer

This meter displays the odometer and two

trip meters when the ignition switch is in

the “ON” position.

NOTE

Even with the ignition switch in the

“Acc” or “LOCK” position, the od-

ometer and trip meters are displayed

for 10 seconds when you press the

knob.

! Odometer

The odometer shows the total distance

that the vehicle has been driven.

! Double trip meter

1) A trip meter

2) B trip meter

The trip meter shows the distance that the

vehicle has been driven since you last set

it to zero.

To change the mode indication, briefly

push the knob.

Each press of the knob changes the

function alternately.

To set the trip meter to zero, select the A

Black plate (121,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 30

trip or B trip meter by pushing the knob

and keep the knob pushed for more than 2

seconds.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt to

change the function of the indicator

during driving, as an accident could

result.

NOTE

If the connection between the combina-

tion meter and battery is broken for any

reason such as vehicle maintenance or

fuse replacement, the data recorded on

the trip meter will be lost.

& Tachometer

The tachometer shows the engine speed

in thousands of revolutions per minute.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the

pointer of the tachometer in the red

zone. In this range, fuel injection will

be cut by the engine control module

to protect the engine from overrev-

ving. The engine will resume run-

ning normally after the engine speed

is reduced below the red zone.

NOTE (non-turbo models only)

To protect the engine while the “P” or

“N” position is selected (for AT models)

or while the shift lever is in neutral (for

MT models), the engine is controlled so

that the engine speed does not become

too high even if the accelerator pedal is

fully depressed.

& Fuel gauge

1) Low fuel warning light

The fuel gauge shows the approximate

amount of fuel remaining in the tank.

The gauge does not return to “E” even

though the ignition switch is in the “Acc” or

“LOCK” position.

The gauge may move slightly during

braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel

level movement in the tank.

Instruments and controls 3-7

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (122,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

3-8 Instruments and controls

NOTE

You will see the “ ” sign near the

fuel gauge.

This indicates that the fuel filler door

(lid) is located on the right side of the

vehicle.

! Low fuel warning light

The low fuel warning light comes on when

the tank is nearly empty [approximately

2.3 US gal (9.0 liters, 1.9 Imp gal)]. It only

operates when the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position. When this light illuminates,

fill the fuel tank immediately.

NOTE

This light does not go out unless the

tank is replenished up to an internal

fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US

gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal).

CAUTION

Immediately put fuel in the tank

whenever the low fuel warning light

comes on. Engine misfires as a

result of an empty tank could cause

damage to the engine.

& Temperature gauge

1) Normal operating range

The temperature gauge shows engine

coolant temperature when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

The coolant temperature will vary in

accordance with the outside temperature

and driving conditions.

We recommend that you drive moderately

until the pointer of the temperature gauge

reaches near the middle of the range.

Eng ine opera tion is optimum with the

engine coolant at this temperature range

and high revving operation when the

engine is not warmed up enough should

be avoided.

CAUTION

If the pointer exceeds the normal

operating range, safely stop the

vehicle as soon as possible.

See “In case of emergency” in

chapter 9.

Black plate (123,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Outside temperature indica-

tor

MT vehicles

1) U.S.-spec. models

2) Canada-spec. models

AT vehicles

1) U.S.-spec. models

2) Canada-spec. models

The outside temperature indicator is lo-

cated below the odometer/trip meter. The

indicator can indicate an outside tempera-

ture ranging from −22 to 1228F(−30 to

508C).

The indicator can give a false reading

under any of the following conditions:

. When there is too much sun.

. During idling; while running at low

speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine

is restarted immediately following a shut-

down.

. When the actual outside temperature

falls outside the specified indicator range.

Warning and indicator lights

Several of the warning and indicator lights

come on momentarily and then go out

when the ignition switch is initially turned

to the “ON” position. This permits check-

ing the operation of the bulbs.

Apply the parking brake and turn the

ignition switch to the “ON” position. The

following lights come on:

: Seatbelt warning light

: SRS airbag system warning light

/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator light

/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag

OFF indicator light

: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-

function indicator lamp

: Charge warning light

: Oil pressure warning light

: AT OIL temperature warning light (AT

vehicles)

/ : ABS warning light

/ : Brake system warning light

: All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT

vehicles)

Instruments and controls 3-9

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (124,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

3-10 Instruments and controls

: Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

indicator light (if equipped)

: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light

(if equipped)/Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light (if equipped)

: Low tire pressure warning light (if

equipped)

: Cruise control indicator light

: Cruise control set indicator light

If any lights fail to come on, it indicates a

burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the

corresponding system.

Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer

for repair.

& Seatbelt warning light

and chime

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt

warning device at the driver’s seat, as

required by current safety standards.

There is a seatbelt warning light in the

combination meter.

If the driver has not yet fastened the

seatbelt when the ignition switch is turned

to the “ON” position, the seatbelt warning

light will flash for 6 seconds, to warn that

the seatbelt is unfastened. If the driver’s

seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will also

sound simultaneously.

If the driver’s seatbelt is still not fastened 6

seconds later, the warning light will remain

lit for 15 seconds. If the driver’s seatbelt is

still not fastened even 15 seconds later

(21 seconds after turning ON the ignition

switch), the warning lights will alternate

between flashing and steady illumination

at 15-second intervals, and the chime will

sound while the warning light is flashing.

Alternate flashing and steady illumination

of the warning lights and sounding of the

chime will continue until the driver fastens

the seatbelt.

NOTE

. If the driver unfastens the seatbelt

after fastening, the seatbelt warning

device operates as follows according

to the vehicle speed.

. At speeds lower than appr oxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light will alternate

between flashing and steady illumi-

nation at 15-second intervals. The

chime will not sound.

. At speeds higher than approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light will alternate

between flashing and steady illumi-

nation at 15-second intervals and

the chime will sound whil e the

warning light is flashing.

. It is possible to cancel the warning

operation that follows the 6-s econd

warning after turning ON the ignition

switch. When the ignition switch is

turned ON next time, however, the

complete sequence of warning opera-

tion resumes. For further details about

canceling the warning operation,

please contact your SUBARU dealer.

& SRS airbag system

warning light

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the SRS airbag system

warning light will come on for approxi-

mately 6 seconds and go out. This shows

the SRS frontal airbag and SRS side

airbag and seatbelt pretensioners are in

normal operation.

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, there may

be a malfunction in the seatbelt

pretensioners and/or SRS airbag

system. Immediately take your vehi-

cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer

to have the system checked. Unless

checked and properly repaired, the

seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS

airbags will operate improperly (e.g.

Black plate (125,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 30

SRS airbags may inflate in a very

minor collision or not inflate in a

severe collision), which may in-

crease the risk of injury.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

. No illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous illumination of the

warning light

. Illumination of the warning light

while driving

& Front passenger’s frontal

airbag ON and OFF indica-

tors

1) U.S.-spec. models

2) Canada-spec. models

or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator

or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag

OFF indicator

The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicators show you the status of

the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.

The indicators are located next to the

clock in the central portion of the instru-

ment panel.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, both the ON and OFF

indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during

which time the system is checked. Follow-

ing the syst em check, both indicators

extinguish for 2 seconds. After this, one

of the indicators illuminates depending on

the status of the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag reached by the Subaru

advanced frontal airbag system monitor-

ing.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF

indicator will remain extinguished.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal

airbag ON indicator will remain extin-

guished while the OFF indicator will

illuminate.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, if both the ON and OFF indica-

tors remain lit or extinguished simulta-

neously even after the system check

period, the system is faulty. Contact your

SUBARU dealer immediately for an in-

spection.

Instruments and controls 3-11

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (126,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

3-12 Instruments and controls

& CHECK ENGINE warn-

ing light/Malfunction in-

dicator lamp

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE light comes

on while you are driving, have your

vehicle checked/repaired by your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-

ble. Continued vehicle operation

without having the emission control

sys tem checked and repaired as

necessary could cause serious da-

mage, which may not be covered by

your vehicle’s warranty.

If this light comes on steadily or blinks

while the engine is running, it may indicate

that there is a problem or potential

problem somewhere in the emission con-

trol system.

! If the light comes on steadily:

If the light comes on steadily while driving

or does not go out after the engine starts,

an emission control system malfunction

has been detected.

You should have your vehicle checked by

an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

NOTE

This light also comes on when the fuel

filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.

If you have recently refueled your vehicle,

the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator lamp coming on

could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.

Remove the cap and retighten it until it

clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering

with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the

cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE

warning light turn off immediately. It may

take several driving trips. If the light does

not go out, take your vehicle to your

authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.

! If the light is blinking:

If the light is blinking while driving, an

engine misfire condition has been de-

tected which may damage the emission

control system.

To prevent serious damage to the emis-

sion control system, you should do the

following.

. Reduce vehicle speed.

. Avoid hard acceleration.

. Avoid steep uphill grades.

. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-

ble.

. Stop towing a trailer as soon as

possible.

The CHECK ENGINE warning light may

stop blinking and come on steadily after

several driving trips. You should have your

vehicle checked by an authorized

SUBARU dealer immediately.

& Charge warning light

If this light comes on when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the charging

system is not working properly.

If the light comes on while driving or does

not go out after the engine starts, stop the

engine at the first safe opportunity and

check the alternator belt. If the belt is

loose, broken or if the belt is in good

condition but the light remains on, contact

your nearest SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

& Oil pressure warning

light

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the

oil pressure warning light on. This

may cause serious engine damage.

If this light comes on when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the engine oil

pressure is low and the lubricating system

is not working properly.

Black plate (127,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

If the light comes on while driving or does

not go out after the engine starts, stop the

engine at the first safe opportunity and

check the engine oil level. If the oil level is

low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is

at the proper level but the light remains on,

contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

immediately.

& AT OIL TEMPerature

warning light (AT vehi-

cles)

The AT oil temperature warning light

comes on when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position and goes out

after the engine has started.

If this light comes on when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the automatic

transmission fluid temperature is too hot.

If the light comes on while driving,

immediately stop the vehicle in a safe

place and let the engine idle until the

warning light goes off.

! Automatic transmission control

system warning

If the light flashes after the engine starts, it

may indicate that the automatic transmis-

sion control system is not working prop-

erly. Contact your nearest SUBARU deal-

er for service immediately.

& ABS warning light

The ABS warning light comes on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position and goes out after approximately

2 seconds.

This is an indication that the ABS system

is working properly.

CAUTION

If the warning light behaves as

follows, the ABS system may not

work properly.

When the warning light is on, the

ABS function shuts down; however,

the conventional brake system con-

tinues to operate normally.

. The warning light does not come

on when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position.

. The warning light comes on when

the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position, but it does not

go out even when the vehicle

speed exceeds approximately 8

mph (12 km/h).

. The warning light comes on dur-

ing driving.

If any of these conditions occur,

have the ABS system repaired at

the first available opportunity by

your SUBARU dealer.

The ABS warning light comes on together

with the brake system warning light if the

EBD system becomes faulty. For further

details of the EBD system fault warning,

refer to “Brake system warning light”.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

described in the following, the ABS

system may be considered normal.

. The warning light comes on right

after the engine is started but goes out

immediately, remaining off.

. The warning light remains on after

the engine has been started, but it goes

out when the vehicle speed reaches

approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).

. The warning light comes on during

driving, but it goes out immediately and

remains off.

When driving with an insufficient battery

voltage such as when the engine is jump

started, the ABS warning light may come

on. This is due to the low battery voltage

and does not i ndicate a malfunction.

When the battery becomes fully charged,

the light will go out.

Instruments and controls 3-13

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (128,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

3-14 Instruments and controls

& Vehicle Dynamics

Control warning light (if

equipped)/Vehicle Dy-

namics Control OFF in-

dicator light (if

equipped)

This warning light has the function of

indicating faults in the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system and the function of indicat-

ing that the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system has been deactivated.

It comes on in the event of a fault in the

system and is on when the system is not

operating.

This warning light comes on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position and goes out after the engine

has started. It indicates that the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system is in normal

operation.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

light

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probabl y inoperative under any of the

following conditions. Have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

. The warning light does not come on

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

. The warning light comes on while the

vehicle is running.

. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system itself becomes

faulty, the warning light only comes on. At

this time, the ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-

tem) remains fully operational.

. The warning light comes on when the

electronic control system of the ABS/

Vehicle Dynamics Control system be-

comes faulty.

The Veh icle Dynamics Control system

provides its ABS control through the

electrical circuit of the ABS system.

Accordingly, if the ABS is inoperative, the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system be-

comes unable to provide ABS control. As

a result, the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system also becomes inoperative, caus-

ing the warning light to come on. Though

both the Vehicle Dynamics Control and

ABS systems are inoperative in this case,

the ordinary functions of the brake system

are still available. You will be safe while

driving with this condition, but have your

vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

shown in the following, the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system may be con-

sidered normal.

. The warning light comes on right

after the engine is started but goes out

immediately, remaining off.

. The warning light comes on after

engine startup and goes off while the

vehicle is subsequently being driven.

. The warning light comes on during

driving, but it goes out immediately and

remains off.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in-

dicator light

. It comes on when the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control OFF switch is pressed.

. It also comes on when the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system is deactivated.

NOTE

. The light may stay on for a while

after the engine has been started,

especially in cold weather. This does

not indicate the existence of a problem.

The light should go out as soon as the

engine has warmed up.

. The indicator light comes on when

the engine has developed a problem

and the Malfunction indicator light is

on.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably faulty under the following condi-

tion. Have your vehicle checked at a

Black plate (129,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

. The light does not go out even after the

lapse of several minutes (the engine has

warmed up) after the engine has started.

& Brake system warning

light

WARNING

. Driving with the brake system

warning light on is dangerous.

This indicates your brake system

may not be working properly. If

the light remains on, have the

brakes inspected by a SUBARU

dealer immediately.

. If at all in doubt about whether

the brakes are operating prop-

erly, do not drive the vehicle.

Have your vehicle towed to the

nearest SUBARU dealer for re-

pair.

This light has the following three functions:

! Parking brake warning

The light comes on with the parking brake

applied while the ignition switch is in the

“ ON ” position. It goes out when the

parking brake is fully released.

! Brake fluid level warning

This light comes on when the brake fluid

level has dropped to near the “MIN” level

of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition

switch in the “ON” position and with the

parking brake fully released.

If the brake system warning light should

come on while driving (with the parking

brake fully released and with the ignition

switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an

indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn

brake pads. If this occurs, immediately

stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place

and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid

level is below the “MIN” mark in the

reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have

the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU

dealer for repair.

! Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) system warning

The brake system warning light also

illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the

EBD system. In that event, it comes on

together with the ABS warning light.

The EBD system may be malfunctioning if

the brake system warning light and ABS

warning light i lluminate simultaneously

during driving.

Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-

tional braking system will still function.

However, the rear wheels will be more

prone to locking when the brakes are

applied harder than usual and the vehi-

cle’s motion may therefore become some-

what harder to control.

If the brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate simultaneously,

take the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,

flat place.

2. Shut down the engine, then restart it.

3. Release the parking brake. If both

warning lights go out, the EBD system

may be faulty.

Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU

dealer and have the system inspected.

4. If both warning lights come on again

and stay illuminated after the engine has

been restart ed, shut down the engine

again, apply the parking brake, and check

the brake fluid level.

5. If the brake fluid level is not below the

“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be

faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest

SUBARU dealer and have the system

inspected.

6. If the brake fluid level is below the

“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.

Instead, have the vehicle towed to the

nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

Instruments and controls 3-15

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (130,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

3-16 Instruments and controls

& Door open warning

light

The door open warning light illuminates if

any door or the rear gate is not fully

closed.

Always make sure this light is out before

you start to drive.

& Low fuel warning light

The low fuel warning light illuminates

when the tank is nearly empty [approxi-

mately 2.3 US gal (9.0 liters, 1.9 Imp gal)].

It only operates when the ignition switch is

in the “ON” position. When this light

illuminates, fill the fuel tank immediately.

NOTE

This light does not go out unless the

tank is replenished up to an internal

fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US

gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal).

& All-Wheel Drive warn-

ing light (AT vehicles)

WARNING

Continued driving with the AWD

warning light flashing can lead to

powertrain damage. If the AWD

warning light flashes, promptly park

in a safe place then check whether

all four tires are the same diameter

and whether any of the tires has a

puncture or has lost air pressure for

some other reason.

The All-Wheel Drive warning light comes

on when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position and goes out after engine

has started.

! For vehicles with Vehicle Dynamics

Control system

This light flashes if the vehicle is driven

with tires of different diameters or with the

air pressure excessively low in any of its

tires.

! For vehicles without Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system

This light comes on when All-Wheel Drive

is disengaged and the drive mechanism is

switched to Front Wheel Drive for main-

tenance or similar purposes.

This light flashes if the vehicle is driven

with tires of different diameters or with the

air pressure excessively low in any of its

tires.

& Vehicle Dynamics

Control operation indi-

cator light (if equipped)

This light comes on when the ignition

switch is ON and goes out approximately

2 seconds later.

It blinks when the skid suppression func-

tion is activated. It illuminates when only

the traction control function is operating.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably faulty under any of the following

conditions. Have your vehicle checked at

a SUBARU dealer immediately.

. The light does not come on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

. The light does not go out even after a

period of approximately 2 seconds after

the ignition switch has been turned to the

“ON” position.

Black plate (131,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Shift position indicator (AT

vehicles)

This indicator shows the position of the

shift lever.

& Turn signal indicator

lights

These lights show the operation of the turn

signal or lane change signal.

If the indicator lights do not blink or blink

rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned

out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Refer to the “Replacing bulbs” section in

chapter 11.

& High beam indicator

light

This light shows that the headlights are in

the high beam mode.

This indicator light also comes on when

the headlight flasher is operated.

& Low tire pressure

warning light (if

equipped)

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will come on for approximately 2

seconds to check that the tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning

properly. If there is no problem and all tires

are properly inflated, the light will go out.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold

and inflated to the inflation pressure

recommended by the vehicle manufac-

turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation

pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of

a different size than the size indicated on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-

sure label, you should determine the

proper inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates

a low tire pressure telltale when one or

more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper

pressure. Driving on a significantly under-

inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and

can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle ’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire maintenance,

and it is the driver ’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if

under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with

a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-

bined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximately one

minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue

upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long

as the malfunction exists. When the

malfunction indicator is illuminated, the

system may not be able to detect or signal

Instruments and controls 3-17

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (132,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

3-18 Instruments and controls

low tire pressure as intended. TPMS

malfunctions may occur for a variety of

reasons, including the installation of re-

placement or alternate tires or wheels on

the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from

functioning properly. Always check the

TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing

one or more tires or wheels on your

vehicle to ensure that the replacement or

alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS

to continue to function properly.

Should the warning light illuminate stea-

dily after blinking for approximately one

minute, have the system inspected by

your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible.

WARNING

If this light does not come on briefly

after the ignition switch is turned ON

or the light illuminates steadily after

blinking for approximately one min-

ute, you should have your Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

checked at a SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

If this light comes on while driving,

never brake suddenly and keep

driving straight ahead while gradu-

ally reducing speed. Then slowly

pull off the road to a safe place.

Otherwise an accident involving

serious vehicle damage and serious

personal injury could occur.

If this light still comes on while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a tire may have significant

damage and a fast leak that causes

the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have

a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire

as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the Low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminates

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute. This indicates

the TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting. If the light

illuminates steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute,

promptly contact a SUBARU dealer

to have the system inspected.

CAUTION

The tire pressure monitoring system

is NOT a substitute for manually

checking tire pressure. The tire

pressure should be checked peri-

odically (at least monthly) using a

tire gauge. After any change to tire

pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-

itoring system will not re-check tire

inflation pressures until the vehicle

is first driven more than 20 mph (32

km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-

sures, increase the vehicle speed to

at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the

TPMS re-checking of the tire infla-

tion pressures. If the tire pressures

are now above the severe low

pressure threshold, the low tire

pressure warning light should go

off a few minutes later. Therefore, be

sure to install the specified size for

Black plate (133,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 30

the front and rear tires.

& Cruise control indica-

tor light

The cruise control indicator light comes on

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position and goes out after approxi-

mately 3 seconds.

This light comes on when the “CRUISE”

main switch is pressed.

NOTE

. If you move the cruise control lever

or press the main switch button while

turning the ignition switch “ON”, the

cruise control function is deactivated

and the “ CRUISE” indicator light

flashes. To reactivate the cruise control

function, turn the ignition switch back

to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position, and

then turn it again to the “ON” position.

. If this indicator light and the “

”

indicator light flash simultaneously

during driving, have the vehicle

checked by your nearest SUBARU

dealer.

& Cruise control set in-

dicator light

The cruise control set indicator light

comes on when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position and goes out

after approximately 3 seconds.

This light comes on when vehicle speed

has been set.

Clock

To adjust the clock, open the small article

storage compartment in the dashboard

with the vehicle parked in a safe place.

To set the hour, press the “H” button. To

Instruments and controls 3-19

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (134,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

3-20 Instruments and controls

set the minutes, press the “M” button. To

reset the minutes to “00” with a radio time

signal, push the “Reset” button.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt to

set the time while driving, as an

accident from inadequate attention

to the road could result.

NOTE

The clock uses a liquid crystal display.

You will find time indications hard to

see if you wear polarized glasses.

Light control switch

The light switch operates only when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

WARNING

To prevent battery discharge result-

ing from accidentally leaving your

lights on when your vehicle is

parked, the light switch operates

only when the ignition switch is in

the “ON” position. In any other

position, the vehicle’s lights will be

out.

If you park your vehicle on a road-

side at night, use the hazard warn-

ing flasher to alert the other drivers.

& Headlights

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on

the end of the turn signal lever.

first position:

Parking lights, instrument panel illumina-

tion, front side marker lights, tail lights and

license plate light are on.

second position:

Headlights, parking lights, instrument pa-

nel illumination, front side marker lights,

tail lights, and license plate light are on.

Black plate (135,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& High/low beam change (dim-

mer)

To change from low beam to high beam,

push the turn signal lever forward. When

the headlights are on high beam, the high

beam indicator light “

” on the instru-

ment panel is also on.

To switch back to low beam, pull the lever

back to the detent position.

& Headlight flasher

To flash the headlights, pull the lever

toward you and then release it. The high

beam will stay on for as long as you hold

the lever. The he adlight flasher works

even though the lighting switch is in the

“OFF” position.

When the headlights are on high beam,

the high beam indicator light “

” on the

instrument panel also comes on.

CAUTION

Do not hold the lever in the flashing

position for more than just a few

seconds.

& Daytime running light system

! Canada-spec. 2.5XT

WARNING

The parking lights, and side marker

lights are not turned on by the

daytime running light system. The

light switch must always be turned

to the “

” position when it is dark

outside.

The low beam headlights and tail lights will

automatically come on when the engine

has started, under the following condi-

tions:

. The parking brake is fully released.

. The light switch is in the “OFF ” or “

”

position.

. The automatic transmission selector

lever is set at other than the “P” position.

! All models except Canada-spec.

2.5XT

WARNING

The tail lights, parking lights, and

side marker lights are not turned on

by the daytime running light system.

The light switch must always be

turned to the “

” position when it

Instruments and controls 3-21

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (136,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

3-22 Instruments and controls

is dark outside.

The low beam headlights will automati-

cally come on at reduced brightness when

the engine has started, under the following

conditions:

. The parking brake is fully released.

. The light switch is in the “OFF ” or “

”

position.

. The automatic transmission selector

lever is set at other than the “P” position.

Turn signal lever

1) Right turn

2) Left turn

3) Lane change for right

4) Lane change for left

To activate the right turn signal, push the

turn signal lever up. To activate the left

turn signal, push the turn signal lever

down. When the turn is finished, the lever

will return automatically. If the lever does

not return after cornering, return the lever

to the neutral position by hand.

To signal a lane change, push the turn

signal lever up or down slightly and hold it

during the lane change. The turn signal

indicator lights will flash in the direction of

the turn or lane change. The lever will

return automatically to the neutral position

when you release it.

Black plate (137,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Illumination brightnes s con-

trol

When the headlight switch is in the “ ”

or “

” position, you can adjust bright-

ness of the instrument panel illumination

for better visibility.

To brighten, turn the control dial upward.

To darken, turn the control dial downward.

Headlight beam leveler (Ve-

hicle with HID headlights)

The HID headlights generate more light

than conventional halogen headlights.

Therefore a driver of an oncoming vehicle

may experience too much glare when your

headlight beam height adjustment is high

due to the vehicle carrying a heavy load.

The headlight beam leveler can be used

to adjust beam height to avoid such a

condition.

The higher the number the switch is

turned to, the lower the beam height

becomes.

Parking light switch

The parking light switch operates regard-

less of the ignition switch position.

By pushing the front end of this switch,

following lights will come on.

– Parking lights

– Front side marker lights

– Tail lights

– License plate lights

To turn off, push the rear end of the

parking light switch.

Avoid leaving these lights on for a long

time because that will run down the

battery.

Instruments and controls 3-23

Black plate (138,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

3-24 Instruments and controls

Front fog light button

The front fog lights operate only when the

headlights are on low beam. Push the

front fog light button to turn the front fog

lights on.

However, the front fog lights turn off when

the headlights are switched to high beam.

Press the button again to turn them off.

The indicator light located on the button

will illuminate when the front fog lights are

on.

Wiper and washer

WARNING

In freezing weather, do not use the

windshield washer until the wind-

shield is sufficiently warmed by the

defroster.

Otherwise the washer f luid can

freeze on the windshield, blocking

your view.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the washer con-

tinuously for more than 10 sec-

onds, or when the washer fluid

tank is empty. This may cause

overheating of the washer motor.

Check the washer fluid level

frequently, such as at fuel stops.

. Do not operate the wipers when

the windshield or rear window is

dry. This may scratch the glass,

damage the wiper blades and

cause the wiper motor to burn

out. Before operating the wiper

on a dry windshield or re ar

window, al ways us e the wind-

shield washer.

. In freezing weather, be sure that

the wiper blades are not frozen to

the windshield or rear window

before switching on the wipers.

Attempting to operate the wiper

with the blades frozen to the

window glass could cause not

only the wiper blades to be

damaged but also the wiper mo-

tor to burn out. If the wiper

blades are frozen to the window

glass, be sure to operate the

defroster, windshield wiper dei-

cer (if equipped) or rear window

defogger before turning on the

wiper.

. If the wipers stop during opera-

tion because of ice or some other

obstruction on the window, the

wiper motor could burn out even

if the wiper switch is turned off. If

this occurs, promptly stop the

vehicle in a safe place, turn the

ignition switch to the “LOCK”

position and clean the window

glass to allow proper wiper op-

eration.

. Use clean water if windshield

washer fluid is unavailable. In

areas where water freezes in

winter, use SUBARU Windshield

Washer Fluid or the equivalent.

Black plate (139,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

(See the “Windshield washer

fluid” section in chapter 11.)

Also, when driving the vehicle

when there are freezing tempera-

tures, use non-freezing type wi-

per blades.

. Do not clean the wiper blades

with gasoline or a solvent, such

as paint thinner or benzene. This

will cause deteri oration of the

wiper blades.

NOTE

. The wiper operates only when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” or “Acc”

position.

. Clean your wiper blades and win-

dow glass periodically with a washer

solution to prevent streaking, and to

remove accumulations of road salt or

road film. Keep the washer button

depressed at least for 1 second so that

washer solution will be sprinkled all

over the windshield or rear window.

. Grease, wax, insects or other mate-

rial on the windshield or the wiper

blade results in jerky wiper operation

and streaking on the glass. If you

cannot remove those streaks after

operating the washer or if the wiper

operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-

face of the windshield or rear window

and the wiper blades using a sponge or

soft cloth with a neutral detergent or

mild abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,

rinse the window glass and wiper

blades with clean water. The glass is

clean if no beads form on the glass

when you rinse with water.

. If you cannot eliminate the streaking

even after following this procedure,

replace the wiper blades with new

ones. Refer to the “Replacement of

wiper blades” section (chapter 11) for

replacement instructions.

& Windshield wiper and washer

switches

! Windshield wipers

OFF: Park

: Intermittent

LO: Low speed

HI: High speed

To turn the wipers on, push the wiper

control lever down.

To turn the wipers off, return the lever to

the “OFF” position.

Instruments and controls 3-25

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (140,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

3-26 Instruments and controls

! Wiper intermittent time control (if

equipped)

When the wip er switch is in the “ ”

position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-

ing interval of the wiper.

The operating interval can be adjusted

continuously from the shortest interval to

the longest.

Two click stop positions of the dial may

help you to aim at your desired interval.

! Mist (for a single wipe)

For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the

lever toward you. The wipers operate until

you release the lever.

! Washer

To wash the windshield, push the washer

button at the end of the wiper control lever.

The washer fluid sprays until you release

the washer button. The wipers operate

while you push the button.

& Rear window wiper and

washer switch

: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)

ON: Normal

INT: Intermittent

OFF: Park

: Washer

! Rear wiper

To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob on

the end of the wiper control lever upward.

INT: Intermittent

Black plate (141,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

ON: Normal

To turn the wiper off, return the knob on

the end of the lever to the “OFF” position.

! Washer

To wash the rear window while the rear

wiper is operating, turn the knob on the

end of the wiper control lever counter-

clockwise to the “

” position. The washer

fluid sprays until you release the knob.

To wash the rear window when the rear

wiper is not in use, turn the knob on the

end of the wiper control lever clockwise to

the “

” position. The washer fluid sprays

and the wiper operates until you release

the knob.

Windshield wiper deicer (if

equipped)

CAUTION

To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not operate the

windshield wiper deicer continu-

ously for any longer than necessary.

The windshield wiper deicer operates only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

Before turning on the windshield wiper

deicer, remove any snow from the wind-

shield. To turn on the windshield wiper

deicer, push the button. The indicator light

located on the button lights up while the

windshield wiper deicer is operating.

The windshield wiper deicer will automa-

tically shut off after approximately 15

minutes. If the wiper blades have been

deiced completely before that time, push

the button to turn it off. It also turns off

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“Acc” or “LOCK” position. If deicing is not

complete, you have to push the button to

turn the deicer on again.

NOTE

If your vehicle is equipped with the

outside mirror defogger, the outside

mirror defogger operates while the

windshield wiper deicer is operating.

Instruments and controls 3-27

Black plate (142,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

3-28 Instruments and controls

Rear window defogger but-

ton

Manual climate control system

Automatic climate control system

The rear window defogger operates only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

The rear window defogger button is

located on the climate control panel.

To turn on the defogger, push the button.

To turn it off, push the button again.

The indicator light located on the button

lights up while the rear window defogger is

operating.

The defogger will automatically shut off

afte r approximately 15 minutes. If the

window clears before that time, push the

button to turn it off. It also turns off when

the ignition switch is turned to the “Acc” or

“LOCK” position. If defrosting or defogging

is desired when you restart your vehicle,

you have to push the button to turn it on

again.

Turn on the rear window defogger if the

wiper is frozen to the glass.

CAUTION

. Do not use sharp instruments or

window cleaner containing abra-

sives to clean the inner surface

of the rear window. They may

damage the conductors printed

on the window.

. To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not operate the

defogger continuously for any

longer than necessary.

Black plate (143,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Mirrors

Always check that the inside and outside

mirrors are properly adjusted before you

start driving.

& Inside mirror

The inside mirror has a day and night

position. Pull the tab at the bottom of the

mirror toward you for the night position.

Push it away for the day position. The

night position reduces glare from head-

lights.

! Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if

equipped)

1) Left button

2) Auto dimming indicator

3) Photosensor

4) Right button

The auto-dimming mirror/compass has an

anti-glare feature which automatically re-

duces glare coming from headlights of

vehicles behind you. It also contains a

built-in compass.

. By pressing and releasing the left

button, the automatic dimming function is

toggled on or off. When the automatic

dimming function is on, the auto dimming

indicator light (green) located to the right

of the button will illuminate.

. By pressing and releasing the right

button, the compass display is toggled on

or off. When the compass is on, an

illuminated compass reading will appear

in the lower part of the mirror.

Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode,

the mirror surface turns bright if the

transmission is shifted into reverse. This

is to ensure good rearward visibility during

reversing.

! Photosensors

The mirror has a photosensor attached on

both the front and back sides. If the glare

from the headlights of vehicles behind you

strikes the mirror, these sensors detect it

and make the reflection surface of the

mirror dimmer to help prevent you from

being blinded. For this reason, use care

not to cover the sensors with stickers, or

Instruments and controls 3-29

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (144,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

3-30 Instruments and controls

other similar items. Periodically wipe the

sensors clean using a piece of dry soft

cotton cloth or an applicator.

! Compass calibration

1. For optimum calibration, switch off all

nonessential electrical accessories (rear

window defogger, heater/air conditioning

system, spotlight, etc.) and ensure all

doors are shut.

2. Drive to an open, level area away from

large metallic objects or structures and

make certain the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position.

3. Press and hold the left button for 3

seconds then release, and the compass

will enter the calibration mode. “CAL” and

direction will be displayed.

4. Drive slowly in a circle until “CAL”

disappears from the display (approxi-

mately two or three circles).

5. The compass is now calibrated.

Further calibration is not required. The

compass will automatically calibrate from

this point forward.

! Compass zone adjustment

Compass calibration zones

1. The zone setting is factory preset to

Zone 8. Refer to the “Compass calibration

zone” map shown above or one attached

to the end of this manual to verify that the

compass zone setting is correct for your

geographical location.

2. Press and hold the right button for 3

seconds then release, and the word

“ZONE” will briefly appear and then the

zone number will be displayed.

3. Press the right-hand button repeatedly

to cycle the display through all possible

zone settings. Stop cycling when the

correct zone setting for your location is

displayed.

4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will

exit the zone setting mode.

& Outside mirrors

! Convex mirror (passenger side)

WARNING

Objects look smaller in a convex

mirror and farther away than when

viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use

the convex mirror to judge th e

distance of vehicles behind you

when changing lanes. Use the inside

mirror (or glance backwards) to

determine the actual size and dis-

tance of objects that you view in

convex mirror.

Black plate (145,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

! Remote control mirror switch

1) Selection switch

2) Direction control switch

The remote control mirrors operate only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or

“Acc” position.

1. Press either end of the selection

switch, “L” for the left, “R” for the right.

2. Move the direction control switch in the

direction you want to move the mirror.

3. Return the selection switch t o t he

neutral position to prevent unintentional

operation.

The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-

ally.

! Outside mirror defogger (if

equipped)

CAUTION

To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not operate the de-

fogger continuously for any longer

than necessary.

1) Outsi de mirror defogger button (if

equipped)

2) Outside mirror defogger and windshield

wiper deicer button (if equipped)

The outside mirror defogger operates only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

To turn on the outside mirror defogger,

push the button. To turn it off, push the

button again. The indicator light located on

the button lights up while the outside

mirror defogger is operating.

The defogger will automatically shut off

after approximately 15 minutes. If the

mirror clears before that time, push the

button to turn it off. It also turns off when

the ignition switch is turned to the “Acc” or

“LOCK” position. If defrosting or defogging

is desired when you restart your vehicle,

you have to push the button to turn it on

again.

NOTE

On vehicles equipped with a wind-

shield wiper deicer, the windshield

wiper deicer switch is also used to

operate the outside mirror defogger.

Instruments and controls 3-31

Black plate (146,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

3-32 Instruments and controls

Tilt steering wheel

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt

position while driving. This may

cause loss of vehicle control and

result in personal injury.

1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to the

“Front seats” section (chapter 1).

2. Push the tilt lock lever down.

3. Move the steering wheel to the desired

level.

4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering

wheel in place.

5. Make sure that the steering wheel is

securely locked by moving it up and down.

Horn

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

Black plate (7,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Ventilator.............................................................. 4-2

Air flow selection ................................................ 4-2

Center and side ventilators.................................. 4-3

Manual climate control system

(if equipped) ..................................................... 4-3

Control panel ...................................................... 4-3

Heater operation ................................................. 4-5

Air conditioner operation..................................... 4-7

Automatic climate control system

(if equipped) ..................................................... 4-8

Control panel ...................................................... 4-8

To use as full-automatic climate control

system.............................................................. 4-8

To use as semi-automatic climate control

system.............................................................. 4-8

Fan speed control dial......................................... 4-9

Temperature control dial...................................... 4-9

Air flow control dial............................................. 4-9

Air inlet selection button .................................... 4-10

Air conditioner button........................................ 4-10

Temperature sensors ......................................... 4-11

Operating tips for heater and air

conditioner ...................................................... 4-11

Cleaning ventilation grille................................... 4-11

Efficient cooling after parking in direct

sunlight ........................................................... 4-11

Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant

circuit.............................................................. 4-12

Checking air conditioning system before summer

season ............................................................ 4-12

Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and

low temperature weather conditions ................. 4-12

Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine

is heavily loaded.............................................. 4-12

Refrigerant for your climate control system ........ 4-12

Air filtration system (if equipped)..................... 4-12

Replacing an air filter......................................... 4-13

Climate control

Black plate (150,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

4-2 Climate control

Ventilator

& Air flow selection

Black plate (151,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Center and side ventilators

! Center ventilators

Move the tab up and down or right and left

to adjust the flow direction.

! Side ventilators

1) Open

2) Close

3) Thumbwheel

Move the tab up and down or right and left

to adjust the flow direction.

To open or close the ventilator, turn the

thumbwheel up or down.

Manual climate control sys-

tem (if equipped)

& Control panel

1) Temperature control dial

2) Fan speed control dial

3) Air flow control dial

4) Rear window defogger button (Refer to

the “Rear window defogger button” in

chapter 3.)

5) Air conditioner button

6) Air inlet selection button

! Temperature control dial

This dial regulates the temperature of air

flow from the air outlets over a range from

the blue side (cool) to red side (warm).

Climate control 4-3

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (152,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

4-4 Climate control

! Fan speed control dial

The fan operates only when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position. The

fan speed control dial is used to select

four fan speeds.

! Air flow control dial

This dial has the following five positions:

: Air flows through the instrument panel

outlets.

: Air flows through the instrument panel

outlets and the foot outlets.

: Air flows through the foot outlets and

some through the windshield defroster

outlets.

: Air flows through the windshield

defroster outlets and foot outlets.

: Air flows through the windshield

defroster outlets.

NOTE

When the dial is placed in the “ ” or

“

” position, the air conditioner com-

pressor operates automatically regard-

less of the position of the air condi-

tioner button to defog the windshield

quickly. However the indicator on the

air conditioner button will not come on.

At the same time, the air inlet selection

is automatically set to “outside air”

mode.

In this state, you cannot select “recir-

culation” mode by manually pressing

the air inlet selection button.

Also, you cannot stop the air condi-

tioner compressor by pressing the air

conditioner button.

! Air conditioner button

The air conditioner operates only when

the engine is running.

Push the air conditioner button while the

fan is in operation to turn on the air

conditioner. The indicator light will come

on.

Push it again to turn off the air conditioner.

! Air inlet selection button

ON position (Recirculation): Interior air

is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the

air inlet selection button to the ON posi-

tion. The indicator light will come on.

Place the air inlet selection button to the

ON position for fast cooling with the air

conditioner or when driving on a dusty

road.

OFF position (Outside air): Outside air is

drawn into the passenger compartment.

Push the air inlet selection button again to

the OFF position. The indicator light will go

off.

Place the air inlet selection button to the

OFF position when the interior has cooled

to a comfortable temperature and the road

is no longer dusty.

Black plate (153,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

WARNING

Continued operation with the air

inletselectionbuttonintheON

position may fog up the windows.

Switch to the OFF position as soon

as the outside dusty condition

clears.

& Heater operation

! Defrosting or defogging the wind-

shield

To direct warm air to the windshield and

front door windows:

1. Set the air flow control dial to the “

”

position.

2. Turn the temperature control dial all

the way to the right.

3. Set the fan speed control dial to the

highest speed.

If your vehicle is equipped with an air

conditioner, when the “

” or “ ” position

is selected, the air conditioner compressor

automatically operates regardless of the

position of the air conditioner button to

defog the windshield quickly.

However, the air conditioner indicator light

does not come on at this time.

NOTE

Warm air also comes out from the right

and left air outlets. To stop warm air

flow from these outlets, turn the corre-

sponding thumbwheel down.

! Heating and defrosting

To direct warm air toward the floor and the

windshield:

1. Set the air flow control dial to the “

”

position.

2. Set the temperature control dial to the

most comfortable level.

3. Set the fan speed control dial to the

desired speed.

If your vehicle is equipped with an air

conditioner, when the “

” or “ ” position

is selected, the air conditioner compressor

automatically operates regardless of the

position of the air conditioner button to

defog the windshield quickly.

However, the air conditioner indicator light

does not come on at this time.

Climate control 4-5

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (154,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

4-6 Climate control

NOTE

Warm air also comes out from the right

and left air outlets. To stop warm air

flow from these outlets, turn the corre-

sponding thumbwheel down.

! Heating

To direct warm air toward the floor:

1. Set the air inlet selection button to the

OFF position.

2. Set the air flow control dial to the “

”

position.

3. Set the temperature control dial to the

most comfortable level.

4. Set the fan speed control dial to the

desired speed.

NOTE

Warm air also comes out from the right

and left air outlets. To stop warm air

flow from these outlets, turn the corre-

sponding thumbwheel down.

! Bi-level heating

This setting allows you to direct air of

different temperatures from the instrument

panel and foot outlets. The air from the

foot outlets is slightly warmer than from

the instrument panel outlets.

1. Set the air inlet selection button to the

OFF position.

2. Set the air flow control dial to the “

”

position.

3. Set the temperature control dial to the

desired temperature level.

4. Set the fan speed control dial to the

desired speed.

Setting the temperature control dial fully

turned to the red area or blue area

decreases the temperature difference

between the air from the instrument panel

outlets and the air from the foot outlets.

! Ventilation

To force outside air through the instrument

panel outlets:

1. Set the air inlet selection button to the

OFF position.

2. Set the air flow control dial to the “

”

position.

3. Set the temperature control dial all the

way left.

4. Set the fan speed control dial to the

desired speed.

Black plate (155,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

When driving on a dusty road, set the air

inlet selection button to the “ON” position.

WARNING

Continued operation with the air

inletselectionbuttonintheON

position may fog up the windows.

Switch to the OFF position as soon

as the outside dusty condition

clears.

& Air conditioner operation

! Cooling or dehumidifying

1) ON position

For cooling and dehumidification of the

passenger compartment, performing the

following steps will allow air to flow

through the instrument panel outlets:

1. Set the air inlet selection button to the

OFF position.

2. Set the air flow control dial to the “

”

position.

3. Set the air conditioner button to the

“ON” position.

4. Set the temperature control dial to the

blue side.

5. Set the fan speed control dial at the

highest speed.

! Defrosting or defogging

To direct warm air to the windshield and

front door windows:

1. Set the air flow control dial to the “

”

position.

2. Set the temperature control dial to the

red side.

3. Set the fan speed control dial at the

highest speed.

The air conditioner compressor automati-

cally operates when the air flow control

dial set in the “

” or “ ” position to

provide better defogging performance.

However, the air conditioner indicator light

does not come on at this time.

Climate control 4-7

Black plate (156,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

4-8 Climate control

Automatic climate control

system (if equipped)

Although this climate control system can

be used as a full-automatic climate control

system, it can also, if desired, be used as

a semi-automatic climate control system.

When it is used as a full-automatic climate

control system, the outlet air temperature,

fan speed, air flow distribution, air inlet

control, and air conditioner compressor

operation are all automatically controlled

to maintain a constant, comfortable tem-

perature inside the vehicle.

NOTE

. Operate the automatic climate con-

trol system when the engine is running.

. When the engine coolant is cold, the

blower does not run.

. In the “AUTO” mode, when the air

temperature in the passenger compart-

ment is sufficiently cool, the air condi-

tioner compressor does not operate.

For efficient defogging or dehumidify-

ing in cold weather, press the “A/C”

button to operate the air conditioner

compressor.

. Even when cooling is not necessary,

setting the temperature much lower

than the current outlet air temperature

turns on the air conditioner compres-

sor automatically and the “A/C” indi-

cator light on the control panel comes

on.

& Control panel

1) Temperature control dial

2) Fan speed control dial

3) Air flow control dial

4) Rear window defogger button (Refer to

the “Rear window defogger button” in

chapter 3.)

5) Air inlet selection button

6) Air conditioner button

& To use as full-automatic cli-

mate control system

Place the temperature control dial in the

position for your desired temperature, then

set the other dials and buttons as de-

scribed in the following. The system’s

functions will then switch to AUTO mode

and be controlled automatically.

. Air flow control dial: AUTO position

. Fan speed control dial: AUTO position

. Air inlet selection button: Press for at

least 1 second. (Indicator will flash twice.)

. Air conditioner button: Press for at least

1 second. (Indicator will flash twice.)

& To use as semi-automatic

climate control system

Each function can be individually set to

AUTO mode independently of the others.

Any function set to AUTO mode is con-

trolled automatically. Any function not set

to AUTO mode can be manually adjusted

as desired.

The temperature can be set within a range

of 65 to 858F (20 to 308C).

Black plate (157,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Fan speed control dial

The fan operates only with the ignition

switch in the “ON” position. The fan speed

control dial is used to select the AUTO

(automatic control) mode or to select the

desired fan speed. The dial’s positions

and their functions are as follows:

OFF: The fan does not operate.

AUTO: The fan speed is adjusted auto-

maticallyinaccordancewiththeair

temperature inside and outside the pas-

senger compartment, the intensity of sun-

light, and other factors. SUBARU recom-

mends using the AUTO position.

Other positions: The fan speed can be

adjusted in seven steps.

NOTE

With the fan speed control dial in the

AUTO position and the air flow control

dial in the “

”, “ ”,or“ ” position,

the fan does not operate during engine

warm-up until the engine coolant tem-

perature exceeds approx. 122 8 F (508C).

& Temperature control dial

This dial is used to set the desired interior

temperature. With the dial set to your

desired temperature, the system automa-

tically adjusts the temperature of air

supplied from the outlets such that the

desired temperature is ach ieved and

maintained.

If the dial is turned fully counterclockwise,

the system gives maximum cooling per-

formance. If the dial is turned fully clock-

wise, the system gives maximum heating

performance.

& Air flow control dial

This dial has the following six positions.

The outlets from which air is supplied in

each position are as follows:

AUTO: The air flow control is adjusted

automatically in accordance with the air

temperature inside and outside the pas-

senger compartment, the intensity of sun-

light, and other factors. SUBARU recom-

mends using the AUTO position.

: Instrument panel outlets

: Instrument panel outlets and foot

outlets

: Foot outlets and windshield defroster

Climate control 4-9

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (158,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

4-10 Climate control

outlets (relatively little air from windshield

defroster outlets)

: Windshield defroster outlets and foot

outlets

: Windshield defroster outlets

NOTE

When the dial is placed in the “ ” or

“

” position, the air conditioner com-

pressor operates automatically to de-

fog the windshield quickly. At the same

time, the air inlet selection is automa-

tically set to “outside air” mode.

& Air inlet selection button

ON position (Recirculation): Interior air

is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the

air inlet selection button to the ON position

for fast cooling with the air conditioner or

when driving on a dusty road. The

indicator light will come on.

OFF position (Outside Air): Outside air

is drawn into the passenger compartment.

Push the air inlet selection button to the

OFF position when the interior has cooled

to a comfortable temperature and the road

is no longer dusty. The indicator light will

go off.

AUTO: When the air inlet selection button

is pressed for at least 1 second, the

indicator flashes twice. The air inlet control

is then adjusted automatically in accor-

dance with the air temperature inside and

outside the passenger compartment, the

intensity of sunlight, and other factors.

Pressing the air inlet selection button

cancels the AUTO mode. SUBARU re-

commends using the AUTO position.

WARNING

Continued operation in the ON posi-

tion may fog up the windows. Switch

to the OFF position as soon as the

outside dusty condition clears.

& Air conditioner button

The button’s positions and their functions

are as follows:

ON: The air conditioner operates while the

fan is running.

Push the button to select this position. The

indicator light will come on.

OFF: The air conditioner does not oper-

ate.

Push the button again to select this

position. The indicator light will go off.

AUTO: When the button is pressed for at

least 1 second, the indicator flashes twice.

The air conditioner compressor operation

is then adjusted automatically in accor-

dance with the air temperature inside and

outside the passenger compartment, the

intensity of sunlight, and other factors.

Black plate (159,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Pressing the button cancels the AUTO

mode. SUBARU recommends using the

AUTO position.

NOTE

The air conditioner’s compressor does

not operate with an outside tempera-

ture of 328F(08C) or lower.

& Temperature sensors

1) Interior air temperature sensor

2) Solar sensor

The automatic climate control system

employs several sensors. These sensors

are delicate. If they are not treated

properly and become damaged, the sys-

tem may not be able to control the interior

temperature correctly. To avoid damaging

the sensors, observe the following pre-

cautions:

– Do not subject the sensors to impact.

– Keep water away from the sensors.

– Do not cover the sensors.

The sensors are located as follows:

– Solar sensor: beside the windshield

defroster grille.

– Interior air temperature sensor: near

the ignition switch.

– Outside temperature sensor: behind

the front grille.

Operating tips for heater and

air conditioner

& Cleaning ventilation grille

Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille

free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions

to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.

Since the condenser is located in front of

the radiator, this area should be kept clean

because cooling performance is impaired

by any accumulation of insects and leaves

on the condenser.

& Efficient cooling after parking

in direct sunlight

After parking in direct sunlight, drive with

the windows open for a few minutes to

allow outside air to circulate into the

Climate control 4-11

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (160,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

4-12 Climate control

heated interior. This results in quicker

cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the

windows closed during the operation of

the air conditioner for maximum cooling

efficiency.

& Lubrication oil circulation in

the refrigerant circuit

Operate the air conditioner compressor at

a low engine speed (at idle or low driving

speeds) a few minutes each month during

the off-season to circulate its oil.

& Checking air conditioning

system before summer sea-

son

Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-

ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper

operation each spring. Have your

SUBARU dealer perform this check.

& Cooling and dehumidifying in

high humidity and low tem-

perature weather conditions

Under certain weather conditions (high

relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a

small amount of water vapor emission

from the air outlets may be noticed. This

condition is normal and does not indicate

any problem with the air conditioning

system.

& Air conditioner compressor

shut-off when engine is

heavily loaded

To improve acceleration and gas mileage,

the air conditioner compressor is designed

to temporarily shut off during air condi-

tioner operation whenever the accelerator

is fully depressed such as during rapid

acceleration or when driving on a steep

upgrade.

& Refrigerant for your climate

control system

Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly

refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the meth-

od of adding, changing or checking the

refrigerant is different from the method for

CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU

dealer for service. Repairs needed as a

result of using the wrong refrigerant are

not covered under warranty.

Air filtration system (if

equipped)

If your vehicle’s air conditioning system is

equipped with an air filtration system,

replace the filter element according to

the replacement schedule shown in the

following. This schedule should be fol-

lowed to maintain the filter’s dust collec-

tion ability. Under extremely dusty condi-

tions, the filter should be replaced more

frequently. It is recommended that you

have your filter checked or replaced by

your SUBARU dealer. For replacement,

use only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.

Replacement schedule:

Every 12 months or 7,500 miles (12,000

km) whichever comes first

CAUTION

Contact your SUBARU dealer if the

following occurs, even if it is not yet

time to change the filter:

– Reduction of the air flow through

the vents.

– Windshield gets easily fogged or

misted.

Black plate (161,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

NOTE

The filter can influence the air condi-

tioning, heating and defroster perfor-

mance if not properly maintained.

& Replacing an air filter

1. Remove the glove box.

(1) Open the glove box.

(2) Remove the nine screws securing

the glove box.

1) Air filter cover

2. Remove the air filter cover.

1) Air filter element

2) Arrow mark

3. Replace the air filter element with new

one.

CAUTION

The arrow mark on the filter must

point UP.

1) Air filter cover

4. Reinstall the air filter cover.

Climate control 4-13

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (162,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

4-14 Climate control

5. Reinstall the glove box.

6. Close the glove box.

1) Service label

2) Caution label

7. LABEL installation

(1) Fill out the information on the

service label (small).

(2) Attach the service label to the

driver side door pillar and the caution

label to the driver side end of the

instrument panel.

Black plate (9,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Antenna system .................................................. 5-2

FM reception....................................................... 5-2

Installation of accessories.................................. 5-2

Audio set ............................................................. 5-3

Type A audio set ................................................. 5-3

Type B audio set ................................................. 5-3

In-dash 6 CD auto changer (Optional audio unit –

if equipped)....................................................... 5-3

Type A audio set (if equipped) ........................... 5-4

Radio operation................................................... 5-4

Compact disc player operation ............................ 5-7

CD changer control (if optional in-dash CD

changer is connected) ....................................... 5-9

Type B audio set (if equipped).......................... 5-11

Radio operation ................................................. 5-11

Built-in CD changer control................................ 5-15

Auxiliary unit and satellite radio operation.......... 5-20

In-dash 6 CD auto changer (if equipped)......... 5-23

Loading and unloading compact discs ............... 5-23

Precautions to observe when handling a

compact disc................................................... 5-25

Audio

Black plate (166,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

5-2 Audio

Antenna system

The antenna is printed on the inner

surface of the left side rear quarter window

glass.

CAUTION

Do not use sharp instruments or

window cleaner containing abra-

sives to clean the inner surface of

the window on which the antenna is

printed. Doing so may damage the

antenna printed on the window.

& FM reception

Although FM is normally static free,

reception can be affected by the surround-

ing area, atmospheric conditions, station

strength and transmitter distance. Build-

ings or ot her obstructions may ca use

momentary static, flutter or station inter-

ference. If reception continues to be

unsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station.

Installation of accessories

Always consult your SUBARU dealer

before installing a citizen band radio or

other transmitting device in your vehicle.

Such devices may cause the electronic

control system to malfunction if they are

incorrect ly installed or if they are not

suited for the vehicle.

Black plate (167,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Audio set

Your SUBARU may be equipped with one

of the following audio sets. See the pages

indicated in this section for operating

details.

& Type A audio set

. Radio operation: refer to page 5-4

. Compact disc player operation: refer to

page 5-7

. CD changer control: refer to page 5-9

& Type B audio set

. Radio operation: refer to page 5-11

. Built-in CD changer operation: refer to

page 5-15

. Auxiliary unit operation: refer to page 5-

& In-dash 6 CD auto changer

(Optional audio unit – if

equipped)

. Inserting and removing a disc or all

discs: refer to page 5-23

Audio 5-3

Black plate (168,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

5-4 Audio

Type A audio set (if equipped)

The radio will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON” position.

& Radio operation

(1) Power switch, Vo lume control, Tone/

Fader/Balance control dial

(2) BAND button

(3) Tuning buttons

(4) Preset buttons

(5) AUDIO button

(6) SCAN button

! Power switch and volume/bass/tre-

ble/fader/balance control (PWR/

VOL)

The dial (1) is used for both power (ON/

OFF) and volume control. The radio is

turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial

and the volume is controlled by turning the

dial.

! Tone and balance control

The “VOLUME” control knob normally

function as volume control. This knob

become a control for Treble, Bass, Fader

or Balance when you select the appro-

priate audio mode.

Choose desired volume level for each

mode by turning the “VOLUME” control

knob. The control fun ction returns to

volume control mode after approximately

5 seconds.

To change control modes: Each brief

press of the “AUDIO” button chang es

control modes in the following sequence

starting from volume control mode. (When

the radio is first turned on, the control

Black plate (169,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

mode is in the volume control.)

Display Control mode

Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise

VOL

Volume control For less volume For more volume

BAS

Bass control For less bass sound For more bass sound

TRE

Treble control For less treble sound For more treble sound

BAL

Balance control

To increase left speaker volume and de-

crease right speaker volume

To increase right speaker volume and

decrease left speaker volume

FAD

Fader control

To increase rear speaker volume and

decrease front speaker volume

To increase front speaker volume and

decrease rear speaker volume

Audio

5-5

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (170,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

5-6 Audio

! FM/AM band selection button

(BAND)

Push the “BAND” button when the radio is

on to select FM1, FM2 or AM band

reception. Each time this button is

pressed, the band will change in the

following order:

The display indicates which one is cur-

rently selected.

! Stereo indicator

The stereo indicator “ST” will come on

when an FM stereo broadcast is received.

! Tuning (TUNE)

! Manual tuning (TUNE)

Push the “

” side of the tuning button (3)

to increase the tuning freque ncy and

press the “

” side of the button to

decrease it.

Each time the button is pressed, the

frequency changes 10 kHz in the AM

waveband and 0.2 MHz in the FM wave-

band.

! Seek tuning

If the tuning button (3) is pressed for

longer than half of a second, the radio will

begin to automatically search for receiva-

ble frequencies and will stop at the first

one f ound. This function may not be

available, however, when radio signals

are weak. In such a situation, perform

manual tuning to select the desired

station.

! Automatic tuning (SCAN)

Press the “SCAN” button (6) to change the

radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, the

radio scans through the radio band until a

station is found. The radio will stop at the

station for 5 seconds while displaying the

frequency, after which scanning will con-

tinue until the entire band has been

scanned from the low end to the high end.

Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel

the SCAN mode and to stop on any

displayed frequency.

When the “SCAN” button is pressed for

automatic tuning, stations are scanned in

the direction of low frequencies to high

frequencies only.

Automatic tuning may not function prop-

erly if the station reception is weakened by

distance from the station or proximity to

tall buildings and hills.

! Selecting preset stations

Presetting a station with a preset button

(4) allows you to select that station in a

single operation. Up to six AM, FM1 and

FM2 stations each may be preset.

! How to preset stations

1. Press the “BAND” selection button to

select AM, FM1 or FM2 reception.

2. Press the “ SCAN ” button (6) or tune

the radio manually until the desired station

frequency is displayed.

3. Press one of the preset buttons (4) for

at least 2 seconds to store the frequency.

At this time, there will momentarily be no

sound from the radio. If the button is

pressed for less than 2 seconds, the

preceding selection will remain in memory.

NOTE

. If the connection between the radio

and battery is broken for any reason

such as vehicle maintenance or radio

removal, all stations stored in the

preset buttons are cleared. If this

occurs, it is necessary to reset the

preset buttons.

. If a cell phone is placed near the

radio, it may cause the radio to emit

noise when it receives calls. This noise

does not indicate a radio fault.

Black plate (171,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Compact disc player operation

(7) Disc slot

(8) CD button

(9) Eject button

(10) Fast-forwarding and track up button

(11) Fast-reversing and track down button

(12) Random button

(13) Repeat button

(14) Scan button

(15) PWR (power) switch

! To play back a compact disc

! When CD is not in the player

Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole

while gripping the edge of the disc, then

insert it in to the slot (with the label side

up) and the player will automatically pull

the disc into position.

A single CD (8 cm/3 inch CD) may also be

used without any adapter.

NOTE

. Make sure to always insert a disc

with the label side up. If a disc is

inserted with the label side down, it

might be ejected or the player might

shut off.

. After the last song finishes, the

player will automatically return to track

1 (the first song on the disc).

Audio 5-7

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (172,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

5-8 Audio

! When CD is in the player

Press the “CD” button (8). The display will

show “CD-IN” and the player will start

playback.

NOTE

After the last song finishes, playback

will automatically return to track 1 (the

first song on the disc).

! To stop playback of a CD

When the “PWR” button (15) is pressed

during playback of a CD, the CD stops

playing temporarily. To let the CD resume

playing, press the button again.

! To select a song from its beginning

! Forward direction

Briefly press the “

” side of the button

(10) to skip to the beginning of the next

track. Each time this side of the button is

pressed, the indicated track number will

increase.

! Backward direction

Briefly press the “

” side of the button

(11) to skip to the beginning of the current

track. Each time this side of the button is

pressed, the indicated track number will

decrease.

! Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing

! Fast-forwarding

Press the “

” side of the button (10)

continuously to fast-forward the disc.

Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.

! Fast-reversing

Press the “

” side of the button (11)

continuously to fast-reverse the disc.

Release the button to stop fast-reversing.

! Repeat playback

Briefly press the “RPT” button (13) while a

song is playing to play the song repeat-

edly. The “RPT” indicator will come on and

the song will be played continuously. To

cancel the repeat mode, press the button

again. Then the “RPT” indicator goes out,

and normal playback mode is restored.

! Random playback

Briefly press the “RAND” button (12) while

a disc is being played back to play all

songs on the disc in a random order. The

“RAND” indicator will come on and all

songs on the disc will be played in a

random order.

To cancel the random mode, press the

button again. Then the “RAND” indicator

goes out, and normal playback mode is

restored.

! Scan

Briefly press the “SCAN” button (14), and

you can hear the first 10 seconds of each

track to search for the desired program. To

continue listening to the program, press

the “SCAN” button again. After all tracks

on the disc has been scanned, normal

playback mode is restored.

! To eject a disc from the player

When a disc is being played back or when

a disc is in the player, press the eject

button “

” (9). The disc will be ejected.

The disc may be removed even when the

ignition switch is in the “LOCK” position.

NOTE

Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD

sticking out, because vibration might

make it fall out.

Black plate (173,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& CD changer control (if optional in-dash CD changer is con-

nected)

An optional CD changer can be connected to this audio unit. Consult the instructions that

accompany the CD changer for operating the CD changer itself (e.g., how to load or

unload CDs). See your SUBARU dealer for more information.

(16) CD button

(17) Track selection buttons

(18) RAND (Random) button

(19) RPT (Repeat) button

(20) SCAN button

! To start playback

When the “CD” button (16) is pressed, the

CD changer will start playback. The dis-

play shows the current disc number, track

number and the elapsed time during

playback.

NOTE

. If a disc is in the player, the “DISC”

button is used to change from CD

player operation to DISC changer op-

eration. Each time the “DISC ” button is

pressed, the operating mode will

change alternately.

. At the end of the disc, the player

automatically continues with the next

disc.

. After playback on the last disc

finishes, playback will automatically

return to the first disc.

. If you have loaded fewer than 6

discs, any missing disc is automati-

cally skipped.

Audio 5-9

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (174,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

5-10 Audio

! Selection of a desired disc

You can select a desired disc from among

the discs contained in the CD changer

only by pressing the corresponding num-

ber on one of the disc select buttons. If

you are to listen to the 5th disc in the CD

changer, press the “5” button of the disc

select buttons. All other discs in the CD

changer can also be selected in a similar

way.

NOTE

. No disc change takes place if the

button corresponding to the storage

tray i n which no disc is loaded is

pressed.

. If the disc select button correspond-

ing to the disc now in playback is

pressed again, the disc will be replayed

from its beginning.

! To select a song from its beginning

! Forward direction

Briefly press the “

” side of the button

(17) to skip to the beginning of the next

track. Each time this side of the button is

pressed, the indicated track number will

increase.

! Backward direction

Briefly press the “

” side of the button

(17) to skip to the beginning of the current

track. Each time this side of the button is

pressed, the indicated track number will

decrease.

! Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing

! Fast-forwarding

Press the “

” side of the button (17)

continuously to fast-forward the disc.

Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.

If you continue fast-forwarding to the end

of the disc, the CD changer will auto-

matically stop fast-forwarding and start

playback beginning with the first track on

the current disc.

! Fast-reversing

Press the “

” side of the button (17)

continuously to fast-reverse the disc.

Release the button to stop fast-reversing.

If you continue fast-reversing to the

beginning of the disc, the CD changer will

automatically stop fast-reversing and start

playback beginning with the first track on

the current disc.

! Repeat playback

Press the “RPT” button (19) while a song

is playing to play the song repeatedly. The

“RPT” indicator will come on and the song

will be played continuously. To cancel the

repeat mode, press the button again.

Then the “RPT” indicator goes out, and

normal playback mode is restored.

! Random playback

Press the “RAND” button (18) while a disc

is being played back to play all songs on

the disc in a random order. The “ RAND”

indicator will come on and all songs on the

disc will be played in a random order.

To cancel the random mode, press the

button again. Then the “RAND” indicator

goes out, and normal playback mode is

restored.

! Scan (a convenient way to become

familiar with a disc)

1. Press the “SCAN” button (20).

– The display shows “SCAN” and the track

number being scanned.

– You hear the first 10 seconds of each

track.

– The operation is automatically cleared

after playing all programs. Then, normal

playback starts.

2. Press the “SCAN” button again when

you hear a track you like.

– Normal playback resumes.

! To stop playback

To stop playback and switch over to the

radio mode, press the “BAND” button.

Black plate (175,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Type B audio set (if equipped)

The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON” position.

& Radio operation

(1) Power switch, Volume, Brightness con-

trol dial

(2) FM/AM selection button

(3) Seek button

(4) Scan button

(5) Sound/Tune control dial

(6) Preset buttons

! Power switch and volume/bright-

ness control (POWER/VOL/

BRIGHT)

The dial (1) is used for both power (ON/

OFF) and volume control. The radio is

turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial,

and the volume is controlled by turning the

dial.

! Sound control and tune/folder se-

lect/channel control (SOUND/TUNE/

FOLDER/CH)

The dial (5) is used for selecting the sound

control mode with each brief press of the

dial, and for adjusting each level by

turning it. It is also used for tuning the

radio/folder selection (only when playing

MP3 or WMA)/channel selection (satellite

radio*) when the “FM/AM”, “CD/AUX” and

“SAT” are selected.

(*: Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires a

tuner, antenna and a service contract. For

details, please contact your SUBARU

dealer.)

Audio 5-11

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (176,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

5-12 Audio

Display Control mode

Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise

BASS

Bass control For less bass sound For more bass sound

MIDDLE

Midrange control For less midrange sound For more midrange sound

TREBLE

Treble control For less treble sound For more treble sound

FADER

Fader control

To increase rear speaker volume and

decrease front speaker volume

To increase front speaker volume and

decrease rear speaker volume

BALANCE

Balance control

To increase left speaker volume and de-

crease right speaker volume

To increase right speaker volume and

decrease left speaker volume

VOLUME

Volume control For less volume

For more volume

! Sound control

The dial (5) controls the Bass, Midrange,

Treble, Balance and Fader when you

select the appropriate sound control

mode . Choose the desired setting for

each mode by depressing the “SOUND”

controldial(5).Thecontrolfunction

returns to last mode after approximately

5 seconds.

To change control modes: Each brief

press of the “SOUND” button (5) changes

control modes in the following sequence

starting from bass control mode.

Black plate (177,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

! Display illumination dimness can-

cellation (BRIGHT)

The brightness of the radio display dims

when the light switch is in the “

” or

“

” position. If this makes the display

difficult to read, press the volume dial for

more than 2 seconds to return the display

to original brig htness. Subseque ntly

pressing the volume dial again for more

than 2 seconds or if you can safely do so,

turning the light switch to the OFF position

and back to the “

” or “ ” position

makes the radio display dim again.

! FM/AM selection button (FM/AM)

Push the “ FM/AM” button (2) when the

radio is on to select FM1, FM2 or AM

reception. Each time this button is

pressed, the band will change in the

following order:

The display indicates which one is cur-

rently selected.

! Stereo indicator

The stereo indicator “ST” will come on

when an FM stereo broadcast is received.

! Manual tuning (TUNE)

Turn the tuning dial (5) clockwise to

increase the tuning frequency and turn

the dial counterclockwise to decrease it.

Each click the dial is turned, the frequency

changes 10 kHz in the AM waveband and

0.2 MHz in the FM waveband.

! Seek tuning

When the “

” side of the “SEEK/TRACK/

CAT” button (3) is depressed, the radio will

begin to automatically seek up for recei-

vable frequencies and will stop at the first

one found. For the “

” side, the radio will

begin to automatically seek down. This

function may not be available, however,

when radio signals are weak. In such a

situation, perform manual tuning to select

the desired station.

! Automatic tuning (SCAN)

Press the “SCAN” button (4) to change the

radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, the

radio scans through the radio band until a

station is found. The radio will stop at a

receivable station for 5 seconds while

displaying the frequency by blinking, after

which scanni ng will continue until the

entire band has been scanned from the

low end to the high end. Press the “SCAN”

button again to cancel the SCAN mode

and to stop on any displayed frequency.

When the “SCAN” button is pressed for

automatic tuning, stations are scanned in

the direction of low frequencies to high

frequencies only. Automatic tuning may

not function properly if the station recep-

tion is weakened by distance from the

station or proximity to tall buildings and

hills.

! Selecting preset stations

Presetting a station with a preset button

(6) allows you to select that station in a

single operation. Up to six AM, FM1 and

FM2 stations each may be preset.

! How to preset stations

1. Press the “FM/AM” button (2) to select

AM, FM1 or FM2 reception.

2. Press the “ SCAN ” button (4) or tune

the radio manually until the desired station

frequency is displayed.

3. Press one of the preset buttons (6) for

at least 2 seconds to store the frequency.

The frequency of the station will flash once

on the display at this time.

NOTE

. If the connection between the radio

and battery is broken for any reason

such as vehicle maintenance or radio

removal, all stations stored in the

preset buttons are cleared. If this

occurs, it is necessary to reset the

preset buttons.

. If a cell phone is placed near the

radio, it may cause the radio to emit

Audio 5-13

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (178,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

5-14 Audio

noise when the phone receives calls.

This noise does not indicate a problem

with the radio.

Black plate (179,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Built-in CD changer control

(7) CD button

(8) Eject button

(9) Disc slot

(10) Track selection buttons

(11) Repeat/Random button

(12) Disc number indicator

(13) Load button

(14) Folder selection dial

(15) Disc selection buttons

(16) Display button

NOTE

. Make sure to always insert a disc

with the label side up. If a disc is

inserted with the label side down, it

might be ejected or the player might

shut off.

. If a disc is inserted during a radio

broadcast, the disc will interrupt the

broadcast.

. The player is designed to be able to

play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs,

but it may not be able to play certain

ones.

. 8 cm/3 inch CDs are not supported,

and if inserted, they will be immediately

ejected.

Audio 5-15

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (180,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

5-16 Audio

! How to insert a CD(s)

! Inserting a CD

1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button (13). If

the magazine in the player has an idle

position where you can insert a disc, the

disc number indicator associated with the

idle position will blink. If no indicator

blinks, it means that ther e is no idle

position in the magazine.

2. When “IN” is displayed, insert the disc.

Once you have inserted the disc, the disc

number indicator will stop blinking. The

disc will be then automatically drawn in,

and the player will begin to play back the

first track of the disc.

. To insert more discs in succession,

repeat Steps 1 and 2. The magazine will

be loaded with discs in the ascending

order of position number. If you do not

insert any disc within 15 seconds after you

have pressed the “LOAD” button and “IN”

is displayed, the player will begin to play

back the first track of the last disc you

have inserted.

. While the player is in the loading mode,

if you press the “FM/AM” button (2), the

player will enter the standby mode. Press

the “CD/AUX” button (7) to start playback.

! Inserting a disc in a desired position

1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button (13). If

the magazine in the player has an idle

position where you can insert a disc, the

disc number indicator (12) associated with

the idle position will blink.

2. Press the disc selection button (15) at

the position where you want to insert a

disc. The associated disc number indica-

tor will blink.

3. If you insert a disc during the 15-

second period while “IN” is displayed, the

disc will be automatically drawn in, and the

player will sta rt playback of the disc,

beginning with the first track.

. To insert more discs in succession,

repeat Steps 1 and 3.

. While the player is in the loading mode,

if you press the “FM/AM” button (2), the

player will enter standby mode. Press the

“CD/AUX” button (7) to start playback.

! Loading all the magazine (Full disc

loading mode)

1. If you continue to press the “LOAD”

button (13) for more than 2 seconds, the

player will enter the full disc loading mode.

2. The disc number indicator (12) asso-

ciated with the idle position will blink. The

magazine will be loaded with discs in the

ascending order of position number.

3. When the loading of a disc is com-

plete, the next disc number indicator (12)

will blink. Then repeat Step 2.

4. When the magazine is filled with discs

by repeating Steps 2 and 3, the player will

start playback of the discs, beginning with

the one inserted first. If you fail to insert

any disc during each 15-second interval,

the full disc loading mode will be can-

celed, and the player will start playback of

the disc inserted first.

! How to play back a CD or make a

pause

! When there is no CD inserted:

Insert a CD by referring to “How to insert a

CD(s)”.

When a CD is loaded, the player will start

playback of the CD, beginning with the

first track.

! When there are CDs loaded:

Depress the “CD/AUX ” button to turn on

the CD (when the last mode of the player

is CD) and press a desired one of the disc

select buttons (15). The player will then

start playback of the selected CD, begin-

ning with the first track.

Black plate (181,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

! To select a track from its beginning

! Forward direction

Briefly press the “

” side of the button

(10) to skip to the beginning of the next

track. Each time the button is pressed, the

indicated track number will increase.

! Backward direction

Briefly press the “

” side of the button

(10) to skip to the beginning of the current

track. Each time the button is pressed, the

indicated track number will decrease.

! To select a folder (for MP3/WMA

audio)

Turn the “TUNE/FOLDER/CH” dial (14) to

select the folder.

! Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing

! Fast-forwarding

Press the “

” side of the button (10)

continuously to fast-forward the disc.

Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.

! Fast-reversing

Press the “

” side of the button (10)

continuously to fast-reverse the disc.

Release the button to stop fast-reversing.

! Repeat playback

Depress the “RPT/RDM” button (11) while

a song is p laying to play the song

repeatedly. Each time this button is

pressed, the repeat play mode will change

in the following order:

The “RPT” indicator will come on and the

song will be played continuously. When

the repeat OFF is selected, the “RPT”

indicator goes out and normal playback

mode is restored.

. The repeat play mode will be can-

celled if you perform any of the follow-

ing steps:

– Press the “RPT/RDM” button to

select the repeat OFF.

– Press the eject button.

– Press the “LOAD” button.

– Select the radio mode.

– Turn the “TUNE/ FOLDER/C H”

dial (for MP3/WMA audio).

– Turn off the power of the audio

equipment.

– Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position.

! Random playback

Press the “RPT/RDM” button (11) for more

than 2 seconds while a disc is being

played back to play all songs on the disc in

a random order.

The “RDM” indicator will come on and all

songs on the disc will be played in a

random order. When the random OFF is

selected, the “RDM” indicator goes out

and normal playback mode is restored.

. The random play mode will be

cancelled if you perform any of the

following steps:

– Press the “RPT/RDM” button to

select the random OFF.

– Press the eject button.

– Press the “LOAD” button.

– Select the radio mode.

– Turn the “TUNE/FOLDER/CH”

dial (for MP3/WMA audio).

– Turn off the power of the audio

equipment.

– Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position.

! How to unload CDs from the player

! Ejecting a CD from the player

Of the discs loaded, you can select and

remove only one disc.

1. Press the disc select button (15) of the

disc whose disc number indicator (12) is

ON.

2. Press the eject button (8). Then the

disc number indicator associated with the

Audio 5-17

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (182,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

5-18 Audio

disc you have selected will blink, and the

disc will be ejected. To remove more discs

in succession, repeat Steps 1 and 2. If you

press the eject button after turning OFF

the ignition switch, only one disc will be

ejected.

! Ejecting all discs from the player (All

disc ejection mode)

1. If you continue to press the eject

button (8) for more than 2 seconds, the

player will enter the all disc ejection mode.

2. Remove the disc tha t has been

ejected, the display indicates “CD ALL

EJECT” (when the ignition switch is in the

“Acc” position) and disc indicator will blink.

The other discs loaded will then be

ejected one after another. If you do not

remove the ejected disc within 15 sec-

onds, the “All disc ejection mode” will be

canceled.

NOTE

Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD

sticking out, because vibration might

make it fall out.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to insert two or more

discs into the slot at a time. Doing

so can cause mechanical damage to

the CD changer.

! Title display selection

If you briefly press the “DISP” button (16)

during playback, the indication will change

to the next one in the following sequence.

. For MP3/WMA:

. For Satellite radio:

The display mode that you selected will

not be changed until you select the display

mode again.

When you depress the “DISP” button for

more than 2 seconds, the title will be

scrolled so you can see all of it. You will

see 12 characters at a time.

. The page scroll mode will be can-

celled if you perform any of the follow-

ing steps:

– When you do not operate any

button within 10 seconds.

– Press any button to select an-

other play mode.

– Press the eject button.

– Press the disc selection button.

– Select the radio mode.

– Press the “

” or “ ” button.

– Turn off the power of the audio

equipment.

– Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position.

NOTE

When the disc has no title, the display

indicates “NO TITLE”.

! When the following messages are

displayed

If one of the following messages is

displayed while operating the CD player,

determine the cause based on the follow-

ing information. If you cannot clear those

messages, please contact your SUBARU

dealer.

! When “PUSH EJECT” is displayed

This message means that there is a

mechanical error. Depress the eject button

to unload the disc. Check the disc for

damage or deformation, and also check

that the correct disc is inserted. Do not try

to unload the disc forcibly. 8 cm/3 inch

CDs are not supported, and if inserted,

they will be immediately ejected and this

message will be displayed. If the disc

cannot be unloaded or the message

Black plate (183,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

remains displayed, please contact your

SUBARU dealer.

! When “CHECK DISC” is displayed

Press the eject button to unload the discs.

Check that the disc is not damaged or

scratched, and also check that the disc is

inserted correctly. Some CD-RW discs

may be causing this message to appear.

Check that the disc type (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch

CDs are not supported) and data format

are correct. This player can only play MP3

and WMA data formats. If the disc cannot

be unloaded or the message remains

displayed, please contact your SUBARU

dealer.

Audio 5-19

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (184,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

5-20 Audio

& Auxiliary unit and satellite radio operation

(17) AUX button

(18) Category button

(19) Scan button

(20) Satellite radio* button

(21) Category selection button

(22 Preset buttons

(23) Channel selection dial

(*: Use of satellite radio requires a tuner,

antenna and a service contract. For de-

tails, please contact your SUBARU deal-

er.)

NOTE

. For use of the In-dash CD changer,

refer to the section of “In-dash 6 CD

auto changer” in this chapter.

. Use of satellite radio requires a

tuner, antenna and a service contract.

For details, please contact your

SUBARU dealer.

. The “AUX mode” can be used when

the appropriate device is connected to

the AUX jack.

. The output sound of the portable

audio player is not loud, and the sound

via the vehicle’s speakers that are

connected to the vehicle audio set is

very quiet. If you turn up the volume of

the audio set, the volume becomes

louder. However, when you change

the audio to the radio mode or to a

CD player, the sound becomes a lot

louder. Remember to turn down the

Black plate (185,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

volume when you change between

them.

! AUX audio jack (if equipped)

The AUX (auxiliary) audio jack is located

behind the lid under the climate controls.

Push gently on the lid to open it.

! Satellite Radio mode (if equipped)

Press the “SAT” button (20) to select the

“Satellite radio mode” (when the SR-BB is

connected).

! Sirius satellite radio

Sirius satellite radio is a recent innovation

that allows the listener to experience

digital sound quality and to have a greater

variety of channels to choose from (more

than 160 channels with the relevant

subscription).

Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires a

tuner, antenna and a service contract. For

details, please contact your SUBARU

dealer or visit Sirius Satellite Radio at

www.sirius.com or call 1-888-539-SIRIUS

(7474) for more information. Sirius, the

Sirius dog logo, channel names and logos

are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio

Inc.

! Satellite radio reception

Satellite radio signals are best received in

areas with a clear view of the open sky. In

areas where there are tall buildings, trees,

tunnels or other structures that may

obstruct the signal of the satellites, there

may be signal interruptions. Other circum-

stances that may result in signal loss

include driving near a wall, steep cliff or

hill, or driving on the lower level of a multi-

tiered road or inside a parking garage.

To help reduce this condition, satellite

radio providers have installed ground-

based repeaters in heavily populated

areas. However, you may still experience

reception problems in some areas.

! Displaying satellite radio ID of tuner

When you activate satellite radio, you

should have your satellite radio tuner ID

ready because each tuner is identified by

its unique satellite radio tuner ID.

The satellite radio ID will be needed when

you activate satellite radio and receive

satellite radio customer support.

The satellite radio ID can be found on the

audio display by tuning the channel to “0”.

Turn the “TUNE/FOLDER/CH” dial (23) to

select the satellite radio channel.

! Channel selection

Turn the “TUNE/FOLDER/CH” dial (23) to

select the radio channel. Turn the tuning

dial clockwise to change the channel

upward and turn the dial counterclockwise

to change the channel downward with

each click of the dial.

! Category selection

Press the “SEEK/TRACK/CAT” button

(18) to select the category of radio

channel. Press the “

” side of the button

(18) to change the category upward and

the “

” side of the button to downward

Audio 5-21

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (186,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

5-22 Audio

with each press of the button.

! Channel preset

Presetting a channel with a preset button

(22) allows you to select that station in a

single operation. Up to six SR1, SR2 and

SR3 channels each may be preset.

Press one of the preset buttons for at

least 2 seconds to store the channel. The

number of the channel will flash once on

the display, and the unit produces a beep

sound at this time.

! Channel scan

Press the “SCAN” button (19) to change

the radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode,

the radio scans through the channel until a

station is found. The radio will stop at the

station for 5 seconds while displaying the

channel number, after which scanning will

continue until the entire channel has been

scanned from the low end to the high end.

Press the “SCAN” button (19) again to

cancel the SCAN mode and to stop on any

displayed station.

When the “SCAN” button is pressed for

automatic tuning, stations are only

scanned in an upward direction.

! Category mode

Press the “CAT” button (21) for at least 2

seconds to turn the category mode on. In

this mode, the radio operations (channel

selection, channel scan) are performed

only in the selected category. To cancel

the category mode, press the “CAT” button

(21) for at least 2 seconds again.

! Band selection

Push the “SAT” button (20) when the radio

is on to select SR1, SR2 or SR3 reception.

Each time this button is pressed, the band

will change in the following order:

! AUX mode

Press the “CD/AUX” button (17) to select

the “AUX mode” (when the AUX unit is

connected to the AUX jack).

Black plate (187,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

In-dash 6 CD auto changer (if equipped )

& Loading and unloading compact discs

(1) Disc slot

(2) Disc indicators (disc No.1 to 6)

(3) Disc select buttons (disc No.1 to 6)

(4) Eject button

(5) Disc slot indicator

Audio

5-23

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (188,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

5-24 Audio

CAUTION

. Do not attempt to insert two or

more discs into the slot at a time.

Doing so can cause mechanical

damage to the CD changer.

. Use only music CDs identified by

mark.

. Do not use CDs listed in the

following which could cause da-

mage to the CD player.

– 3 inch (8 cm) compact disc

– Any disc with a peel-off or seal

on it

– Bent disc

– Cleaning disc

– CD accessory (e.g., 3 inch (8

cm) disc adapter)

. Do not insert or remove any disc

when the automatic transmission

selector lever is in the park

position; the selector lever in that

position can interfere with disc

insertion or removal, causing

scratches on the disc surface

(for AT vehicles).

! To insert a disc

1. Press one of the disc select buttons (3)

(numbered from 1 to 6) for which the disc

indicator light (2) is “OFF”.

The disc indicator lights are located

directly above the co rrespond ing disc

select buttons.

2. The indicator will begin blinking. The

blinking will last for 15 seconds.

During this period, insert a desired disc,

and the disc will begin to play. (If any disc

is not inserted during this period, the “Disc

slot” (1) door will close. Repeat Step 1.)

Be sure to hold a disc with the label side

(the side where titles are printed) up.

3. To insert another disc, repeat Steps 1

and 2 choosing a different disc select

button.

! To insert six discs at a time

1. Press and hold the disc select button

number 1 until all disc indicators begin

blinking (approximately 1.5 seconds).

2. The indicators will blink for 15 sec-

onds. During this period, insert desired six

discs.

3. When all discs are loaded, the first

disc will begin to play. (If no disc is

inserted within this 15 seconds, the entire

disc load sequence will be canceled.)

! To remove a disc

1. Press the desired one of the disc

select buttons (3) (numbered from 1 to 6)

for which the disc indicator light is on.

2. Press the eject button (4). The se-

lected disc will be ejected and the

indicator light will begin blinking.

3. To remove another disc, repeat Steps

1 and 2 choosing a different disc select

button.

(To remove discs when the ignition switch

is in the “Lock” position, press the eject

button, and the first disc will be ejected.

Press the eject button again, and the next

disc will be ejected and so on. At this time,

the disc select buttons are disabled.)

! To remove all discs at one time

1. Press and hold the eject button (4)

until all “Disc” indicators begin blinking

(approximately 1.5 seconds), and the first

disc will be ejected.

2. When the disc is removed, the next

one will be ejected, and so on.

! To replace a playing disc with

another

Simply press the desired one of disc

select buttons (3) (numbered from 1 to 6)

or press the disc select button on the radio

unit to select the desired disc, and the disc

Black plate (189,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

will begin to play.

! Disc indicators

Lit: when the corresponding storage tray is

occupied by a disc.

Blinking: Disc player is either in loading,

eject or changing mode.

OFF: No disc is loaded or the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK” position.

! Open/Closed disc slot indicator

When the disc slot is open, the disc

indicators on both sides of the slot

illuminate.

! Function control

Refer to CD changer control operating

instructions described in the “Type A audio

set” section.

Precautions to observe when

handling a compact disc

Use only compact discs (CDs) that have

the mark shown in the following illustra-

tion.

You may also use compact discs (CD-Rs

and CD-RWs) that have the following

marks, but you may not use some discs

if they were produced using writing meth-

ods not compatible with your vehicle’s

audio system.

. You cannot use a DualDisc in the CD

player. If you insert a DualDisc into the

player, the disc may not come out again,

possibly causing the player to malfunction.

. In cold and/or rainy weather, dew can

form inside the CD player, preventing

Audio 5-25

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (190,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

5-26 Audio

normal operation. If this happens, eject

the CD and wait for the player to dry out.

. Skipping may occur when the CD

player is subjected to severe vibration

(for example, when the vehicle is driven

on a rough surface).

. To remove a disc from the case, press

the center of the case and hold both

edges of the disc. If the disc surface is

touched directly, contamination could

cause poor tone quality. Do not touch the

disc surface.

. Use a clean disc whenever possible. If

there are deposits, wipe the disc surface

from the center outward with a dry, soft

cloth. Be sure not to use a hard cloth,

thinner, benzene, alcohol, etc.

. Do not use any disc that is scratched,

deformed, or cracked. Also, do not use

any disc that has a non-standard shape

(for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions

or problems might result.

. A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never

keep it either in places exposed to direct

sunlight, near heaters or in vehicles

parked in the sun or on hot days.

Black plate (11,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Interior lights ....................................................... 6-2

Dome light .......................................................... 6-2

Cargo area light .................................................. 6-2

Map lights ............................................................ 6-3

Sun visors ........................................................... 6-3

Vanity mirror ....................................................... 6-3

Storage compartments ....................................... 6-4

Glove box ........................................................... 6-4

Center console.................................................... 6-4

Overhead console ............................................... 6-6

Dashboard storage compartment ......................... 6-6

Convenience net ................................................. 6-6

Pocket (if equipped) ............................................ 6-7

Cup holders ......................................................... 6-7

Front passenger’s cup holder .............................. 6-7

Rear passenger’s cup holder ............................... 6-8

Accessory power outlets .................................... 6-8

Use with a cigarette lighter

(Canada only, if equipped)................................ 6-10

Ashtray (Canada only, if equipped) .................. 6-11

Floor mat ............................................................ 6-12

Coat hook........................................................... 6-12

Cargo area cover (if equipped)......................... 6-13

Using the cover ................................................. 6-13

To remove the cover housing............................. 6-13

Stowage of the cover ......................................... 6-13

To install the cover housing ............................... 6-13

Shopping bag hook ........................................... 6-14

Cargo tie-down hooks ....................................... 6-14

Cargo area bars ................................................. 6-14

Under-floor storage compartment .................... 6-15

Front, left and right side storage

compartment ................................................... 6-16

Center storage compartment

(Storage bucket) .............................................. 6-16

Interior equipment

Black plate (192,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

6-2 Interior equipment

Interior lights

When leaving your vehicle, make sure the

light goes out to avoid battery discharge.

& Dome light

The dome light switch has three positions:

ON: The light stays on continuously.

DOOR (middle position): The dome light

comes on when any of the doors or the

rear gate is opened. The light remains on

for several seconds and gradually goes

out after all doors and the rear gate are

closed.

NOTE

If a door or the rear gate is left open,

the light flashes and a chime sounds

about 30 minutes later and then the

light is turned off automatically.

The light also can be turned on by use of

the keyless entry transmitter. See the

“Remote keyless entry system” section in

chapter 2 for detailed information.

OFF: The light stays off.

& Cargo area light

The cargo area light switch has three

positions:

ON: The light stays on continuously.

OFF: The light stays off.

DOOR: The light comes on only when the

rear gate is opened.

NOTE

If a door or the rear gate is left open,

the light flashes and a chime sounds

about 30 minutes later and then the

light is turned off automatically.

The light also can be turned on by use of

the keyless entry transmitter. See the

“Remote keyless entry system” section in

chapter 2 for detailed information.

Black plate (193,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Map lights

To turn on the map light, push the switch.

To turn it off, push the switch again.

When leaving the vehicle, make sure the

light is turned off to avoid battery dis-

charge.

Sun visors

To block out glare, swing down the visors.

To use the sun visor at a side window,

swing it down and move it sideways.

& Vanity mirror

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the

sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.

Interior equipment 6-3

Black plate (194,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

6-4 Interior equipment

Storage compartments

CAUTION

. Always keep the storage com-

partment closed while driving to

reduce the risk of injury in the

event of sudden stops or an

accident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain-

ers with flammable or corrosive

liquids or any other dangerous

ite ms in the storage compart-

ment.

& Glove box

1) Lock

2) Unlock

To open the glove box, pull the handle. To

close it, push the lid firmly upward.

To lock the glove box, insert the key and

turn it clockwise.

& Center console

The center console box provides a sto-

rage space. In addition, the top of the

console can be used as an armrest and as

a rear passenger’s cup holder.

To use as armrest:

1. Tip the console top forward from its

vertical position.

2. Push the armrest part of the console

top forward to the desired position while

pulling up the knob at the front end of the

Black plate (195,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

armrest and lock it in position by releasing

the knob. Adjust the position of the

armrest to suit your driving position. Make

sure the armrest is securely retained.

When you slide the armrest back to its

original position, pull the knob upward as

you do so.

To return the console top to the vertical

position, pull upward the knob at the front

end of the armrest while raising the

console top until it emits a click.

CAUTION

Do not step or sit on the armrest,

and do not place heavy objects on it.

The armrest could break, and you

could get hurt.

To use as rear passenger’s cup holder:

With the console top tipped toward the

rear seat, it can be used as a cup holder.

CAUTION

. To switch from using the console

top as an armrest to using it as a

rear passenger ’s cup holder,

raise the cons ole top to the

vertical position before tipping it

toward the rear seat. Otherwise

the console top may break.

. Do not place any object weighing

more than 4.4 lbs (2 kg) on the

table.

. Do not have hot drinks or other

objects on the table while driv-

ing. During hard braking or ne-

gotiation of a curve, they could

fall from the table and cause a

burn or other injury.

To use as storage space:

Raise the console top to the vertical

position or tip it toward the rear seat.

Then, pull up the lock button of the

console box and open the lid.

When closed, the lid can be used as a tray

for placing small items in it.

CAUTION

. Before opening the lid of the

console box, raise the console

top completely to the vertical

position or tip it toward the rear

seat. Otherwise, the lid may be

damaged and an injury may oc-

Interior equipment 6-5

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (196,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

6-6 Interior equipment

cur.

. Be careful not to trap your hands

between the console top and

console box when raising and

tipping the console top.

. When there is an object on the

console box lid, do not tip the

console top forward. Otherwise,

the console top or lid could be

damaged, and an injury could

occur.

& Overhead console

To open the console, push on the console

lid lightly and the lid will automatically

open.

CAUTION

When your vehicle is in the sun or

on a warm day, the inside of the

overhead console heats up. Avoid

storing plastic or other heat-vulner-

able or flammable articles such as a

lighter in the overhead console.

& Dashboard storage compart-

ment

To open the dashboard compartment,

push the button on the lid and the lid will

automatically open. Be sure to close the

compartment fully before driving.

CAUTION

When your vehicle is in the sun or

on a warm day, the inside of the

overhead console heats up. Avoid

storing plastic or other heat-vulner-

able or flammable articles such as a

lighter in the overhead console.

& Convenience net

A net for storing small articles is provided

at the front passenger’s foot-well.

Black plate (197,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Pocket (if equipped)

CAUTION

Do not use the pocket as an ashtray

or leave a lighted cigarette in the

pocket. This could cause a fire.

To use the pocket, push lightly on the lid

below the climate controls.

Cup holders

CAUTION

. When not in use, always keep the

cup holder stored while driving

to reduce the risk of injury in the

event of a sudden stop or an

accident.

. Do not pick up a cup from the cup

holder or put a cup in the holder

while you are driving, as this may

distract y ou and lead to an

accident.

. Take care to avoid spills. Bev-

erages, if hot, might burn you or

your passengers. Spi lled bev-

erages may also damage uphols-

tery or carpets.

& Front passenger’s cup holder

! In front door trim

The door pockets can be used to hold

beverage bottles and other items.

CAUTION

When placing a beverage in a door

pocket, make sure it is capped.

Otherwise, the beverage could spill

when opening/closing the door or

while driving and, if the beverage is

hot, it could scald you.

Interior equipment 6-7

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (198,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

6-8 Interior equipment

! In center console

A dual cup holder is built in the center

console, beside the parking brake lever.

& Rear passenger’s cup holder

There are rear passenger’s cup holders at

the back of the center console as well as

on the reverse side of the console top.

To use the rear passenger’s cup holder

located at the back of the center console,

open the lid by pulling its upper edge.

To use the rear passenger’s cup holder

located on the reverse side of the console

top, refer to “Center console” in the

“Storage compartments” part of this chap-

ter for details.

Accessory power outlets

Power outlet beside front pocket

Power outlet in center console

Black plate (199,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Power outlet in cargo area

Accessory power outlets are provided

beside the front pocket, in the center

console and in the cargo area. Electrical

power (12V DC) from the battery is

available at any of the outlets when the

ignition switch is in either the “Acc” or “ON”

position.

Youcanuseanin-vehicleelectrical

appliance by connecting it to an outlet.

The maximum power rating of an appli-

ance that can be connected varies among

outlets as shown in the following. Do not

use an appliance which exceeds the

indicated wattage for each outlet.

Outlet beside front pocket: 80W or less

Outlets in center console and cargo area:

120W or less

When using appliances connected to two

or more outlets simultaneously, the total

power consumed by them must not

exceed 120W.

CAUTION

. Do not attempt to use a cigarette

lighter in the center console and

cargo area power outlets.

. Do not place any foreign objects,

especially metal ones such as

coins or aluminum foil, into the

accessory power outlet. That

could cause a short circuit. Al-

ways put the cap on the acces-

sory power outlet when it is not

in use.

. Use only electrical appliances

which are designed for 12V DC.

The maximum power rating of an

appliance that can be connected

varies among outlets as shown in

the following. Do not use an

appliance which exceeds the in-

dicated wattage for each outlet.

Outlet beside front pocket: 80W

or less

Outlets in center console and

cargo area: 120W or less

When using appliances con-

nected to two or more outlets

simultaneously, the total power

consumed by them must not

exc eed 120W. Overloading the

accessory power outlet can

cause a short circuit. Do not use

double adapters or more than

one electrical appliance.

. If the plug on your electric appli-

ance is either too loose or too

tight for the accessory power

outlet, this can result in a poor

contact or cause the plug to get

stuck. Only use plugs that fit

properly.

. Use of an electric appliance in the

accessory power outlet for a long

period of time while the engine is

not running can cause battery

discharge.

. Before driving your vehicle, make

sure that the plug and the cord

on your electrical appliance will

not interfere with your shifting

gears and operating the accel-

erator and brake pedals. If they

do, do not use the electrical

appliance while driving.

Interior equipment 6-9

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (200,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

6-10 Interior equipment

NOTE

When the lid of the center console is

closed, an opening remains between

the center console and the lid to allow

the power outlet in the center console

to be used. Pass the electrical appli-

ance’s cord through this opening.

& Use with a cigarette lighter

(Canada only, if equipped)

To use the accessory power outlet beside

the front pocket as a cigarette lighter

socket, purchase the cigarette lighter plug,

which is an optional accessory.

A cigarette lighter plug is available from

your SUBARU dealer.

The cigarette lighter operates only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” and “Acc”

positions.

To use the cigarette lighter, push in the

knob and wait a few moments. It will

automatically spring up when ready for

use.

WARNING

To avoid being burned, never grasp

the lighter by the end with the

heating element. Doing so could

result in injury and could also

damage the heating element.

CAUTION

. Do not hold the lighter pushed in,

because it will overheat.

. The electrical power socket lo-

cated on the lower part of the

instrument panel is originally de-

signed to use a genuine SUBARU

cigarette lighter plug. Do not use

non-genuine cigarette lighter

plugs in the socket. Doing so

may cause a shor t-circuit and

overheating, resulting in a fire.

. If the socket is ever used for a

plug-in accessory such as a cell

phone, that may damage the

portion of the socket’s internal

mechanism that causes a cigar-

ette lighter plug to “pop out”

after its lighter element is heated.

Therefore, do not place a cigar-

ette lighter plug in a socket that

has been used, even once, to

Black plate (201,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

power a plug-in accessory. Doing

so may cause the plug to stick

and overheat, creating a potential

fire hazard.

Ashtray (Canada onl y, if

equipped)

CAUTION

Do not use ashtrays as waste re-

ceptacles or leave a lighted cigarette

in an ashtray. This could cause a

fire.

It is possible to install on ashtray, which is

an optional accessory, in the front pocket.

The ashtray is available from your

SUBARU dealer.

To open the ashtray, push lightly on the lid

below the climate controls.

Fully close the lid after using it to help

reduce residual smoke.

To remove the ashtray for cleaning, hold

the right and left sides of the ashtray and

pull it out.

NOTE

Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-

mulate around the hinges of the ash-

tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a

toothbrush or other narrow-ended im-

plement.

Interior equipment 6-11

Black plate (202,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

6-12 Interior equipment

Floor mat

A retaining pin is located on the driver’s

side of the vehicle next to the fuel filler

door release.

The floor mat is secured using the built-in

grommet, by placing the grommet over the

pin and pushing downward.

CAUTION

Make sure the driver’s floor mat is

placed back in its proper location

and correctly secured on its retain-

ing pin. Also, do not use more than

one floor mat. If the floor mat slips

forward and interferes with the

movement of the pedals during

driving, it could cause an accident.

Coat hook

The coat hook is attached to the rear left

passenger’s hand grip.

CAUTION

Never hang anything on the coat

hook that might obstruct the driver’s

view or that could cause injury in

sudden stops or in a collision. And

do not hang items on the coat hook

that weigh 2.2 lbs (1 kg) or more.

Black plate (203,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Cargo area cover (if

equipped)

The cargo area cover is provided for

covering the cargo area and to protect its

contents from direct sunlight. This cover is

detachable to make room for additional

cargo.

& Using the cover

To extend the cover, pull the end of the

cover out of the housing, then insert its

hooks into the catches as shown. To

rewind it, unhook it from the catches and

it will rewind automatically. You should

hold on to the cover and guide it back into

the cover housing while it is rewinding.

WARNING

Do not place anything on the ex-

tended cover. Putting excessive

weight on the extended cover can

break it and an object on the cover

could tumble forward in the event of

a s udden stop or collision. This

could cause serious injury.

& To remove the cover housing

1. Rewind the cover.

2. To take the cover housing off the

retainer, lift it out.

3. Store the cover housing in the cargo

area.

& Stowage of the cover

On models having a temporary spare tire,

the cargo area cover can be stowed under

the cargo floor.

& To install the cover housing

To install the cover, insert both ends of the

cover housing into the retainers.

Interior equipment 6-13

Black plate (204,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

6-14 Interior equipment

Shopping bag hook

CAUTION

Do not hang items on the shopping

bag hook that weigh 6.6 lbs (3 kg) or

more.

In the cargo area, there are two retract-

able shopping bag hooks (one on each

side) and four non-retractable shopping

bag hooks (two on each side).

To use either of the retractable hooks, pull

the lower portion out.

Cargo tie-down hooks

CAUTION

The cargo tie-down hooks are de-

signed only for securing light cargo.

Never try to secure cargo that

exceeds the capacity of the hooks.

The maximum load capacity is 44

lbs (20 kg) per a hook.

The cargo area is equipped with four tie-

down hooks so that cargo can be secured

with a cargo net or ropes.

When using the hooks, raise them. When

not in use, lower the hooks.

Cargo area bars

CAUTION

Do not place objects with a total

weight exceeding 6.6 lbs (3 kg) on a

net attached to the cargo area bars.

1) Cargo area bar

In the cargo area, there are two bars (one

on each side) to which a net can be

attached.

Black plate (205,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Under-floor storage compart-

ment

CAUTION

. Always keep the lids closed while

driving to reduce the risk of

injury in the event of sudden stop

or an accident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain-

ers with flammable or corrosive

liquids or any other dangerous

ite ms in the storage compart-

ment.

There are five trays in the storage

compartment underneath the floor of the

cargo area. They can be used to store

small items.

Interior equipment 6-15

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (206,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

6-16 Interior equipment

& Front, left and right side storage compartment

To open the lid, raise the cargo tie-down hooks and pull the tab up. The jack and jack

handle are stored in the left side storage compartment.

& Center storage compartment

(Storage bucket)

To open the lid, pull the handle up.

Canada-spec. non-turbo models:

The storage bucket is put on the spare

tire.

Except Canada-spec. non-turbo mod-

els:

Storage tray is placed on the spare tire.

Black plate (207,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

NOTE

When storing a flat tire, put the storage

tray in the luggage compartment (ex-

cept Canada-spec. non-turbo models).

Interior equipment 6-17

Black plate (2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2006/ 1/ 17

Left Page

————————————————————————————————————————

Black plate (13,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Fuel ...................................................................... 7-2

Fuel requirements ............................................... 7-2

Fuel filler lid and cap........................................... 7-3

State emission testing (U.S. only)...................... 7-6

Preparing to drive ............................................... 7-7

Starting the engine.............................................. 7-7

Manual transmission vehicle................................ 7-7

Automatic transmission vehicle ........................... 7-8

Stopping the engine............................................ 7-9

Manual transmission........................................... 7-9

Shifting speeds .................................................. 7-10

Driving tips ........................................................ 7-10

Automatic transmission..................................... 7-11

Selector lever for automatic transmission ........... 7-12

Shift lock release ............................................... 7-14

Rear viscous limited slip differential (LSD)

(if equipped) .................................................... 7-15

Power steering ................................................... 7-15

Braking................................................................ 7-16

Braking tips ....................................................... 7-16

Brake system ..................................................... 7-16

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators.............. 7-16

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).......................... 7-17

ABS system self-check ...................................... 7-17

ABS warning light.............................................. 7-17

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

system ............................................................. 7-18

Steps to take if EBD system fails ....................... 7-19

Vehicle Dynamics Control system

(if equipped) .................................................... 7-20

Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor.......... 7-21

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch ................ 7-23

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

(if equipped) .................................................... 7-24

Parking your vehicle ......................................... 7-25

Parking brake .................................................... 7-26

Parking tips ....................................................... 7-26

Hill holder

(Manual transmission – if equipped)............. 7-27

Cruise control .................................................... 7-28

To set cruise control .......................................... 7-28

To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-29

To turn off the cruise control.............................. 7-29

To change the cruising speed ............................ 7-29

Self-leveling rear suspension (if equipped) ..... 7-31

Starting and operating

Black plate (210,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

7-2 Starting and operating

Fuel

CAUTION

Use of a fuel which is low in quality

or use of an inappropriate fuel

additive may cause engine damage.

& Fuel requirements

! Non-turbo models

The 2.5-liter non-turbo engine is designed

to operate using unleaded gasoline with

an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher.

! Turbo models

The 2.5-liter turbo engine is designed to

operate using premium unleaded gasoline

with an octane rating of 91 AKI or higher. If

premium unleaded gasoline is not avail-

able, regular unleaded gasoline with an

octane rating of 87 AKI or higher may be

temporarily used. For optimum engine

performance and driveability, it is required

that you use premium grade unleaded

gasoline.

NOTE

Be sure to use premium unleaded

gasoline of 91 AKI or higher for turbo

models. If other gasoline (lower than 91

AKI) is used, knocking, reduced output

and poor accelerator response will

result.

! Fuel octane rating

This octane rating is the average of the

Research Octane and Motor Octane

numbers and is commonly referred to as

the Anti Knock Index (AKI).

Using a gasoline with a lower octane

rating can cause persistent and heavy

knocking, which can damage the engine.

Do not be concerned if your vehicle

sometimes knocks lightly when you drive

up a hill or when you accelerate. See your

dealer or a qualified service technician if

you use a fuel with the specified octane

rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or

persistently.

! Unleaded gasoline

The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed

to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler

nozzle. Under no circumstances should

leaded gasoline be used because it will

damage the emission control system and

may impair driveability and fuel economy.

! Gasoline for California-certified

LEV

Your vehicle was certified to California’s

low emission vehicle (LEV) standards as

indicated on the underhood tune-up label,

it is designed to opt imize engine and

emission performance with gasoline that

meets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali-

fornia gasoline specifications. If you live in

any other state than California, your

vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting

Federal specifications. Gasoline sold out-

side California is permitted to have higher

sulfur levels, which may affect the perfor-

mance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter

and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or

smell. SUBARU recommends that you try

a different brand of unleaded gasoline

having lower sulfur to determine if the

problem is fuel related before returning

your vehicle to an authorized dealer for

service.

! MMT

Some gasoline contains an octane-en-

hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-

clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If

you use such fuels, your emission control

system performance may deteriorate and

the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-

function indicator lamp may turn on. If this

happens, return to your authorized

SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is

determined that the condition is caused

by the type of fuel used, repairs may not

be covered by your warranty.

Black plate (211,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

! Gasoline for cleaner air

CAUTION

Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels con-

taining alcohol may cause paint

damage, which is not covered under

the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

Your u se of gasoline with detergent

additives will help prevent deposits from

forming in your engine and fuel system.

This helps keep your engine in tune and

your emission control system working

properly, and is a way of doing your part

for cleaner air. If you continuously use a

high quality fuel with the proper detergent

and other additives, you should never

need to add any fuel system cleaning

agents to your fuel tank.

Many gasolines are now blended with

materials called oxygenates. Use of these

fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.

Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE

(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol

(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in

your vehicle, but should contain no more

than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the

proper operation of your SUBARU.

In addition, some gasoline suppliers are

now producing reformulated gasolines,

which are designed to reduce vehicle

emissions. SUBARU approves the use of

reformulated gasoline.

If you are not sure what the fuel contains,

you should ask your service station

operators if their gasolines contain deter-

gents and oxygenates and if they have

been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-

sions.

As additional guidance, only use fuels

suited for your vehicle as explained in the

following.

. Fuel should be unleaded and have an

octane rating no lower than that specified

in this manual.

. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is

sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.

Methanol can be used in your vehicle

ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel

mixture AND if it is accompanied by

sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-

vents and corrosion inhibitors required to

prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not

use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT

under these conditions.

. If undesirable driveability problems are

experienced and you suspect they may be

fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-

line before seeking servi ce at your

SUBARU dealer.

. Fuel system damage or driveability

problems which result from the use of

improper fuel are not covered under the

SUBARU Limited Warranty.

& Fuel filler lid and cap

! Refueling

Only one person should be involved in

refueling. Do not allow others to approach

the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler

pipe while refueling is in progress.

Be sure to observe any other precautions

that are posted at the service station.

Starting and operating 7-3

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (212,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

7-4 Starting and operating

1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid

release lever. The lever is on the floor at

the left of the driver’s seat.

WARNING

Before opening the fuel filler cap,

first touch the vehicle body or a

metal portion of the fuel pump or

similar object to discharge any

static electricity that may be present

on your body. If your body is carry-

ing an electrostatic charge, there is

a possibility that an electric spark

could ignite the fuel, which could

burn you. To avoid acquiring a new

static electric charge, do not get

back into the vehicle while refueling

is in progress.

1) Open

2) Close

2. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it

slowly counterclockwise.

WARNING

. Gasoline vapor is highly flam-

mable. Before refueling, always

first stop the engine and close all

vehicle doors and windows.

Make sure that there are no

lighted cigarettes, open flames

or electrical sparks in the adja-

cent area. Refueling must be

performed outside. Quickly wipe

up any spilled fuel.

. When opening the cap, grasp it

firmly and turn it slowly to the

left. Do not remove the cap

quickly. Fuel may be under pres-

sure and spray out of the fuel

filler neck, especially in hot

weather. If you hear a hissing

sound while you are removing

the cap, wait for the sound to

stop and then slowly open the

cap to prevent fuel from spraying

out and creating a fire hazard.

. When refueling, insert the fuel

nozzle securely into the fuel filler

pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not

fully inserted, its automatic stop-

ping mechanism may not func-

tion, causing fuel to overflow the

tank and creating a fire hazard.

. Stop refueling when the auto-

mati c stop mechanism on the

fuel nozzle activates. If you con-

tinue to add fue l, temperature

changes or other conditions

may cause fuel to overflow from

the tank and create a fire hazard.

3. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler

pump automatically stops. Do not add any

more fuel.

Black plate (213,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 30

CAUTION

Make sure that the cap is tightened

until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage

in the event of an accident.

4. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise

until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain

not to catch the tether under the cap while

tightening.

5. Close the fuel filler lid completely.

If you spill any fuel on the painted surface,

rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the

painted surface could be damaged.

NOTE

. You will see the “ ” sign in the

fuel gauge. This indicates that the fuel

filler door (lid) is located on the right

side of the vehicle.

. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened

until it clicks or if the tether is caught

under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE

warning light may come on. Refer to

the “ Warning and indicator lights”

section located in chapter 3.

Immediately refuel in the tank when-

ever the low fuel warning light comes

on. Engine misfires as a result of an

empty tank could cause damage to the

engine.

CAUTION

. Never add any cleaning agents to

the fuel tank. The addition of a

cleaning agent may cause da-

mage to the fuel system.

. After refueling, turn the cap to the

right until it clicks to ensure that

it is fully tightened. If the cap is

not securely tightened, fuel may

leak out while the vehicle is being

driven or fuel spillage could

occur in the event of an accident,

creating a fire hazard.

. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Because

fuel may damage the paint, be

sure to wipe off any spilled fuel

quickly. Paint damage caused by

spilled fuel is not covered under

the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

. Always use a genuine SUBARU

fuel filler cap. If you use the

wrong cap, it may not fit, and

your fuel tank and emission con-

trol system may be damaged. It

could also lead to fuel spillage

and a fire.

. Immediately put fuel in the tank

whenever the low fuel warning

light illuminates. Engine misfires

as a result of an empty tank

could cause damage to the en-

gine.

Starting and operating 7-5

Black plate (214,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

7-6 Starting and operating

State emission testing (U.S.

only)

WARNING

Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle

must NEVER be performed on a

single two-wheel dynamometer. At-

tempting to do so will result in

uncontrolled vehicle movement and

may cause an accident or injuries to

persons nearby.

CAUTION

Resultant ve hicle damage due to

improper testing is not covered

under the SUBARU Limited War-

ranty and is the responsibility of

the state inspection program or its

contractors or licensees.

At state inspection time, remember to

tell your inspection or service station in

advance not to place your SUBARU

AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-

ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-

sion damage will result.

Some states have started using dynam-

ometers in their state inspection programs

in order to meet their obligation under

federal law to implement stricter vehicle

emission standards to reduce air pollution

from cars. A dynamometer is a treadmill or

roller-like testing device that allows your

vehicle’s wheels to turn while the vehicle

remains in one place. Depending on the

severity of a state’s air pollution problems,

the states must adopt either a “basic” or

“enhanced” vehicle emission inspection

test. Normally, a portion of the basic

emission test consists of an emission

inspector inserting an analyzer probe into

the exhaust pipe of an idling vehicle for a

short period of time. States with more

severe air pollution problems are required

to adopt an enhanced vehicle emission

test. This test simulates actual driving

conditions on a dynamometer and permits

more accurate measurement of tailpipe

emitted pollution than the basic emission

test.

The U.S. Environmental Protection

Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel

dynamometers in their emission testing

programs have EXEMPTED SUBARU

AWD vehicles from the portion of the

testing program that involves a two-wheel

dynamometer.

There are some states that use four-wheel

dynamometers in their testing programs.

When properly used, that equipment will

not damage an AWD SUBARU vehicle.

Under no circumstances should the rear

wheels be jacked off the ground, nor

should the driveshaft be disconnected for

state emission testing.

The EPA has issued regula tions for

inspecting the On-Board Diagnostic

(OBD) system as part of the state emis-

sions inspection. The OBD system is

designed to detect engine and transmis-

sion problems that might cause vehicle

emissions to exceed allowable limits.

These inspections apply to all 1996 model

year and newer passenger cars and light

trucks. Over 30 states plus the District of

Columbia have implemented the OBD

system inspection.

. The inspection of the OBD system

consists of a visual operational check of

the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/

malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and an

examination of the OBD system with an

electronic scan tool while the engine is

running

. Avehicle

passes the OBD system

inspection if proper the “CHECK EN-

GINE” warning light/MIL illumination is

observed, there is no stored diagnostic

trouble codes, and the OBD system

readiness monitors are complete.

Black plate (215,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

. A vehicle fails the OBD inspection if the

“CHECK ENGINE” warning light/MIL is

not properly operating or there is one or

more diagnostic trouble codes stored in

vehicle’s computer with the “CHECK

ENGINE” warning light/MIL illuminated.

. A state emission inspection may reject

(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of

OBD system readiness monitors “Not

Ready” is greater than one. Under this

condition, the vehicle operator should be

instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few

days to set the monitors and return for an

emission re-inspection.

. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles

should contact their SUBARU Dealer for

service.

Preparing to drive

You should perform the following checks

and adjustments every day before you

start driving.

1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and

lights are clean and unobstructed.

2. Check the appearance and condition

of the tires. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of

leaks.

4. Check that the hood and rear gate are

fully closed.

5. Check the adjustment of the seat.

6. Check the adjustment of the inside

and outside mirrors.

7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your

passengers have fastened their seatbelts.

8. Check the operation of the warning

and indicator lights when the igni tion

switch is turned to the “ON” position.

9. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-

ing lights after starting the engine.

NOTE

Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid,

washer fluid and other fluid levels

should be checked daily, weekly or at

fuel stops.

Starting the engine

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter motor

continuously for more than 10 sec-

onds. If the engine fails to start after

operating the starter for 5 to 10

seconds, wait for 10 seconds or

more before trying again.

& Manual transmission vehicle

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-

cessories.

3. Press the clutch pedal to the floor and

shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold the

clutch pedal to the floor while starting the

engine.

The starter motor will only operate when

the clutch pedal is pressed fully to the

floor.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and check the operation of the

warning and indicator lights. Refer to the

“Warning and indicator lights” section

(chapter 3).

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the accelera-

tor pedal. Release the key immediately

Starting and operating 7-7

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (216,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

7-8 Starting and operating

after the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, try the

following.

(1) Turn the igniti on switch to the

“LOCK” position and wait for at least

10 seconds. After checking that the

parking brake is firmly set, turn the

ignition switch to the “START” position

while depressing the accelerator pedal

slightly (about a quarter of the full

stroke). Release the accelerator pedal

as soon as the engine starts.

(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”

position and wait for at least 10

seconds. Then fully depress the accel-

erator pedal and turn the ignition

switch to the “START” position. If the

engine starts, quickly relea se the

accelerator pedal.

(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”

position. After waiting for 10 seconds

or longer, turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position without depressing

the accelerator pedal.

(4) If the engine still refuses to start,

contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator

lights have gone off after the engine has

started. The fuel injection system auto-

matically lowers the idle speed as the

engine warms up.

NOTE

The engine may be difficult to start

when the battery has been discon-

nected and reconnected (for mainte-

nance or other purposes). This diffi-

culty is caused by the electronically

controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis

function. To overcome it, keep the

ignition switch in the “ON” position

for approximately 10 seconds before

starting the engine.

& Automatic transmission ve-

hicle

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-

cessories.

3. Shift the selector lever to the “P” or “N”

position (preferably “P” position).

The starter motor will only operate when

the select lever is at the “P” or “N” position.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and check the operation of the

warning and indicator lights. Refer to the

“Warning and indicator lights” section

(chapter 3).

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the accelera-

tor pedal. Release the key immediately

after the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, try the

following.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position and wait for at least

10 seconds. After checking that the

parking brake is firmly set, turn the

ignition switch to the “START” position

while depressing the accelerator pedal

slightly (about a quarter of the full

stroke). Release the accelerator pedal

as soon as the engine starts.

(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”

position and wait for at least 10

seconds. Then fully depress the accel-

erator pedal and turn the ignition

switch to the “START” position. If the

engine starts, quickly release the

accelerator pedal.

(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”

position. After waiting for 10 seconds

or longer, turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position without depressing

the accelerator pedal.

(4) If the engine still refuses to start,

contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator

Black plate (217,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

lights have gone out after the engine has

started. The fuel injection system auto-

matically lowers the idle speed as the

engine warms up.

While the engine is warming up, make

sure that the selector lever is at the “P” or

“N” position and that the parking brake is

applied.

CAUTION

If you restart the engine while the

vehicle is moving, shift the selector

lever into the “N” position. Do not

attempt to place the selector lever of

a moving vehicle into the “P” posi-

tion.

NOTE

The engine may be difficult to start

when the battery has been discon-

nected and reconnected (for mainte-

nance or other purposes). This diffi-

culty is caused by the electronically

controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis

function. To overcome it, keep the

ignition switch in the “ON” position

for approximately 10 seconds before

starting the engine.

Stopping the engine

WARNING

Do not stop the engine when the

vehicle is moving. This will cause

loss of power to the power steering

and the brake booster, making steer-

ing and braking more difficult. It

could also result in accidental acti-

vation of the “LOCK” position on the

ignition switch, causing the steering

wheel to lock.

The ignition switch should be turned off

only when the vehicle is stopped and the

engine is idling.

Manual transmission

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with the

clutch disengaged (i.e., when the

clutch pedal is depressed) or with

the shift lever in the neutral position.

Engine braking has no effect in

either of these conditions and the

risk of an accident is consequently

increased.

CAUTION

Shift into reverse ONLY when the

vehicle has completely stopped. It

may cause damage to the transmis-

sion to try shifting into reverse when

the vehicle is moving.

The manual transmission is a fully syn-

chromeshed, 5-forward-speed and 1-re-

verse-speed transmission.

Starting and operating 7-9

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (218,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 30

7-10 Starting and operating

The shift pattern is shown on the shift

lever knob. When shifting from 5th gear to

reverse gear, first return the shift lever to

the neutral position then shift into reverse

gear.

To change gears, fully depress the clutch

pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually

let up on the clutch pedal.

If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the

transmission in neutral, release the clutch

pedal momentarily, and then try again.

NOTE (non-turbo models only)

To protect the engine while the shift

lever is in neutral, the engine is con-

trolled so that the engine speed does

not become too high even if the accel-

erator pedal is fully depressed.

& Shifting speeds

! Recommended shifting speeds

The best compromise between fuel econ-

omy and vehicle performance during

normal driving is ensured by shifting up

at the speeds listed in the following table.

Shift up mph (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 35 (57)

4th to 5th

45 (73)

! Maximum allowable speeds

WARNING

When shifting down a gear, ensure

that the vehicle is not traveling at a

speed exceeding the Maximum Al-

lowable Speed for the gear which is

about to be selected. Failure to

observe this precaution can lead to

engine over-revving and this in turn

can result in engine damage.

In addition, sudden application of

engine brakes when the vehicle is

travelling on a slippery surface can

lead to wheel locking; as a conse-

quence, control of the vehicle may

be lost and the risk of an accident

increased.

The following table shows the maximum

speeds that are possible with each differ-

ent gear.

Never exceed the speed limit below for

each gear position except for brief accel-

eration in an emergency. The tach-

ometer’s needle will enter the red area if

these speeds are exceeded. Failure to

observe this precaution can lead to

excessive engine wear and poor fuel

economy.

mph (km/h)

Non-turbo

models

Turbo models

1st 30 (49) 28 (46)

2nd 51 (82) 52 (83)

3rd 73 (117)

73 (118)

& Driving tips

Do not drive with your foot resting on the

clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to

hold your vehicle at a standstill on an

upgrade. Either of those actions may

cause clutch damage.

Do not drive with your hand resting on the

shift lever. This may cause wear on the

transmission components.

Black plate (219,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

When it is necessary to reduce vehicle

speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,

or driving up steep hills, downshift to a

lower gear before the engine starts to

labor.

On steep downgrades, downshift the

transmission to 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear as

necessary; this helps to maintain a safe

speed and to extend brake pad life.

In this way, the engine provides a braking

effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)

the brakes while descending a hill, they

may overheat and not work properly.

Automatic transmission

The automatic transmission is electroni-

cally controlled and provides 4 forward

speeds and 1 reverse speed.

WARNING

Do not shift from the “P” or “N”

position into the “D”, “3”, “2”, “1” or

“R” position while depressing the

accelerator pedal. This may cause

the vehicle to jump forward or back-

ward.

CAUTION

. Shift into the “P” or “R” position

only after the vehicle is comple-

tely stopped. Shifting while the

vehicle is moving may cause

damage to the transmission.

. Do not race the engine for more

than 5 seconds in any position

except the “N” or “P” position

when the brake is set or when

chocks are used in the wheels.

This may cause the automatic

transmission fluid to overheat.

. Avoid shifting from one of the

forward driving positions into the

“R” position or vice versa until

the vehicle has completely

stopped. Such shifting may

cause damage to the transmis-

sion.

. When parking the vehicle, first

securely apply the parking brake

and then place the selector lever

in the “P” position.

NOTE

. When the engine coolant tempera-

ture is still low, your vehicle’s auto-

matic transmission will up-shift at high-

er engine speeds than when the cool-

ant temperature is sufficiently high in

order to shorten the warm-up time and

improve driveability. The gearshift tim-

ing will automatically shift to the nor-

mal timing after the engine has warmed

up.

. Immediately after ATF (automatic

transmission fluid) is replaced, you

may feel that the automatic transmis-

sion operation is somewhat unusual.

This results from invalidation of data

the on-board computer has collected

and stored in memory to allow the

transmission to shift at the most appro-

priate times for the current condition of

your vehicle. Optimized shifting will be

Starting and operating 7-11

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (220,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 30

7-12 Starting and operating

restored as the vehicle continues to be

driven for a while.

NOTE (non-turbo models only)

To protect the engine while the “P” or

“N” position is selected, the engine is

controlled so that the engine speed

does not become too high even if the

accelerator pedal is fully depressed.

& Selector lever for automatic

transmission

: With the brake pedal depressed, move

the lever along the gate.

: Move the lever along the gate.

The selector lever has seven positions.

! P (Park)

This position is for parking the vehicle and

starting the engine.

In this position, the transmission is me-

chanically locked to prevent the vehicle

from rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first set the

parking brake fully, then shift into the “ P”

position. Do not hold the vehicle with only

the transmission.

A shift interlock function is employed in the

automatic transmission system to ensure

safe starting of the vehicle.

To shift the selector lever from the “P” to

the any other position, you have to

depress the brake pedal fully when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position. This

prevents the vehicle from lurching when it

is started.

If the shift lever does not move from the

“P” position with the brake pedal de-

pressed, refer to the “Shift lock release”

section in this chapter.

! R (Reverse)

This position is for backing the vehicle.

To shift from the “N” to “R” position, first

stop the vehicle completely then move the

lever to the “R” position.

! N (Neutral)

This position is for restarting a stalled

engine.

In this position the wheels and transmis-

sion are not locked. In this position, the

transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll

freely, even on the slightest incline unless

the parking brake or foot brake is on.

Avoidcoastingwiththetransmission

neutral.

During coasting, there is no engine brak-

ing effect.

Black plate (221,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

NOTE

If you stop the engine with the selector

lever in the “N” position, move the

selector lever to the “P” position

immediately. Otherwise, you may find

that the selector lever soon cannot be

moved to the “P” position. If you find

that the selector lever cannot be moved

from the “N” position to the “P” posi-

tion, turn the ignition switch to the

“ON” position and try again.

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with the

selector lever in the “N” (neutral)

position. Engine braking has no

effect in this condition and the risk

of an accident is consequently in-

creased.

! D (Drive)

This position is for normal driving.

The transmission automatically shifts into

a suitable gear from 1st to 4th according to

the vehicle speed and the acceleration

you require.

When more acceleration is required in this

position, press the accelerator pedal fully

to the floor and hold that position. The

transmission will automatically downshift

to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release

the pedal, the transmission will return to

the original gear position.

! While climbing a grade

When driving up hill, undesired upshift to

4th gear is prevented from taking place

when the accelerator pedal is released.

This minimizes the chances of subse-

quent downshifting to a lower gear when

accelerating again. This preven ts re-

peated upshifting and downshifting result-

ing in a smoother operation of the vehicle.

NOTE

The transmission may downshift to 2nd

or 1st gear, depending on the way the

accelerator pedal is pressed to accel-

erate the vehicle again.

! While going down a hill

When descending a steep hill, depressing

the brake pedal will cause the transmis-

sion to downshift to 3rd gear, thus apply-

ing engine braking. Reacceleration for a

short time will cause the transmission to

upshift normally.

NOTE

In some cases, depressing the brake

pedal on a downhill grade does not

result in an automatic downshift to 3rd

gear. This can happen when the auto-

matic transmission fluid temperature is

very low, for example, during driving

shortly after the vehicle has been

parked for an extended period of time.

When the ATF temperature has risen to

a certain level, a utomati c dow nshift

normally takes place. In the meantime,

downshift manually for engine braking

as required.

Also, downshifting when braking

downhill will not occur at speeds above

approximately 48 mph (78 km/h).

! 3 (Third)

This position is for using engine braking

when going down a hill or for climbing a

grade.

The transmission automatically shifts into

a suitable gear from 1st to 3rd according

to the vehicle speed and the acceleration

you require.

When more acceleration is required in this

position, press the accelerator pedal fully

to the floor and hold that position. The

transmission will automatically downshift

to 2nd or 1st gear. When you release the

pedal, the transmission will return to the

original gear position.

! 2 (Second)

This position is for using engine braking

when going down a hill or for climbing a

Starting and operating 7-13

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (222,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

7-14 Starting and operating

steep grade.

In this position, the transmission holds in

the 2nd gear.

Use this position when starting off from a

standstill on slippery road surfaces such

as mud or snow. It will ensure greater

traction.

! 1 (First)

This position is for driving up or down very

steep grades, or driving through mud or

sand, or on slippery surfaces. In this

position, the transmission holds in the

1st gear.

! Maximum speeds

WARNING

When shifting down a gear, ensure

that the vehicle is not travelling at a

speed exceeding the Maximum Al-

lowable Speed for the gear which is

about to be sele cted. Failure to

observe this precaution can lead to

engine over-revving and this in turn

can result in engine damage.

In addition, sudden application of

engine brakes when the vehicle is

travelling on a slippery surface can

lead to wheel locking; as a conse-

quence, control of the vehicle may

be lost and the risk of an accident

increased.

The following tables show the maximum

speeds that are possible with each differ-

ent gear.

When shifting down a gear, it is important

to confirm that the current vehicle speed is

not in excess of the Maximum Allowable

Speed of the gear which is about to be

selected.

mph (km/h)

Non-turbo

models

Turbo models

1st 28 (45) 23 (37)

2nd 63 (100) 65 (104)

3rd 98 (156)

104 (167)

NOTE

In order to prevent over-revving during

deceleration of the vehicle, the trans-

mission will remain in the current gear

if the speed of the vehicle is in excess

of the Maximum Allowable Speed for

the gear to which the selector lever has

been moved.

! Driving tips

. Always apply the foot or parking brake

when the vehicle is stopped in the “D”, “3”,

“2”, “1” or “R” position.

. Always set the parking brake when

parking your vehicle. Do not hold the

vehicle with only the transmission.

. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary

position on an uphill grade by using the

“D”, “3”, “2”,or“1” position. Use the brake

instead.

& Shift lock release

If the selector lever does not move from

the “P” position with the brake pedal

depressed and the ignition switch in the

“ON” position, perform the following steps:

To override the shift lock:

1. Set the parking brake and stop the

engine.

2. Take out the screwdriver.

3. Remove the cover by prying on the

edge with the screwdriver.

Black plate (223,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

4. Insert the screwdriver into the hole.

5. Push down on the screwdriver and

move the selector lever from the “P” to the

“N” position.

6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole.

Depress the brake pedal and start the

engine.

Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU

dealer immediately to have the system

repaired.

Rear viscous limited slip dif-

ferential (LSD) (if equipped)

CAUTION

. Never start the engine while a tire

on one side is jacked up, as the

vehicle may move.

. If one rear tire is spinning in mud,

avoid continued spinning at high

speed as this could adversely

affect the LSD.

. If a different size rear tire is

temporarily used (as in an emer-

gency), it will adversely affect the

LSD. Always replace it wit h a

regularsizetireassoonas

possible.

The LSD provides optimum distribution of

power according to the difference in

revolutions between the right and left rear

wheels that may be caused by certain

driving conditions, thereby improving driv-

ing stability on snow-covered, muddy or

other slippery roads.

Power steering

CAUTION

Do not hold the steering wheel at the

fully locked position left or right for

more than 5 seconds. This may

damage the power steering pump.

The power steering system operates only

when the engine is running.

If you lose power steering assist because

the engine stops or the system fails to

function, you can steer but it will take

much more effort.

NOTE

Right after the engine has been started

and before it has warmed up, you may

hear a noise coming from areas adja-

cent to the power steering pump which

is located at the right-front area of the

engine compartment. This noise is

normal. It does not indicate power

steering system trouble.

Starting and operating 7-15

Black plate (224,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

7-16 Starting and operating

Braking

& Braking tips

WARNING

Never rest your foot on the brake

pedal while driving. This can cause

dangerous overheating of the

brakes and needless wear on the

brake pads and linings.

! When the brakes get wet

When driving in rain or after washing the

vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a

result, brake stopping distance will be

longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle

at a safe speed while lightly depressing

the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.

! Use of engine braking

Remember to make use of engine braking

in addition to foot braking. When descend-

ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,

the brakes may start working improperly

because of brake fluid overheating,

caused by overheated brake pads. To

help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to

get stronger engine braking.

! Braking when a tire is punctured

Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly

when a tire is punctured. This could cause

a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep

driving straight ahead while gradually

reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the

road to a safe place.

& Brake system

! Two separate circuits

Your vehicle has two separate circuit

brake systems. Each circuit works diag-

onally across the vehicle. If one circuit of

the brake system should fail, the other half

of the system still works. If one circuit fails,

the brake pedal will go down much closer

to the floor than usual and you will need to

press it down much harder. And a much

longer distance will be needed to stop the

vehicle.

! Brake booster

The brake booster uses engine manifold

vacuum to assist braking force. Do not

turn off the engine while driving because

that will turn off the brake booster, result-

ing in poor braking power.

The brakes will continue to work even

when the brake booster completely stops

functioning. If this happens, however, you

will have to push the pedal much harder

than normal and the braking distance will

increase.

& Disc brake pad wear warning

indicators

The disc brake pad wear warning indica-

tors on the disc brakes give a warning

noise when the brake pads are worn.

If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard

from the disc brakes while braking, im-

mediately have your vehicle checked by

your SUBARU dealer.

Black plate (225,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-

tem)

WARNING

Alwaysusetheutmostcarein

driving – overconfidence because

youaredrivingwithanABS

equipped vehicle could easily lead

to a serious accident.

CAUTION

. The ABS system does not always

decrease stopping distance. You

should always maintain a safe

following distance from other

vehicles.

. When driving on badly surfaced

roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or

over deep newly fallen snow,

stopping distances may be long-

er for a vehicle with the ABS

system than one without. When

driving under these conditions,

therefore, reduce your speed and

leave ample distance from other

vehicles.

. When you feel the ABS system

operating, you should maintain

constant brake pedal pressure.

Do not pump the brake pedal

since doing so may defeat the

operation of the ABS system.

The ABS system prevents the lock-up of

wheels which may occur during sudden

braking or braking on slippery road sur-

faces. This helps prevent the loss of

steering control and directional stability

caused by wheel lock-up.

When the ABS system is operating, you

may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight

vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal

when the ABS operates.

The ABS system will not operate when the

vehicle speed is below approximately 6

mph (10 km/h).

& ABS system self-check

You may feel a slight shock in the brake

pedal and hear the operating sound of

ABS from the engine compartment just

after the vehicle is started. This is caused

by an automatic functional test of the ABS

system being carried out and does not

indicate any abnormal condition.

& ABS warning light

1) U.S.-spec. models

2) Canada-spec. models

The ABS warning light comes on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position and goes out after approximately

2 seconds.

This is an indication that the ABS system

is working properly.

When driving with an insufficient battery

voltage such as when the engine is jump

started, the ABS warning light may come

on. This is due to the low battery voltage

and does not i ndicate a malfunction.

When the battery becomes fully charged,

the light will go out.

Starting and operating 7-17

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (226,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

7-18 Starting and operating

CAUTION

If the warning light behaves as

follows, the ABS system may not

be working properly.

When the warning light is on, the

ABS function shuts down; however,

the conventional brake system con-

tinues to operate normally.

. The warning light does not come

on when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position.

. The warning light comes on when

the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position, but it does not

go out even when the vehicle

speed exceeds approximately 8

mph (12 km/h).

. The warning light comes on dur-

ing driving.

If these occur, have the ABS system

repaired at the first available oppor-

tunity by your SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

described in the following, the ABS

system may be considered normal.

. The warning light comes on right

after the engine is started but goes out

immediately, remaining off.

. The warning light remains on after

the engine has been started, but it goes

out when the vehicle speed reaches

approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).

. The warning light comes on during

driving, but it goes out immediately and

remains off.

Electronic Brake Force Dis-

tribution (EBD ) system

The EBD system maximizes the effective-

ness of the brakes by allowing the rear

brakes to supply a greater proportion of

the braking force. It functions by adjusting

the distribution of braking force to the rear

wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s

loading condition and speed.

The EBD system is an integral part of the

ABS system and uses some of the ABS

system’s components to perform its func-

tion of optimizing the distribution of brak-

ing force. If any of the ABS components

used by the EBD function fails, the EBD

system also stops working.

When the EBD system is operating, you

may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight

vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal

and does not indicate a malfunction.

Black plate (227,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Steps to take if EBD system

fails

1) U.S.-spec. models

2) Canada-spec. models

If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,

the system stops working and the brake

system warning light and ABS warning

light come on simultaneously.

The EBD system may be faulty if the

brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate simultaneously

during driving.

Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-

tional braking system will still function.

However, the rear wheels will be more

prone to locking when the brakes are

applied harder than usual and the vehi-

cle’s motion may therefore become some-

what harder to control.

If the brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate simultaneously,

take the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,

flat place.

2. Shut down the engine, then restart it.

3. Release the parking brake. If both

warning lights go out, the EBD system

may be faulty.

Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU

dealer and have the system inspected.

4. If both warning lights come on again

and stay illuminated after the engine has

been restarted, sh ut down the engine

again, apply the parking brake, and check

the brake fluid level.

5. If the brake fluid level is not below the

“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be

faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest

SUBARU dealer and have the system

inspected.

6. If the brake fluid level is below the

“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.

Instead, have the vehicle towed to the

nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

WARNING

. Driving with the brake system

warning light on is dangerous.

This indicates your brake system

may not be working properly. If

the light remains on, have the

brakes inspected by a SUBARU

dealer immediately.

. If at all in doubt about whether

the brakes are operating prop-

erly, do not drive the vehicle.

Have your vehicle towed to the

nearest SUBARU dealer for re-

pair.

Starting and operating 7-19

Black plate (228,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

7-20 Starting and operating

Vehicle Dynamics Control

system (if equipped)

WARNING

Always use the utmost c are in

driving – overconfidence because

you are driving with a Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system e quipped

vehicle could easily lead to a ser-

ious accident.

CAUTION

. Even if your vehicle is equipped

with Vehicle Dynamics Control,

winter tires or snow chains

should be used when driving on

snow-covered or icy roads; in

addition, vehicle speed should

be reduced considerably. Simply

having a Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system does not guarantee

that the vehicle will be able to

avoid accidents in any situation.

. Activation of the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system is an

indication that the road being

travelled on has a slippery sur-

face; since having Vehicle Dy-

namics Control is no guarantee

that full vehicle control will be

maintained at all times and under

all conditions, its activation

should be seen as a sign that

the speed of the vehicle should

be reduced considerably.

. Whenever suspension compo-

nents, steering components, or

an axle are removed from a

vehicle equipped with Vehicle

Dynamics Control, have an

authorized SUBARU dealer per-

form an inspection of that sys-

tem.

. The following precautions should

be observed in order to ensure

that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system is operating properly:

– All four wheels should be

fitted with tires of the same

size, type, and brand. Further-

more, the amount of wear

should be the same for all

four tires.

– Keep the tire pressure at the

proper level as shown on the

placard attached to the vehi-

cle’s door pillar.

– Use only the special tempor-

ary spare tire to replace a flat

tire. With a temporary spare

tire, the effectiveness of the

Vehicle Dynamics Control

system is reduced and this

should be taken into account

when driving the vehicle in

such a condition.

In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding

on a slippery road surface and/or during

cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

adjusts the engine’s output and the

wheels’ respective braking forces to help

maintain traction and directional control.

. Traction Control Function

The traction control function is designed to

prevent spinning of the driving wheels on

slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to

maintain traction and directional control.

Activation of this function is shown by

steady illumination of the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control operation indicator light.

. Skid Suppression Function

The skid suppression function is designed

to help maintain directional stability by

suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide

sideways during steering operations. Acti-

vation of this function is shown by flashing

of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

indicator light.

Black plate (229,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

NOTE

. Slight twitching of the brake pedal

may be felt when the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system operates; a small de-

gree of vehicle or steering wheel shak-

ing may also be noticed in this situa-

tion. These are normal characteristics

of Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

and are no cause for alarm.

. When driving off immediately after

starting the engine, a short-lived opera-

tion noise may be noticed coming from

the engine compartment. This noise is

generated as a result of a check being

performed on the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system and is normal.

. Depending on the timing of activa-

tion of the brakes, certain situations

may occur just after driving off where

the brake pedal seems to exhibit a

jolting motion. This too is a conse-

quence of the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol operational check and is normal.

. In the circumstances listed in the

following, the vehicle may be more

unstable than it feels to the driver.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control System

may therefore operate. Such operation

does not indicate a system fault.

. on gravel-covered or rutted roads

. on unfinished roads

. when the vehicle is towing a

trailer

. when the vehicle is fitted with

snow tires or winter tires

. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system will cause operation of

the steering wheel to feel slightly

different compared to that for normal

conditions.

. Even if the vehicle is equipped with

a Vehicle Dynamics Control system, it

is important that winter tires be used

when driving on snow-covered or icy

roads (all four wheels should be fitted

with tires of the same size and brand).

Furthermore, if snow chains are to be

used, they should be fitted on the front

wheels. When a vehicle is fitted with

snow chains, however, the effective-

ness of the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system is reduced and this should be

taken into account when driving the

vehicle in such a condition.

. It is always important to reduce

speed when approaching a corner,

even if the vehicle is equipped with

Vehicle Dynamics Control.

. All four wheels should be fitted with

tires of the same size, type, and brand;

furthermore, the amount of wear

should be the same for all four tires. If

these precautions are not observed

and non-matching tires are used, it is

quite possible that the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system will be unable

to operate correctly as intended.

. Always turn off the engine before

replacing a tire as failure to do so may

render the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system unable to operate correctly.

& Vehicle Dynamics Control

system monitor

! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-

tion indicator light

The indicator light turns on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position; it turns off approximately 2

seconds later. This indicator light flashes

during activation of the skid suppression

function and is illuminated steadily during

Starting and operating 7-21

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (230,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

7-22 Starting and operating

activation of the traction control function.

The following two situations could indicate

a malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system; if either should occur,

have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry

out an inspection of that system at the first

available opportunity.

. The indicator light does not turn on

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

. The indicator light does not turn off

approximately 2 seconds after the ignition

switch has been turned to the “ON”

position.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

light/Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF

indicator light

This single li ght has the function of

indicating malfunctions in the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system and the function

of indicating that the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system is not operating. It comes

on in the event of a malfunction in the

system and is illuminated whenever the

system is not operating.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

light

The warning light comes on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position and goes off several seconds

after engine startup. This lighting pattern

indicates that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system is operating normally.

The following situations could indicate a

malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system; if any should occur, have

an authorized SUBARU dealer carry out

an inspection of the system at the first

available opportunity.

. The warning light does not turn on

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

. The warning light turns on while the

vehicle is being driven.

. When a malfunction has occurred in

the Vehicle Dynamics Control electrical

system, only the warning light will turn on.

In such an event, the ABS will still be

operating normally.

. The warning light will also turn on when

a problem occurs with the ABS or Vehicle

Dynamics Control electronic control sys-

tems.

Because the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system controls each brake through the

ABS, whenever the ABS stops operating

due to a malfunction in that electrical

system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control will

also become unable to control all four

brakes. Thus Vehicle Dynamics Control

system operation halts and the warning

light turns on. Although both the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system and the ABS

will be inoperable in this situation, it will

still be possible to stop the vehicle using

normal braking. The Vehicle Dynamics

Control system and the ABS do not

adversely affect operation of the vehicle

in any way when they are inoperable;

however should such a situation occur,

drive with care and have an authorized

SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of

those systems at the first available oppor-

tunity.

NOTE

When the warning light turns on and off

in the following way, it indicates that

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

is operating normally.

. Although turning on after the engine

Black plate (231,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

has been started, the warning light

quickly turns off and stays off.

. The warning light turns on when the

vehicle is being driven; it then turns off

and stays off.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in-

dicator light

This light comes on to indicate that the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system is in

non-operation mode. This does not con-

stitute failure of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system.

NOTE

. The indicator light may stay on for a

while after the engine has been started,

especially in cold weather. This occurs

because the engine has not yet

warmed up and is completely normal.

The light will turn off when the engine

has reached a suitable operating tem-

perature.

. When an engine problem occurs

and the malfunction indicator lamp

turns on, the indicator light will also

come on.

The following two situations could indicate

malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system; if either should occur,

have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry

out an inspection of that system at the first

available opportunity.

. The indicator light does not turn on

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

. The indicator light fails to turn off after

the engine is started, even when several

minutes have passed to allow the engine

to heat up sufficiently.

& Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF switch

Pressing the switch to deactivate the

Vehicle Dynamics Control syst em can

facilitate the following operations:

. a standing start on a steeply sloping

road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or

otherwise slippery surface

. extrication of the vehicle when its

wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow

When the switch is pressed during engine

operation, the “

” indicator light illumi-

nates. The Vehicle Dynamics Control

system will be deactivated and the vehicle

will behave like a model not equipped with

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.

When the switch is pressed again to

reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system, the indicator light goes off.

With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

deactivated, traction and stability en-

hancement offered by Vehicle Dynamics

Control system is unavailable. Therefore

you should not deacti vate the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system except under

above-mentioned situations.

NOTE

. When the switch has been pressed

to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system automatically reacti-

vates itself the next time the ignition

switch is turned to the OFF position

and the engine is restarted.

. If the switch is held down for 10

seconds or longer, the indicator light

goes off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system is activated, and the system

ignores any further pressing of the

switch. To make the switch usable

Starting and operating 7-23

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (232,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

7-24 Starting and operating

again, turn the ignition switch to the

OFF position and restart the engine.

. Whentheswitchispressedto

deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system, the vehicle’s running per-

formance is comparable with that of a

vehicle that does not have a Vehicle

Dynamics Control system. Do not de-

activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system except when absolutely neces-

sary.

Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (if equipped)

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message

by sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel when tire pressure

is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven at

speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also,

this system may not react immediately to a

sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,

a blow-out caused by running over a

sharp object).

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

comes on while driving, never brake

suddenly and keep driving straight

ahead while gradually reducing

speed. Then slowly pull off the road

to a safe place. Otherwise an acci-

dent involving serious vehicle da-

mage and serious personal injury

could occur.

Check the pressure for all four tires

and adjust the pressure to the COLD

tire pressure shown on the tire

placard on the door pillar on the

driver’s side.

Even when the vehicle is driven a

very short distance, the tires get

warm and their pressures increase

accordingly. Be sure to let the tires

cool thoroughly before adjusting

their pressures to the standard

values shown on the tire placard.

(Refer to the “Tires and wheels”

section in chapter 11.) The tire

pressure monitoring system does

not function when the vehicle is

stationary. After adjusting the tire

pressures, increase the vehicle

speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h)

to start the TPMS re-checking of the

tire inflation pressures. If the tire

pressures are now above the severe

low pressure threshold, the low tire

pressure warning light should go off

Black plate (233,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

a few minutes later.

If this light still comes on while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a ti re may have significant

damage and a fast leak that causes

the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have

a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire

as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute. This indicates

the TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting.

Do not inject any tire liquid or

aerosol tire sealant into the tires,

as this may cause a malfunction of

the tire pressure sensors. If the light

illuminates steadily after blinking for

approximately one minute, promptly

contact a SUBARU dealer to have

the system inspected.

CAUTION

Do not place metal film or any metal

parts under the driver’s seat. This

may cause poor reception of the

signals from the tire pressure sen-

sors, and the tire pressure monitor-

ing system will not function prop-

erly.

NOTE

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject

to the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause

undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

Parking your vehicle

WARNING

. Never leave unattended children

or pets in the vehicle. They could

accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent op-

eration of the vehicle. Also, on

hot or sunny days, the tempera-

ture in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to

cause severe or possibly fatal

injuries to people.

. Do not park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags, as

they may burn easily if they come

near hot engine or exhaust sys-

tem parts.

. Be sure to stop the engine if you

take a nap in the vehicle. If

engine exhaust gas enters the

passenger compartment, occu-

pants in the vehicle could die

from carbon monoxide (CO) con-

tained in the exhaust gas.

Starting and operating 7-25

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (234,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

7-26 Starting and operating

CAUTION

Never drive while the parking brake

is set because this will cause un-

necessary wear on the brake lin-

ings. Before starting to drive, always

make sure that the parking brake

has been fully released.

& Parking brake

To set the parking brake, press the brake

pedal firmly and hold it down while fully

pulling up the parking brake lever.

To release the parking brake, pull the lever

up slightly, press the release button, then

lower the lever while keeping the button

pressed.

When the parking brake is set while the

engine is running, the parking brake

warning light comes on. After starting the

vehicle, be sure that the warning light has

gone out before the vehicle is driven.

Refer to the “Warning and indicator lights”

section (chapter 3).

& Parking tips

When parking your vehicle, always set the

parking brake firmly and put the shift lever

in the “1” (1st) for an upgrade or “R”

(Reverse) for a downgrade for manual

transmission vehicles, or in the “P” (Park)

position for automatic transmission vehi-

cles. Always set the parking brake firmly

when parking your vehicle. Never rely on

the transmission alone to hold the vehicle.

When parking on a hill, always turn the

steering wheel. When the vehicle is

headed up the hill, the front wheels should

be turned away from the curb.

When facing downhill, the front wheels

should be turned into the curb.

Black plate (235,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Hill holder (Manual transmis-

sion – if equipped)

CAUTION

The Hill Holder is a device only for

helping the driver to START the

vehicle on an uphill grade. To pre-

vent accidents when the vehicle is

parked on a slope, be sure to firmly

set the parking brake. When setting

the parking brake, make sure that

the vehicle remains stationary when

the clutch pedal is released.

The Hill holder is a device to make starting

on an uphill grade easier.

On an uphill grade, when the clutch pedal

is depressed while the brake pedal is also

depressed, braking power is maintained

temporarily by the Hill holder when the

brake pedal is released. The driver is

therefore able to start the vehicle the

same way as on a level grade, just using

the clutch and accelerator pedal.

The Hill holder does not operate when the

vehicle is facing downhill. And the Hill

holder may not operate on slight grades.

When starting in reverse and using the Hill

holder, a braking effect may be felt even

after the brake pedal has been released.

However, this braking effect should dis-

appear once the clutch pedal is released.

A slight jolt may be felt when the vehicle

begins to move forward after being re-

versed.

If the braking power of the Hill holder is

insufficient after the brake pedal is re-

leased, apply more braking power by

pressing the brake pedal again.

Starting and operating 7-27

Black plate (236,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

7-28 Starting and operating

Cruise control

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control under

any of the following conditions. This

may cause loss of vehicle control:

. driving up or down a steep grade

. driving on slippery or winding

roads

. driving in heavy traffic

Cruise control enables you to maintain a

constant vehicle speed without holding

your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is

operative when the vehicle speed is 25

mph (40 km/h) or more. Make sure the

main switch is turned “OFF” when the

cruise control is not in use to avoid

unintentionally setting the cruise control.

NOTE

If you move the cruise control lever or

press the main switch button while

turning the ignition switch “ON”, the

cruise control function is deactivated

and the “ CRUISE” indicator light

flashes. To reactivate the cruise control

function, turn the ignition switch back

to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position, and

then turn it again to the “ON” position.

& To set cruise control

1. Push the main switch button.

The “ ” indicator light on the combina-

tion meter will come on.

2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the

vehicle reaches the desired speed.

3. Push the control lever downward in the

“SET/COAST” direction and release it.

Then release the accelerator pedal.

At this time, the “ ” indicator light is

Black plate (237,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

illuminated in the combination meter.

The vehicle will maintain the desired

speed.

Vehicle speed can be temporarily in-

creased while driving with the cruise

control activated. Simply depress the

accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi-

cle. When the accelerator pedal is re-

leased, the vehicle will return to and

maintain the previous cruising speed.

& To temporarily cancel the

cruise control

There are five ways to cancel the cruise

control temporarily:

. Pull the control lever in the “CANCEL”

direction.

. Depress the brake pedal.

. Depress the clutch pedal (manual

transmission vehicles only).

. Shift the selector lever into the “N”

position (automatic transmission vehicles

only).

. Shift the shift lever into neutral (manual

transmission vehicles only).

The “

” indicator light in the combination

meter goes off when the cruise control is

cancelled.

To resume the cruise control after it has

been temporarily canceled and with vehi-

cle speed of approximately 20 mph (32

km/h) or more, push the control lever

upward in the “RES/ACC” direction to

return to the original cruising speed auto-

matically.

The “

” indicator light in the combination

meter will automatically come on at this

time.

& To turn off the cruise control

There are two ways to turn off the cruise

control:

. Push the main switch again.

. Turn the ignition switch to the “Acc” or

“LOCK” position (but only when the

vehicle is completely stopped).

& To change the cruising speed

! To increase the speed (by control

lever)

Push the control lever upward in the “RES/

ACC” direction and hold it until the vehicle

reaches the desired speed. Then, release

the control lever. The vehicle speed at that

moment will be memorized and treated as

the new set speed.

When the difference between the actual

vehicle speed and the set speed is less

than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can

be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time

by pressing the control lever upward in the

“RES/ACC” direction quickly.

Starting and operating 7-29

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (238,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

7-30 Starting and operating

! To increase the speed (by accel-

erator pedal)

1. Depress the acce lerator pedal to

accelerate the vehicle to the desired

speed.

2. Push the control lever downward in the

“SET/COAST” direction once. Now the

desired speed is set and the vehicle will

keep running at that speed without de-

pressing the accelerator pedal.

NOTE

If the difference between the actual

vehicle speed when the control lever

is pushed downward and the speed last

time you set is less than 4 mph (6.8

km/h), the vehicle speed will be low-

ered by 1 mph (1.6 km/h). This occurs

because the cruise control system unit

regards this lever operation as that

intended to decrease the vehicle

speed.

! To decrease the speed (by control

lever)

Push the control lever downward in the

“SET/COAST” direction and hold it until

the vehicle reaches the desired speed.

Then, release th e control lever. The

vehicle speed at that moment will be

memorized and treated as the new set

speed.

When the difference between the actual

vehicle speed and the set speed is less

than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can

be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by

pressing the control lever downward in the

“SET/COAST” direction quickly.

! To decrease the speed (by brake

pedal)

1. Depress the brake pedal to release

cruise control temporarily.

2. When the speed decreases to the

desired speed, press the control lever

downward in the “SET/COAST” direction

once. Now the desired speed is set and

the vehicle will keep running at that speed

without depressing the accelerator pedal.

Black plate (239,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Self-leveling rear suspension

(if equipped)

The self-leveling suspension adjusts the

vehicle body p osition automatically to

keep it level at all times irrespective of

the number of occupants and the amount

of cargo.

The self-leveling system is incorporated in

the rear suspension shock absorber and

operates only w hen the vehicle is in

motion.

Owing to the self-leveling suspension, the

vehicle body is adjusted to the proper

position after several drive trips, even if

the rear of the vehicle is lowered by

loaded cargos or a coupled trailer.

If cargos are unloaded all at once, the

vehicle height may become higher than

the normal level. This is because that the

hydraulic pressure in the self-leveling

suspension was increased for leveling

the body when the cargos were loaded.

In such a case, the vehicle height will

return to the original level after several

driving trips.

NOTE

If the rear axle is loaded excessively,

the vehicle body may not be adjusted

to the proper position.

Starting and operating 7-31

Black plate (2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2006/ 1/ 17

Left Page

————————————————————————————————————————

Black plate (15,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

New vehicle break-in driving – the first

1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2

Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2

Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ........... 8-2

Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3

Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4

Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4

Driving tips for AWD vehicles ............................ 8-5

Off road driving ................................................... 8-6

Winter driving ...................................................... 8-7

Operation during cold weather............................. 8-7

Driving on snowy and icy roads .......................... 8-9

Corrosion protection .......................................... 8-10

Snow tires ......................................................... 8-10

Tire chains......................................................... 8-10

Rocking the vehicle............................................ 8-11

Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-11

Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-12

GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-12

Roof rail and crossbar (if equipped) ................... 8-13

Trailer hitch (if equipped) .................................. 8-16

Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-16

When you do not tow a trailer ............................ 8-17

Trailer towing ..................................................... 8-18

Warranties and maintenance .............................. 8-18

Maximum load limits .......................................... 8-18

Trailer hitches.................................................... 8-21

Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-22

Trailer towing tips .............................................. 8-23

Forester Sports 2.5XT front lip spoiler

(U.S. only)........................................................ 8-25

Driving tips

Black plate (242,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

8-2 Driving tips

New vehicle break-in driving

– the first 1,000 miles (1,600

km)

The performance and long life of your

vehicle are dependent on how you handle

and care for your vehicle while it is new.

Follow these instructions during the first

1,000 miles (1,600 km):

. Do not race the engine. And do not

allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm

except in an emergency.

. Do not drive at one constant engine or

vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or

slow.

. Avoid starting sudde nly and rapid

acceleration, except in an emergency.

. Avoid hard braking, except in an

emergency.

The same break-in procedures should be

applied to an overhauled engine, newly

mounted engine or when brake pads or

brake linings are replaced with new ones.

Fuel economy hints

The following suggestions will help to save

your fuel.

. Select the proper gear position for the

speed and road conditions.

. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera-

tion. Always accelerate gently until you

reach the desired speed. Then try to

maintain that speed for as long as

possible.

. Do not pump the accelerator and avoid

racing the engine.

. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

. Keep the engine properly tuned.

. Keep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure shown on the tire placard, which

is located under the door latch on the

driver’s side. Low pressure will increase

tire wear and fuel consumption.

. Use the air conditioner only when

necessary.

. Keep the front and rear wheels in

proper alignment.

. Avoid carrying unnecessary cargo.

Engine exhaust gas (Carbon

monoxide)

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains

carbon monoxide, a colorless

and odorless gas which is dan-

gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from enter-

ing the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parked

vehicle for a lengthy time while

the engine is running. If that is

unavoidable, then use the venti-

lation fan to force fresh air into

the vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation system al-

ways works properly.

. If at any time you suspect that

Black plate (243,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem

checked and corrected as soon

as possible. If you must drive

under these conditions, drive

only with all windows fully open.

. Keep the rear gate closed while

driving to prevent exhaust gas

from entering the vehicle.

NOTE

Due to the expansion and contraction

of the metals used in the manufacture

of the exhaust system, you may hear a

crackling sound coming from the ex-

haust system for a short time after the

engine has been shut off. This sound is

normal.

Catalytic converter

WARNING

. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive

or park the vehicle anywhere

near flammabl e materials (e.g.

grass, paper, rags or leaves),

because the catalytic converter

operates at very high tempera-

tures.

. Keep everyone and flammable

materials away from the exhaust

pipe while the engine is running.

The exhaust gas is very hot.

Turbo model

Non-turbo model

The catalytic converter is installed in the

exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to

reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust

gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.

To avoid damage to the catalytic conver-

ter:

. Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small

amount of leaded fuel will damage the

catalytic converter.

. Never start the engine by pushing or

pulling the vehicle.

. Avoid racing the engine.

. Never turn off the ignition switch while

the vehicle is moving.

. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel

the engine running rough (misfiring, back-

firing or incomplete combustio n), have

Driving tips 8-3

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (244,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

8-4 Driving tips

your vehicle checked and repaired by an

authorized SUBARU dealer.

. Do not apply undercoating or rust

prevention treatment to the heat shield of

catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-

tem.

. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel

level.

Periodic inspections

To keep your vehicle in the best condition

at all times, always have the recom-

mended maintenance services listed in

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per-

formed at the specified time or mileage

intervals.

Driving in foreign countries

When planning to use your vehicle in

another country:

. Confirm the availability of the correct

fuel. (Refer to the “Fuel requirements”

section in chapter 7.)

. Comply with all regulations and re-

quirements of each country.

Black plate (245,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Driving tips for AWD vehicles

WARNING

. Always maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden brak-

ing or under other similar condi-

tions.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are driving an All-

Wheel Drive vehicle could easily

lead to a serious accident.

All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine

power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles

provide better traction when driving on

slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and

when moving out of mud, dirt and sand.

By shifting power between the front and

rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also

provide added traction during acceleration

and added engine braking force during

deceleration.

Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle

may handle differently than an ordinary

two wheel drive vehicle and it contains

some features unique to AWD. For safety

purposes as well as to avoid damaging

the AWD system, you should keep the

following tips in mind:

. An AWD vehicle is better able to climb

steeper roads under snowy or slippery

conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.

There is little difference in handling,

however, during extremely sharp turns or

sudden braking. Therefore, when driving

down a slope or turning corners, be sure

to reduce your speed and maintain an

ample distance from other vehicles.

. When replacing a tire, make sure you

use only the same size , co nstruction,

brand, and load range as the original tires

listed on the tire placard. Using other sizes

or construction may result in severe

mechanical damage to the drive train of

your vehicle and may affect ride, handling,

braking, speedometer/odometer calibra-

tion, and clearance between the body

and tires. It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control.

. Always check the cold tire pressure

before starting to drive. The recom-

mended tire pressure is provided on the

tire placard, which is located under the

door latch on the driver’s side.

. Tire chains should always be placed on

the front wheels only.

. There are some precautions that you

must observe when towing your vehicle.

For detail information, see the “Towing”

section in chapter 9.

Driving tips 8-5

Black plate (246,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

8-6 Driving tips

Off road driving

WARNING

. Always maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden brak-

ing or under other similar condi-

tions.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving - overconfidence because

you are driving an All-Wheel

Drive vehicle could easily lead

to a serious accident.

Because of the AWD feature and higher

ground clearance, your SUBARU can be

driven on ordinary roads or off-road. But

please keep in mind that an AWD

SUBARU is a passenger car and is

neither a conventional off-road vehicle

nor an all-terrain vehicle. If you do take

your SUBARU off-road, certain common

sense precautions such as the following

should be taken:

. Make certain that you and all of your

passengers are wearing seatbelts.

. Carry some emergency equipment,

such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,

wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or

citizens band radio.

. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-

sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or

over rough terrain.

. Slow down and employ extra caution at

all times. When driving off-road, you will

not have the benefit of marked traffic

lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and

the like.

. Do not drive across steep slopes.

Instead, drive either straight up or straight

down the slopes. A vehicle can much

more easily tip over sideways than it can

end over end. Avoid driving straight up or

down slopes that are too steep.

. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-

cially at higher speeds.

. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the

steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the

wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive

with your fingers and thumbs on the

outside of the rim.

. If driving through water, such as when

crossing shallow streams, first check the

depth of the water and the bottom of the

stream bed for firmness and ensure that

the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly

and completely through the stream. The

water should be shallow enough that it

does not reach the vehicle’s undercar-

riage. Water entering the engine air intake

or the exhaust pipe or water splashing

onto electrical parts may damage your

vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never

attempt to drive through rushing water;

regardless of its depth, it can wash away

the ground from under your tires, resulting

in possible loss of traction and even

vehicle rollover.

. Always check your brakes for effec-

tiveness immediately after driving in sand,

mud or water. Do this by driving slowly

and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat

that process several times to dry out the

brake discs and brake pads.

. Do not drive or park over or near

flammable materials such as dry grass or

fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The

exhaust system is very hot while the

engine is running and right after the

engine stops. This could create a fire

hazard.

. After driving through tall grass, mud,

rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there

is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones,

sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the

underbody. Clear off any such matter from

the underbody. If the vehicle is used with

these materials trapped or adhering to the

underbody, a mechanical breakdown or

fire could occur.

. Secure all cargo carried inside the

vehicle and make certain that it is not

Black plate (247,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

piled higher than the seatbacks. During

sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo

could be thrown around in the vehicle and

cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on

the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s

center of gravity and make it more prone

to tip over.

. If you must rock the vehicle to free it

from sand or mud, depress the accelerator

pedal slightly and move the selector lever

back and forth between “D” and “R”

repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For

the best possible traction, avoid spinning

the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.

When the road surface is extremely

slippery, you can obtain better traction by

starting the vehicle with the transmission

in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).

. Never equip your vehicle with tires

larger than those specified in this manual.

. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle

under hard-driving conditions such a s

rough roads or off roads will necessitate

more frequent replacement of engine oil,

brake fluid and transmission oil than that

specified in the maintenance schedule

described in the “Warranty and Mainte-

nance Booklet”.

Remember that damage done to your

SUBARU while operating it off-road and

not using common sense pr ecautions

such as those listed above is not eligible

for warranty coverage.

. Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-

road driving. Suspension components are

particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they

need to be washed thoroughly.

Winter driving

& Operation during cold

weather

Carry some emergency equipment, such

as tire chains, a window scraper, a bag of

sand, flares, a small shovel, and jumper

cables.

Check the battery and cables. Cold

temperatures reduce battery capacity.

The battery must be in good condition to

provide enough power for cold winter

starts.

Use an engine oil of proper grade and

viscosity for cold weather. Heavy summer

oil will cause harder starting.

Keep the door locks from freezing by

Driving tips 8-7

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (248,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

8-8 Driving tips

squirting them with deicer or glycerin.

Forcing a frozen door open may damage

or sepa rate the rubber weather strips

around the door. If the door is frozen,

use hot water to melt the ice, and after-

wards thoroughly wipe the water away.

Use a windshield washer fluid that con-

tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use

engine antifreeze or other substitutes

because they may damage the paint of

the vehicle.

SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con-

tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%

surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-

perature varies according to how much it

is diluted, as indicated in the following

table.

Washer Fluid Con-

centration

Freezing Temperature

30% 10.48F(−128C)

50% −48F(−208C)

100%

−498F(−458C)

In order to prevent freezing of washer

fluid, check the freezing temperatures in

the table above when adjusting the fluid

concentration to the outside temperature.

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with

a different concentration from the one

used previously, purge the old fluid from

the piping between the reservoir tank and

washer nozzles by operating the washer

for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if

the concentration of the fluid remaining in

the piping is t oo low for the outside

temperature, it may freeze and block the

nozzles.

CAUTION

Adjust the washer fluid concentra-

tion appropriately for the outside

temperature. If the concentration is

inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid

may freeze on the windshield and

obstruct your view, and the fluid

may freeze in the reservoir tank.

! Before driving your vehicle

Before entering the vehicle, remove any

snow or ice from your shoes because that

could make the pedals slippery and

dangerous.

While warming up the vehicle before

driving, check that the accelerator pedal,

brake pedal, and all other controls operate

smoothly.

Clear away ice and snow that has

accumulated under the fenders to avoid

making steering difficult. During severe

winter driving, stop when and where it is

safe to do so and check under the fenders

periodically.

! Parking in cold weather

WARNING

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep

snow clear of the exhaust pipe and

from around your vehicle if you park

the vehicle in snow with the engine

running.

Do not use the parking brake when

parking for long periods in cold weather

since it could freeze in that position.

Instead, observe the following.

1. Place the shift lever in “1” or “R” for

manual transmission vehicles, and in “P”

for automatic transmission vehicles.

2. Use tire stops under the tires to

prevent the vehicle from moving.

When the vehicle is parked in snow or

when it snows, raise the wiper blades off

the glass to prevent damage to them.

When the vehicle has been left parked

after use on roads heavily covered with

snow, or has been left parked during a

snowstorm, icing may develo p on the

brake system, which could cause poor

Black plate (249,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

braking action. Check for snow or ice

buildup on the suspension, disc brakes

and brake hoses underneath the vehicle.

If there is caked snow or ice, remove it,

being careful not to damage the disc

brakes and brake hoses and ABS har-

ness.

! Refueling in cold weather

To help prevent moisture from forming in

the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,

use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel

tank is recommended during cold weather.

Use only additives that are specifically

designed for this purpose. When an

antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts

longer if the tank is refilled whenever the

fuel level reaches half empty.

If your SUBARU is not going to be used

for an extended period, it is best to have

the fuel tank filled to capacity.

& Driving on snowy and icy

roads

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control on

slippery roads such as snowy or icy

roads. This may cause loss of

vehicle control.

CAUTION

Avoid prolonged continuous driving

in snowstorms. Snow will enter the

engine’sintakesystemandmay

hinder the air flow, which could

result in engine shutdown or even

breakdown.

To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid

sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-

speed driving, and sharp turning when

driving on snowy or icy roads.

Always maintain ample distance between

your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you

to avoid the need for sudden braking.

To supplement the foot brake, use the

engine brake effectively to control the

vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear

when necessary.)

Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-

vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly

leading to loss of vehicle control.

An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-

hances your vehicle’s b raking perfor-

mance on snowy and icy roads. Refer to

the “ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)” sec-

tion in chapter 7 for information on braking

on slippery surfaces.

! Wiper operation when snowing

Before driving in cold weather, make sure

the wiper blades are not frozen to the

windshield or rear window. If the wiper

blades are frozen to the windshield or rear

window, use the defroster with the airflow

control button/dial in the “ ” position and

the temperature control dial set for max-

imum warmth until the wiper blades are

completely thawed out. If your vehicle is

equipped with a wiper deicer, it is helpful

to thaw the windshield wiper blades. To

thaw out the rear wiper blade, use the rear

window defogger.

When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts

to stick on the surface of the windshield

despite wiper operation, use the defroster

with the airflow control button/dial in “

”

and the temperature control dial set for

maximum warmth. After the windshield

gets warmed enough to melt the frozen

snow on it, wash it away using the

windshield washer.

Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the

wiper from working effectively. If snow is

stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to

a safe place, then remove it. If you stop

the vehicle at road side, use the hazard

warning flasher to alert other drivers.

We recommend use of non-freezing type

Driving tips 8-9

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (250,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

8-10 Driving tips

wiper blades (winter blades) during the

seasons you could have snow and sub-

zero temperatures. Blades of this type

give superior wiping performance in

snowy conditions. Be sure to use blades

that are suitable for your vehicle.

CAUTION

During high-speed driving, non-

freezing type wiper blades may not

perform as well as standard wiper

blades. If this happens, reduce the

vehicle speed.

NOTE

When the season requiring non-freez-

ing type wiper blades is over, replace

them with standard wiper blades.

& Corrosion protection

Refer to the “Corrosion protection” section

(chapter 10).

& Snow tires

WARNING

. When replacing original tires with

winter (snow) tires, make sure

you use only the same size,

construction and load range as

the original tires listed on the tire

placard. Using other sizes and

construction may affect speed-

ometer/odometer calibration and

clearance between the body and

tires. It also may be dangerous

and lead to loss of vehicle con-

trol.

. You must install four winter tires

that are of the same size, con-

struction, brand, and load range.

Mixing other sizes or construc-

tions may result in severe me-

chanical damage to the drive

train of your vehicle and may

affect ride, handling, braking and

speedometer/odometer calibra-

tion. It also may be dangerous

and lead to loss of vehicle con-

trol.

. Do not use a combinatio n of

radial, belted bias or bias tires

since it may cause dangerous

handling characteristics and lead

to an accident.

Your vehicle is equipped with “all season

tires” as original equipment, which are

designed to provide an adequate measure

of traction, handling and braking perfor-

mance in year-round driving. In winter, it

may be possible to enhance performance

through use of tires designed specifically

for winter driving conditions.

When you choose to install winter tires on

your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire

size and type. You must install four winter

tires that are of the same size, construc-

tion, brand and load range and you should

never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires

since this may result in dangerous hand-

ling characteristics. When you choose a

tire, make sure that there is enough

clearance between the tire and vehicle

body.

Remember to drive with care at all times

regardless of the type of tires on your

vehicle.

& Tire chains

Driving on snowy grades or icy roads may

require the use of tire chains, in which

case put the chains on the front wheels

only. Use only SAE class S type chains

that are of the correct size for your tires so

as not to damage the vehicle body or

suspension.

When driving with tire chains, drive at

speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h).

Always use the utmost care when driving

with tire chains – overconfidence because

you are driving with tire chains could

Black plate (251,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

easily lead to a serious accident.

& Rocking the vehicle

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from

snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-

erator pedal slightly and move the selector

lever back and forth between “D” and “R”

repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For

the best possible traction, avoid spinning

the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.

When the road surface is extremely

slippery, you can obtain better traction by

starting the vehicle with the transmission

in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).

Refer to the “Automatic transmission”

section in chapter 7 for information on

holding the transmission in 2nd position.

Loading your vehicle

WARNING

. Never allow passengers to ride

on a folded rear seatback or in

the cargo area. Doing so may

result in serious injury.

. Never stack luggage or other

cargo higher than the top of the

seatback because it could tumble

forward and injure passengers in

the event of a sudden stop or

accident. Keep luggage or cargo

low, as close to the floor as

possible.

WARNING

. When you carry something inside

the vehicle, secure it whenever

you can to prevent it from being

thrown around inside the vehicle

during sudden stops, sharp turns

or in an accident.

. Do not pile heavy loads on the

roof. These loads raise the vehi-

cle’s center of gravity and make it

more prone to tip over.

. Secure lengthy items properly to

prevent them from shooting for-

ward and causing serious injury

during a sudden stop.

. Never exceed the maximum load

limit. If you do, some parts on

your vehicle can break, or it can

change the way your vehicle

handles. This could result in loss

of control and cause personal

injury. Also, overloading can

shorten the life of your vehicle.

. Do not place anything on the

extended cargo area cover. Such

items could tumble forward in the

event of a sudden stop or a

collision. This could cause ser-

ious injury.

Driving tips 8-11

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (252,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

8-12 Driving tips

CAUTION

Do not carry spray cans, containers

with flammable or corrosive liquids

or any other dangerous items inside

the vehicle.

NOTE

For better fuel economy, do not carry

unneeded cargo.

& Vehicle capacity weight

The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by available

cargo space. The maximum load you can

carry in your vehicle is shown on the

vehicle placard attached to the driver’s

side door pillar. It includes the total weight

of the driver and all passengers and their

belongings, any optional equipment such

as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,

etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.

& GVWR and GAWR (Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating and

Gross Axle Weight Rating)

The certification label attached to the

driver’s side door jamb shows GVWR

(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR

(Gross Axle Weight Rating).

The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must

never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the

combined total of weight of the vehicle,

fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any

optional equipment and trailer tongue

load. Therefore, the GVW changes de-

Black plate (253,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

pending on the situation. The GVWR

equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your

vehicle – including standard equipment,

fluids, emergency tools and spare tire

assembly) plus the vehicle capa city

weight.

In addition, the total weight applied to

each axle (GAW) must never exceed the

GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be

adjusted by relocating luggage inside the

vehicle.

Even if the total weight of your luggage is

lower than the vehicle capacity weight,

either front or rear GAW may exceed the

GAWR, depending on the distribution of

the luggage.

When possible, the load should be evenly

distributed throughout the vehicle.

If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you

should confirm that GVW and front and

rear GAWs are within the GVWR and

GAWR by putting your vehicle on a

vehicle scale, found at a commercial

weighing station.

Do not use replacement tires with a lower

load range than the originals because they

may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-

tions. Replacement tires with a higher load

range than the originals do not increase

the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

& Roof rail and crossbar (if

equipped)

CAUTION

. For cargo carrying purposes, the

roof rail must be used together

with a roof crossbar kit and the

appropriate carrying attachment.

The roof rail must never be used

alone to carry cargo. Otherwise,

damage to the roof or paint or a

dangerous road hazard due to

loss of cargo could result.

. When using the roof crossbar kit,

make sure that the total weight of

the crossbars, carrying attach-

ment and cargo does not exceed

the maximum load limit. Over-

loading may cause damage to

the vehicle and create a safety

hazard.

The roof rail is not designed to carry cargo

by itself. Cargo can be carried after

securing the roof crossbar kit to the roof

rail and installing the appropriate carrying

attachment. When installing the roof

crossbar kit, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions.

When you carry cargo on the roof using

the roof crossbar kit and a carrying

attachment, never exceed the maximum

load limit explained in the following. You

should also be careful that your vehicle

does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR) and front and rear Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). See the

“Loading your vehicle” section in this

chapter for information on loading cargo

into or onto your vehicle. The maximum

load limit of the cargo, crossbars and

carrying attachment must not exceed 150

lbs (68 kg). Place the heaviest load at the

bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly

distribute the cargo. Always properly

secure all cargo.

! Installing carrying attachments on

the crossbars

When installing any carrying attachment

such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak

carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross-

bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions and make sure that the attachment is

securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only

attachments designed specifically for the

crossbars. A set of crossbars is designed

to carry loads (cargo and attachment) of

not more than 150 lbs (68 kg) . Before

operating the vehicle, make sure that the

cargo is properly secured on the attach-

ment.

Driving tips 8-13

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (254,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

8-14 Driving tips

NOTE

Remember that the vehicle’s center of

gravity is altered with the weight of the

load on the roof, thus affecting the

driving characteristics.

Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard

cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind

effects will be increased.

! Removal and installation of the

crossbars

The crossbars can be removed when you

do not use the roof to carry cargo.

! To remove the crossbar

1) Crossbar end support

2) T-30 torx® head screw

1. Loosen and remove the T-30 torx®

head screw from the top of each crossbar

end support.

2. Move the end support and inner clamp

to unhook each side of the crossbar from

the roof rail.

3. Carefully raise the crossbar from roof

rails.

NOTE

It may be necessary to move the Front

crossbar rearward, near the center of

the roof rail for easier removal. Use

care not to cross-thread the screw in

the insert if it has been removed.

! To install the crossbar

Front crossbar:

Front crossbar has 150 lbs. Load Label on

right-hand side.

1) Crossbar end support

2) T-30 torx® head screw

1. Before placing the crossbar on the roof

rails, make sure that the T-30 torx® head

screw is fully loosened from each end

support.

2. Spread the inner clamp and the end

support as far apart as possible.

Black plate (255,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1) Load label

2) Direction arrow label

3) 6 in (150 mm)

3. With the front direction arrow label on

the top right side of the crossbar pointing

toward the front of the vehicle, carefully

place the crossbar across the top of the

vehicle so that the crossbar end supports

rest on the top of the roof rails approxi-

mately 6 inches (150 mm) rearward in the

front radius of the roof rail.

4. Move the end support and inner clamp

to hook under the end of the roof rail on

both sides and loosely assemble the T-30

torx® head screw with the tool provided

into the threaded insert in the inner clamp

on each end of the crossbar.

NOTE

It may be necessary to start the inner

clamp and end support at the center of

the roof rail for easier installation, then

move the crossbar forward. Use care

not to cross-thread the screw in the

insert if it has been removed.

5. Adjust the alignment of the crossbar

on the roof rails, and if available, use a T-

30 torx® bit and torque wrench and tighten

the T-30 torx® head screws to 30 to 35

lbf·in (3.4 to 4.0 N·m, 0.35 to 0.41 kgf·m) of

torque (or tighten securely with the torx®

wrench provided).

Rear crossbar:

1) T-30 torx® head screw

2) Front arrow label

3) 6 in (150 mm)

Install the rear crossbar in the same

manner as the front crossbar.

NOTE

The rear crossbar should be positioned

6 inches (150 mm) forward of the rear

radius in the roof rail.

CAUTION

Do not carry cargo on the roof when

the crossbars are removed. Lug-

gage on the roof w ill be thrown

forward or backward in sudden

stops or rapid accelerations, result-

ing in a dangerous road hazard.

NOTE

Before each use of the roof crossbar,

make sure the four T-30 crossbar

clamp screws have been checked,

and retightened if necessary to 30 to

35 lbf·in (3.4 to 4.0 N·m, 0.35 to 0.41

kgf·m), as outlined in Step #5 above.

Driving tips 8-15

Black plate (256,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

8-16 Driving tips

Trailer hitch (if equipped)

WARNING

. Never exceed the maximum

weight specified for the trailer

hitch. Exceeding the maximum

weight could cause an accident

resulting in serious personal in-

juries. Permissible trailer weight

changes depending on the situa-

tion. Refer to the next section

“Trailer towing” for possible re-

commendations and limitations.

. Trailer brakes are required when

the towing load exceeds 1,000

lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer

has safety chains and that each

chain will hold the trailer’s max-

imum gross weight. Towing trai-

lers without safety chains could

create a traffic safety hazard if

the trailer separates fr om the

hitch due to coupling damage or

hitch ball damage.

. Be sure to check the hitch pin

and safety pin for positive lock-

ing placement before towing a

trailer. If the ball mount comes off

the hitch receiver, the trailer

could get loose and create a

traffic safety hazard.

. Use only the ball mount supplied

with this hitch. Use the hitch only

as a weight carrying hitch. Do not

use with any type of weight

distributing hitch.

When you tow a trailer, follow the instruc-

tions in the next section “Trailer towing”.

& Connecting a trailer

1. Remove the receiver cover from the

hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball

mount into the hitch receiver tube.

2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the

hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes

through the ball mount.

3. Insert the safety pin securely into the

hitch pin.

4. Pull the ball mount to make sure it

does not come off the hitch receiver.

Black plate (257,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1) Hitch ball installation point

2) Hooks for safety chains

5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate

for the ball mount and your trailer. The

hitch ball must be securely installed on the

ball mount.

6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.

7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with

safety chains that will hold the trailer’s

maximum gross weight. The chains

should cross under the trailer tongue to

prevent the tongue from dropping onto the

ground in case it should disconnect from

the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the

chains taking tight-turn situations into

account; however, be careful not to let

them drag on the ground.

WARNING

Do not connect safety chains to part

of the vehicle other than the safety

chain hooks.

Hitch harness connector

8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black

four-pin wire connector to the towing

trailer’s wire harness

9. Confirm proper function of the hitch

wire harness by individually activating the

brake, right turn signal, left turn signal,

stop, and parking lights on the trailer.

NOTE

Always disconnect the trailer wire har-

ness before launching or retrieving a

watercraft.

& When you do not tow a trailer

. Remove the ball mount from the hitch

receiver tube and insert the receiver cover

onto the hitch receiver tube.

. Place the dust cap over the four-pin

connector of the hitch wire harness to

protect against possible damage.

. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the

four-pin connector using terminal grease.

Driving tips 8-17

Black plate (258,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

8-18 Driving tips

Trailer towing

Your vehicle is designed and intended to

be used primarily as a passenger-carrying

vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional

loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,

brakes, tires and suspension and has an

adverse effect on fuel economy.

If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety

and satisfaction depend upon proper use

of correct equipment and cautious opera-

tion of your vehicle. Seek the advice of

your SUBARU dealer to assist you in

purchasing a hitch and other necessary

towing equipment appropriate for your

vehicle. In addition, be sure to follow the

instructions on correct installation and use

provided by the trailer and other towing

equipment manufacturers.

SUBARU assumes no responsibility for

injuries or vehicle damage that result from

trailer towing equ ipment, or from any

errors or omissions in the instructions

accompanying such equipment or for your

failure to follow the proper instructions.

& Warranties and maintenance

SUBARU warranties do not apply to

vehicle damage or malfunction caused

by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to

tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance

will be required due to the additional load.

(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under

severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty

and Maintenance Booklet”.)

Under no circumstances should a trailer

be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle

with any new powertrain component (en-

gine, transmission, differential, wheel

bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles

(1,600 km) of driving.

& Maximum load limits

WARNING

Never exceed the maximum load

limits explained in the following.

Exceeding the maximum load limits

could cause personal injury and/or

vehicle damage.

CAUTION

. Adequate size trailer brakes are

required when the trailer and its

cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.

. Before towing a trailer, check the

trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs

and tongue load. Make sure the

load and its distribution in your

vehicle and trailer are accepta-

ble.

! Total trailer weight

Total trailer weight

The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus

its cargo load) must never exceed the

maximum weight shown in the following

table.

Black plate (259,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Model Conditions

Maximum

total trailer

weight

MT models

When towing a

trailer without

brakes.

1,000 lbs

(453 kg)

When towing a

trailer with brakes.

2,400 lbs

(1,087 kg)

AT models

When towing a

trailer without

brakes.

1,000 lbs

(453 kg)

When towing a

trailer with brakes.

2,400 lbs

(1,087 kg)

When towing a

trailer on a long

uphill grade con-

tinuously for over

5 miles (8 km) with

an outside tem-

perature of 1048F

(408C) or above.

1,000 lbs

(453 kg)

! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR)

Gross Vehicle Weight

The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must

never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR).

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the

combined total of the weight of the vehicle,

driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,

trailer tongue load and any other optional

equipment installed on your vehicle.

Therefore, the GVW changes depending

on the situation. Determine the GVW each

time before going on a trip by putting your

vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.

Certification label

GVWR is shown on the certification label

located on the driver’s side door jamb.

Driving tips 8-19

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (260,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

8-20 Driving tips

! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

Gross Axle Weight

The total weight applied to each axle

(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear

GAWscanbeadjustedbyrelocating

passengers and luggage inside the vehi-

cle. The front and rear GAWR are also

shown on the certification label.

To check both GVWR and GAWR and to

confirm that the total weight and weight

distribution are within safe driving limits,

you should have your vehicle and trailer

weighed at a commercial weighing station.

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution

while driving.

! Tongue load

Tongue load

Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from

8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weight

and does not exceed the maximum value

of 200 lbs (90 kg).

1) Jack

2) Bathroom scale

The tongue load can be weighed with a

bathroom scale as shown in the illustration

above. When weighing the tongue load,

be sure to position the towing coupler at

the height at which it would be during

actual towing, using a jack as shown.

Black plate (261,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

F: Front of vehicle

The tongue load can be adjusted by

proper distribution of the load in the trailer.

Never load the trailer with more weight in

the back than in the front; approximately

60 percent of the trailer load should be in

the front and approximately 40 percent in

the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly

as possible on both the left and right

sides.

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution

while driving.

WARNING

If the trailer is loaded with more

weight in the back of trailer’s axle

than in the front, the load is taken off

the rear axle of the towing vehicle.

This may cause the rear wheels to

skid, especially during braking or

when vehicle speed is reduced dur-

ing cornering, resulting in over-

steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.

& Trailer hitches

WARNING

Never drill the frame or under-body

of your vehicle to install a commer-

cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-

ous exhaust gas, water or mud may

enter the passenger compartment

through the drilled hole. Exhaust

gas contains carbon monoxide, a

colorless and odorless gas which is

dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

Also, drilling the frame or under-

body of your vehicle could cause

deterioration of strength of your

vehicle and cause corrosion around

the drilled hole.

CAUTION

. Do not modify the vehicle ex-

haust system, brake system, or

other systems when installing a

hitch or other trailer towing

equipment.

. Do not use axle-mounted hitches

as they can cause damage to the

axle housing, wheel bearings,

wheels or tires.

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and

trailer.

The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer

hitch is recommended. A genuine

SUBARU hitch is available from your

SUBARU dealer.

If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoid-

able, be sure the hitch is suited to your

vehicle and trailer. Consult with a profes-

sional hitch supplier to assist you in

choosing an appropriate hitch for your

vehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch

manufacturer’s instructions for installation

and use.

Never use a hitch that mounts only to the

rear bumper. The bumper is not designed

to handle that type of load.

For all types of hitches, regularly check

that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are

tight.

Driving tips 8-21

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (262,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

8-22 Driving tips

& Connecting a trailer

! Trailer brakes

WARNING

. Adequate size trailer brakes are

required when the trailer and its

cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.

. Do not directly connect your

trailer’s hydraulic brake system

to the hydraulic brake system in

your vehicle. Direct connection

would cause the vehicle’s brake

performance to deteriorate and

could lead to an accident.

If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight

plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs

(453 kg), the trailer is required to be

equipped with its own brake system.

Electric brakes or surge brakes are

recommended, and must be installed

properly. Check that your trailer’s brakes

conform with Federal, state/province and/

or other applicable regulations. Your

SUBARU’s brake system is not designed

to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic

brake system. Please ask your SUBARU

dealer and professional trailer supplier for

more information about the trailer’s brake

system.

! Trailer safety chains

WARNING

Always use safety chains between

your vehicle and the trailer. Towing a

trailer without safety chains could

create a traffic safety hazard if the

trailer separates from the hitch due

to coupling damage or hitch ball

damage.

In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch

ball should break or become discon-

nected, the trailer could get loose and

create a traffic safety hazard.

For safety, always connect the towing

vehicle and trailer with trailer safety

chains. Pass the chains crossing each

other under the trailer tongue to prevent

the trailer from dropping onto the ground

in case the trailer tongue should discon-

nect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient

slack in the chains taking tight-turn situa-

tions into account; however, be careful not

to let them drag on the ground.

For more information about the safety

chain connection, refer to the instructions

for your hitch and trailer.

! Side mirrors

After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,

check that the standard side mirrors

provide a good rearward field of view

without significant blind spots. If significant

blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan-

dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that

conform with Federal, state/province and/

or other applicable regulations.

! Trailer lights

CAUTION

Direct splicing or other improper

connection of trailer lights may

damage your vehicle’s electrical

system and cause a malfunction of

your vehicle’s lighting system.

Black plate (263,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Connection of trailer lights to your vehi-

cle’s electrical system requires modifica-

tions to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to

increase its capacity and accommodate

wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights

are connected properly, please consult

your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper

operation of the turn signals, the brake

lights and parking lights each time you

hitch up.

! Tires

WARNING

Never tow a trailer when the tem-

porary spare tire is used. The tem-

porary spare tire is not designed to

sustain the towing load. Use of the

temporary spare tire when towing

can result in failure of the spare tire

and/or less stability of the vehicle.

Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle

are properly inflated.

The recommended cold tire pressure

under trailer towing conditions is shown

in chapter 12, “Spe cifications ” and in

“GAS STATION REFERE NCE” at the

end of this manual. Adjust the rear tire

pressure to the recommended pressure

when the tires are cold. Normal pressure

should be maintained in the front tires.

Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and

proper inflation pressure should be in

accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s

specifications.

In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire

when towing a trailer, ask a commercial

road service to repair the flat tire.

If you carry a regular size spare tire in your

vehicle or trailer as a precaution against

getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare

tire is firmly secured.

& Trailer towing tips

WARNING

. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)

when towing a trailer in hilly

country on hot days.

. When towing a trailer, steering,

stability, stopping distance and

braking performance will be dif-

ferent from normal operation. For

safety’s sake, you should employ

extracautionwhentowinga

trailer and you should never

speed. You should also keep the

following tips in mind:

! Before starting out on a trip

. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-

hitch mounting are in good condition. If

any problems are apparent, do not tow the

trailer.

. Check that the vehicle sits horizontally

with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is

tipped sharply up at the front and down at

the rear, check the total trailer weight,

GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then

confirm that the load and its distribution

are acceptable.

. Check that the tire pressures are

correct.

. Check that the vehicle and trailer are

connected properly. Confirm that

– the trailer tongue is connected

properly to the hitch ball.

– the trailer lights connector is con-

nected properly and trailer’sbrake

lights illuminate when the vehicle’s

brake pedal is pressed, and that the

trailer’s turn signal lights flash when

the vehicle’s turn signal lever is oper-

ated.

– the safety chains are connected

properly.

– all cargo in the trailer is secured

safety in position.

– the side mirrors provide a goo d

rearward field of view without a sig-

Driving tips 8-23

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (264,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

8-24 Driving tips

nificant blind spot.

. Sufficient time should be taken to learn

the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination

before starting out on a trip. In an area free

of traffic, practice turning, stopping and

backing up.

! Driving with a trailer

. You should allow for considerably more

stopping distance when towing a trailer.

Avoid sudden braking because it may

result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of

control.

. Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accel-

erations. If your vehicle has a manual

transmission, always start out in first gear

and release the clutch at moderate engine

revolution.

. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and

rapid lane changes.

. Slow down before turning. Make a

longer than normal turning radius because

the trailer wheels will be closer than the

vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In

a tight turn, the trailer could hit your

vehicle.

. Crosswinds will adversely affect the

handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-

ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to

weather conditions or the passing of large

trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly

grip the steering wheel and slow down

immediately but gradually.

. When passing other vehicles, consid-

erable distance is required because of the

added wei ght and len gth caused by

attaching the trailer to your vehicle.

1) Left turn

2) Right turn

. Backing up with a trailer is difficult and

takes practice. When backing up with a

trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly.

When turning back, grip the bottom of the

steering wheel with one hand and turn it to

the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right

for a right turn.

. If the ABS warning light illuminates

while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing

the trailer and have repairs performed

immediately by the nearest SUBARU

dealer.

! Driving on grades

. Before going down a steep hill, slow

down and shift into lower gear (if neces-

sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the

engine braking effect and prevent over-

heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not

make sudden downshifts.

. When driving uphill in hot weather, the

air conditioner may turn off automatically

to protect the engine from overheating.

. When driving uphill in hot weather, pay

attention to the water temperature gauge

pointer (for all vehicles) and AT OIL TEMP

warning light (for AT vehicles) since the

engine and transmissio n are relative ly

prone to overheating under these condi-

tions. If the water temperature gauge

pointer approaches the OVERHEAT zone

or the AT OIL TEMP warning light illumi-

nates, immediately switch off the air

conditioner and stop the vehicle at the

nearest safe place. Refer to the “Engine

overheating” section in chapter 9, and

“Warning and indicator lights” section in

chapter 3.

. If your vehicle has an automatic trans-

mission, avoid using the accelerator pedal

to stay stationary on an uphill slope

instead of using the parking brake or foot

brake. That may cause the transmission

fluid to overheat.

. If your vehicle has an automatic trans-

Black plate (265,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

mission, place the selector lever as

follows:

Uphill slopes: “D” position

Downhill slopes: A low-speed gear posi-

tion to use engine braking

! Parking on a grade

Always block the wheels under both

vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply

the parking brake firmly. You should not

park on a hill or slope. But if parking on a

hill or slope cannot be avoided, you

should take the following steps:

1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal

down.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks

under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,

release the regular brakes slowly until the

blocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the regular brakes and then

apply the parking brake; slowly release

the regular brakes.

5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (manual

transmission) or “P” (automatic transmis-

sion) and shut off the engine.

Forester Sports 2.5XT front

lip spoiler (U.S. only)

CAUTION

. Your vehicle’s ground clearance

and approach angle are de-

creased due to the addition of

the front lip spoiler. Please ex-

ercise caution when parking the

vehicle, driving over speed

bumps, traveling up or down

steep inclines, or when under-

taking any other maneuver that

may involve the front end of the

vehicle.

. When towing a vehicle or loading

it onto a flatbed tow truck, extra

precautions must be taken to

ensure proper clearance between

the front lip spoiler and the

loading ramp or towing appara-

tus. Failure to allow for proper

clearance in these situations may

result in damage to the front lip

spoiler that is not covered under

warranty.

Extra care must be taken with vehicles

equipped with the front lip spoiler to avoid

damage to that accessory.

Driving tips 8-25

Black plate (2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2006/ 1/ 17

Left Page

————————————————————————————————————————

Black plate (17,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

If you park your vehicle in an emergency......... 9-2

Temporary spare tire (if equipped) .................... 9-2

Flat tires............................................................... 9-4

Changing a flat tire.............................................. 9-4

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

(if equipped)...................................................... 9-7

Jump starting ...................................................... 9-8

How to jump start................................................ 9-9

Engine overheating ............................................ 9-11

If steam is coming from the engine

compartment.................................................... 9-11

If no steam is coming from the engine

compartment ................................................... 9-11

Towing ................................................................ 9-11

Towing and tie-down hooks................................ 9-12

Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 9-13

Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 9-13

Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be

unlocked.......................................................... 9-14

Moonroof – if the moonroof cannot be

closed .............................................................. 9-14

Maintenance tools ............................................. 9-15

Jack and jack handle ......................................... 9-15

In case of emergency

Black plate (268,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

9-2 In case of emergency

If you park your vehicle in an

emergency

The hazard warning flasher should be

used in day or night to warn other drivers

when you have to park your vehicle under

emergency conditions.

Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to

safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.

The hazard warning flasher can be acti-

vated regardless of the ignition switch

position.

Turn on the hazard warning by pushing

the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it

off by pushing the switch again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

Temporary spare tire (if

equipped)

WARNING

. Never tow a trailer when the

temporary spare tire is used.

The temporary spare tire is not

designed to sustain the towing

load. Use of the temporary spare

tire when towing can result in

failure of the spare tire and/or

less stability of the vehicle and

may lead to an accident.

. When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/trans-

mitter being transferred, the low

tire pressure warning light will

illuminate steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute.

This indicates the tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) is un-

able to monitor all four road

wheels. Contact your SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible for

tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting.

Black plate (269,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

CAUTION

Never use any temporary spare tire

other than the original. Using other

sizes may result in severe mechan-

ical damage to the drive train of your

vehicle.

The temporary spare tire is smaller and

lighter than a conventional tire and is

designed for emergency use only. Re-

move the temporary spare tire and re-

install the conventional tire as soon as

possible because the spare tire is de-

signed only for temporary use.

Check the inflation pressure of the tem-

porary spare tire periodically to keep the

tire ready for use. The correct pressure is

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

When using the temporary spare tire, note

the following.

. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary

spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,

a tire chain will not fit properly.

. Do not use two or more temporary

spare tires at the same time.

. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire

has a smaller diameter, so road clearance

is reduced.

1) Tread wear indicator bar

2) Indicator location mark

. When the wear indicator appears on

the tread, replace the tire.

. The temporary spare tire must be used

only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire

gets punctured, replace the wheel with a

rear wheel and install the temporary spare

tire in place of the removed rear wheel.

1) Spare fuse

2) FWD connector

NOTE

(All AWD AT non-turbo models without

Vehicle Dynamics Control system) Be-

fore driving yo ur vehicle with the

temporary spare tire, put a spare fuse

inside the FWD connector in the main

fuse box located in the engine com-

partment and confirm that the Front-

wheel drive warning light “AWD” in the

combination meter comes on. The all

wheel drive capability of the vehicle

has now deactivated. After re-installing

the conventional tire, remove the spare

fuse from the FWD connector in order

to reactivate all wheel drive.

In case of emergency 9-3

Black plate (270,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

9-4 In case of emergency

Flat tires

If you have a flat tire while driving, never

brake suddenly; keep driving straight

ahead while gradually reducing speed.

Then slowly pull off the road to a safe

place.

& Changing a flat tire

WARNING

. Do not jack up the vehicle on an

incline or a loose road surface.

The jack can come out of the

jacking point or sink into the

ground and this can result in a

severe accident.

. Use only the jack provided with

your vehicle. The jack supplied

with the vehicle is designed only

for changing a tire. Never get

under the vehicle while support-

ing the vehicle with this jack.

. Always turn off the engine before

raising the flat tire off the ground

using the jack. Never swing or

push the vehicle supported with

the jack. The jack can come out

of the jacking point due to a jolt

and this can result in a severe

accident.

1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-

ever possible, then stop the engine.

2. Set the parking brake securely and

shift a manual transmission vehicle in

reverse or an automatic transmission

vehicle in the “P” (Park) position.

3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher

and have everyone get out of the vehicle.

4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear

of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.

1) Jack

2) Jack handle

3) Spare tire

5. Take out the spare tire, jack, and

wheel nut wrench.

The spare tire is stored under the floor of

the cargo area.

To remove the spare tire:

1. Open the lid and remove it.

Black plate (271,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

2. Remove the storage compartment

bucket (Canada spec. non-turbo models).

3. Remove the storage compartment tray

(except Canada spec. non-turbo models).

4. Turn the attaching bolt counterclock-

wise, then take spare tire out.

5. The jack is stored under the left side of

the cargo floor.

To take out the jack:

Pull the tab to open the lid, turn the jack

screw counterclockwise to loosen it, then

remove the jack.

To take out the jack handle:

Open the rear-left and center lids in the

cargo area by pulling their tabs.

6. If your vehicle has wheel covers, insert

the wheel cover remover into the notch

provided in the wheel cover, and pry it off.

In case of emergency 9-5

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (272,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

9-6 In case of emergency

7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel

nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.

8. Place the jack under the side sill at the

front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat

tire.

Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack

head engages firmly into the jack-up point.

9. Insert the jack handle into the jack-

screw, and turn the handle until the tire

clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle

higher than necessary.

10. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat

tire.

11. Before putting the spare tire on, clean

Black plate (273,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

the mounting surface of the wheel and hub

with a cloth.

12. Put on the spare tire. Replace the

wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.

WARNING

Do not use oil or grease on the

wheel studs or nuts when the spare

tire is installed. This could cause the

nuts to become loose and lead to an

accident.

13. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise

to lower the vehicle.

14. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely

tighten the wheel nuts to the specified

torque, following the tightening order in the

illustration.

The torque for tightening the nuts is 58 to

72 lbf·ft (80 to 100 N·m, 8 to 10 kgf·m).

This torque is equivalent to applying about

88 to 110 lbs (40 to 50 kg) at the top of the

wheel nut wrench. Never use your foot on

the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension

on the wrench because you may exceed

the specified torque. Have the wheel nut

torque checked at the nearest automotive

service facility.

15. Store the flat tire in the spare tire

compartment.

Put the spacer and tighten the attaching

bolt firmly.

Also store the jack and wheel nut wrench

in their storage locations.

WARNING

Never place a tire or tire changing

tools in the passenger compartment

after changing wheels. In a sudden

stop or collisions, loose equipment

could strike occupants and cause

injury. Store the tire and all tools in

the proper place.

& Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (if equipped)

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with the warning message

indicated by sending a signal from a

sensor that is installed in each wheel

when tire pressure is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will

In case of emergency 9-7

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (274,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

9-8 In case of emergency

activate only when the vehicle is driven.

Also, this system may not react immedi-

ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example, a blow-out caused running over

a sharp object).

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

comes on while driving, never brake

suddenly and keep driving straight

ahead while gradually reducing

speed. Then slowly pull off the road

to a safe place. Otherwise an acci-

dent involving serious vehicle da-

mage and serious personal injury

could occur.

Check the pressure for all four tires

and adjust the pressure to the COLD

tire pressure shown on the vehicle

placard on the door pillar on the

driver’s side. If this light still comes

on while driving after adjusting the

tire pressure, a tire may have sig-

nificant damage and a fast leak that

causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If

you have a flat tire, replace it with a

spare tire as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute. This indicates

the TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting.

Do not inject any tire liquid or

aerosol tire sealant into the tires,

as this may cause a malfunction of

the tire pressure sensors.

If the light illuminates steadily after

blinking for approximately one min-

ute, promptly contact a SUBARU

dealer to have the system inspected.

Jump starting

WARNING

. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.

Do not let it come in contact with

the eyes, skin, clothing or the

vehicle.

If battery fluid gets on you,

thoroughly flush the exposed

area with water immediately. Get

medical help if the fluid has

entered your eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water,

and obtain immediate medical

help.

Keep everyone including chil-

dren away from the battery.

. The gas generated by a battery

explodes if a flame or spark is

brought near it. Do not smoke or

light a match while jump starting.

. Never attempt jump starting if the

discharged battery is frozen. It

could cause the battery to burst

or explode.

. Whenever working on or around

a battery, always wear suitable

Black plate (275,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

eye protectors, and remove metal

objects such as rings, bands or

other metal jewelry.

. Be sure the jumper cables and

clamps on them do not have

loose or missing insulation.

Do not jump start unless cables

in suitable condition are avail-

able.

. A running engine can be danger-

ous. Keep your fingers, hands,

clothing, hair and tools away

from the cooling fan, belts and

any other moving engine parts.

Removing rings, watches and

ties is advisable.

. Jump starting is dangerous if it is

done incorrectly. If you are un-

sure about the proper procedure

for jump starting, consult a com-

petent mechanic.

When your vehicle does not start due to a

run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle

may be jump started by connecting your

battery to another battery (called the

booster battery) with jumper cables.

& How to jump start

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12

volts and the negative terminal is

grounded.

2. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and

accessories.

4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in

the sequence illustrated.

In case of emergency 9-9

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (276,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

9-10 In case of emergency

1) Booster battery

2) Engine lifting bracket

(1) Connect one jumper cable to the

positive (+) terminal on the discharged

battery.

(2) Connect the other end of the

jumper cable to the positive (+) term-

inal of the booster battery.

(3) Connect one end of th e other

cable to the negative (− ) terminal of

the booster battery.

(4) Connect the other end of the cable

to the engine lifting bracket.

Make sure that the cables are not near

any moving parts and that the cable

clamps are not in contact with any other

metal.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the

booster battery and run it at moderate

speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle

that has the discharged battery.

6. When finis hed, carefully disconnect

the cables in exactly the reverse order.

Black plate (277,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Engine overheating

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radia-

tor cap until the engine has been

shut off and has fully cooled down.

When the engine is hot, the coolant

is under pressure. Removing the

cap while the engine is still hot

could release a spray of boiling hot

coolant, which could burn you very

seriously.

If the engine overheats, safely pull off the

road and stop the vehicle in a safe place.

& If steam is coming from the

engine compartment

Turn off the engine and get everyone

away from the vehicle until it cools down.

& If no steam is coming from

the engine compartment

1. Keep the engine running at idling

speed.

2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine

compartment.

Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If

the fan is not turning, immediately turn off

the engine and contact your authorized

dealer for repair.

3. After the engine coolant temperature

has dropped, turn off the engine.

If the temperature gauge stays at the

overheated zone, turn off the engine.

4. After the engine has fully cooled down,

check the coolant level in the reserve

tank.

If the coolant level is below the “LOW”

mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.

5. If there is no coolant in the reserve

tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.

Then remove the radiator cap and fill the

radiator with coolant.

If you remove the radiator cap from a hot

radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the

radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-

clockwise slowly without pressing down

until it stops. Release the pressure from

the radiator. After the pressure has been

fully released, remove the cap by pressing

down and turning it.

Towing

WARNING

Never tow AWD vehicles (both AT

and MT) with the front wheels raised

off the ground while the rear wheels

are on the ground, or with the rear

wheels raised off the ground while

the front wheels are on the ground.

This will cause the vehicle to spin

away due to the operation or dete-

rioration of the center differential.

If towing is necessary, it is best done by

your SUBARU dealer or a commercial

towing service. Observe the following

procedures for safety.

In case of emergency 9-11

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (278,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

9-12 In case of emergency

& Towing and tie-down hooks

The towing hooks should be used only in

an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle

from mud, sand or snow).

CAUTION

. Use only the specified towing

hooks and tie-down hooks. Never

use suspension parts or other

parts of the body for towing or

tie-down purposes.

. Never use the tie-down hook

closest to the muffler under the

vehicle for towing purposes.

. To prevent deformation to the

bumper and the towing hook, do

not apply excessive lateral load

to the towing hooks.

Front towing hook:

Rear towing hook:

Tie-down hooks:

1) Tie-down hooks

2) Towing and tie-down hooks

Black plate (279,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Using a flat-bed truck

This is the best way to transport your

vehicle. Use the following procedures to

ensure safe transportation.

1. Shift the selector lever into the “P”

position for automatic transmission vehi-

cles or “1st” for manual transmission

vehicles.

2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly.

3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier

properly with safety chains. Each safety

chain should be equally tightened and

care must be taken not to pull the chains

so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.

& Towing with all wheels on the

ground

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch to

the “LOCK” position while the

vehicle is being towed because

the steering wheel and the direc-

tion of the wheels will be locked.

. Remember that the brake booster

and power steering do not func-

tion wh en the engine is not

running. Because the engine is

turned off, it will take greater

effort to operate the brake pedal

and steering wheel.

CAUTION

. If transmission failure occurs,

transport your vehicle on a flat-

bed truck.

. Do not run the engine while being

towed using this method. Trans-

mission damage could result if

the vehicle is towed with the

engine running.

. For vehicles with automatic

transmission, the traveling speed

must be limited to less than 20

mph (30 km/h) and the traveling

distance to less than 31 miles (50

km). For greater speeds and

distances, transport your vehicle

on a flat-bed truck.

1. Check the transmission and differen-

tial oil levels and add oil to bring it to the

upper level if necessary.

2. Release the parking brake and put the

transmission in neutral.

3. The ignition switch should be in the

“Acc” position while the vehicle is being

towed.

4. Take up slack in the towline slowly to

prevent damage to the vehicle.

In case of emergency 9-13

Black plate (280,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

9-14 In case of emergency

Rear gate – if the rear gate

cannot be unlocked

In the event that you cannot unlock the

rear gate by operating the power door

locking switches or the remote keyless

entry system, you can unlock it from inside

the cargo area.

1. Remove the access cover at the

bottom-center of the rear gate trim.

2. Locate the rear gate lock release lever

behind the rear gate trim panel.

3. Unlock the rear gate by pressing the

lever inside the trim upward.

4. Open the rear gate from outside by

raising the rear gate handle.

Moonroof – if the moonroof

cannot be closed

If the moonroof cannot be closed with the

moonroof switch, you can close the moon-

roof manually.

1. Remove the plug on the roof trim

located to the rear of the moonroof by

inserting the end of the flat-head screw-

driver between the roof and plug and

prying it off.

Black plate (281,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

2. Insert a hex-head wrench in the end of

the motor shaft.

To close the moonroof, turn the wrench

counterclockwise.

Have your vehicle checked and repaired

by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

Maintenance tools

Your vehicle is equipped with the following

maintenance tools:

Wheel nut wrench

Screwdriver

Hex-head wrench (for vehicle with moon-

roof)

Wheel cover remover (only for vehicles

with wheel covers)

& Jack and jack handle

The jack is stored under the left side of the

cargo floor.

The jack handle is stowed under the rear-

left and center lids in the cargo area.

In case of emergency 9-15

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (282,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

9-16 In case of emergency

For how to use the jack, refer to the “Flat

tires” section in this chapter.

Black plate (19,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Exterior care ....................................................... 10-2

Washing............................................................. 10-2

Waxing and polishing ......................................... 10-3

Cleaning aluminum wheels ................................. 10-3

Corrosion protection.......................................... 10-4

Most common causes of corrosion ..................... 10-4

To help prevent corrosion................................... 10-4

Cleaning the interior.......................................... 10-5

Seat fabric......................................................... 10-5

Leather seat materials........................................ 10-5

Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 10-5

Ashtray (Canada only, if equipped) ..................... 10-5

Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument

panel, console panel, switches, combination

meter, and other plastic surfaces ..................... 10-6

Appearance care

Black plate (286,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

10-2 Appearance care

Exterior care

& Washing

CAUTION

. When washing the vehicle, the

brakes may get wet. As a result,

the brake stopping distance will

be longer. To dry the brakes,

drive the vehicle at a safe speed

while lightly pressing the brake

pedal to heat up the brakes.

. Do not wash the engine compart-

ment and area adjacent to it. If

water enters the engine air in-

take, electrical parts or the power

steering fluid reservoir, it will

cause engine trouble or faulty

power steering respectively.

. Since your vehicle is equipped

with a rear wiper, automatic car-

wash brushes could become

tangled around it, damaging the

wiper arm and other compo-

nents. Ask the automatic car-

wash operator not to let the

brushes touch the wiper arm or

to fix the wiper arm on the rear

window glass with adhesive tape

before operating the machine.

NOTE

When having your vehicle washed in

an automatic car wash, make sure

beforehand that the car wash is of

suitable type.

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s

beauty is frequent washing. Wash the

vehicle at least once a month to avoid

contamination by road grime.

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty

of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash

the vehicle with hot water and in direct

sunlight.

Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree sap

and bird droppings should be washed off

by using a light detergent, as required. If

you use a light detergent, make certain

that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use

strong soap or chemical detergents. All

cleaning agents should be promptly

flushed from the surface and not allowed

to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly

with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the

remaining water off with a chamois or soft

cloth.

! Washing the underbody

Chemicals, salts and gravel used for

deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-

rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-

derbody components, such as the exhaust

system, fuel and brake lines, brake

cables, floor pan and fenders, and sus-

pension.

Thoroughly flush the underbody and in-

side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold

water at frequent intervals to reduce the

harmful effects of such agents.

Mud and sand adhering to the underbody

components may accelerate their corro-

sion.

After driving off-road or muddy or sandy

roads, wash the mud and sand off the

underbody.

Carefully flush the suspension and axle

parts, as they are particularly prone to

mud and sand buildup. Do not use a

sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.

Black plate (287,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

NOTE

Be careful not to damage brake hoses,

sensor harnesses, and other parts

when washing suspe nsion compo-

nents.

! Using a warm water washer

. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)

or more between the washer nozzle and

the vehicle.

. Do not wash the same area continu-

ously.

. If a stain will not come out easily, wash

by hand. Some warm water washers are

of the high temperature, high pressure

type, and they can damage or deform the

resin parts such as mouldings, or cause

water to leak into the vehicle.

& Waxing and polishing

Always wash and dry the vehicle before

waxing and polishing.

Use a good quality polish and wax and

apply them according to the manufac-

turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when

the painted surface is cool.

Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,

as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of

wax on a painted surface leads to loss of

the original luster and also quickens the

deterioration of the surface. It is recom-

mended that a coat of wax be applied at

least once a month, or whenever the

surface no longer repels water.

If the appearance of the paint has dimin-

ished to the point where the luster or tone

cannot be restored, lightly polish the

surface with a fine-grained compound.

Never polish just the affected area, but

include the surrounding area as well.

Always polish in only one direction. A

No. 2000 grain compound is recom-

mended. Never use a coarse-grained

compound. Coarser grained compounds

have a smaller grain-size number and

could damage the paint. After polishing

with a compound, coat with wax to restore

the original luster. Frequent polishing with

acompoundoranincorrectpolishing

technique will result in removing the paint

layer and exposing the undercoat. When

in doubt, it is always best to contact your

SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia-

list.

NOTE

Be careful not to block the windshield

washer nozzles with wax when waxing

the vehicle.

& Cleaning aluminum wheels

. Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels

clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt

is left on too long, it may be difficult to

clean off.

. Do not use soap containing grit to

clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral

cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly

with water. Do not clean the wheels with a

stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed

washing device.

. Clean the vehicle (including the alumi-

num wheels) with water as soon as

possible when it has been splashed with

sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or

driven on roads treated with salt or other

agents.

Appearance care 10-3

Black plate (288,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

10-4 Appearance care

Corrosion protection

Your SUBARU has been designed and

built to resist corrosion. Special materials

and protective finishes have been used on

most parts of the vehicle to help maintain

fine appearance, strength, and reliable

operation.

& Most common causes of

corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion

are:

1. The accumulation of moisture retain-

ing dirt and debris in body panel sections,

cavities, and other areas.

2. Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone

chips or minor accidents.

Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle

when:

1. It is exposed to road salt or dust

control chemicals, or used in coastal

areas where there is more salt in the air,

or in areas where there is considerable

industrial pollution.

2. It is driven in areas of high humidity,

especially when temperatures range just

above freezing.

3. Dampness in certain parts of the

vehicle remains for a long time, even

though other parts of the vehicle may be

dry.

4. High temperatures will cause corro-

sion to parts of the vehicle which cannot

dry quickly due to lack of proper ventila-

tion.

& To help prevent corrosion

Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent

corrosion of the body and suspension

components. Also, wash the v ehicle

promptly after driving on any of the

following surfaces:

. roads that have been salted to prevent

them from freezing in winter

. mud, sand, or gravel

. coastal roads

After the winter has ended, it is recom-

mended that the underbody be given a

very thorough washing.

Before the beginning of winter, check the

condition of underbody components, such

as the exhaust system, fuel and brake

lines, brake cables, suspension, steering

system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of

them are found to be rusted, they should

be given an appropriate rust prevention

treatment or should be replaced. Contact

your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind

of maintenance and treatment if you need

assistance.

Repair chips and scratches in the paint as

soon as you find them.

Check the interior of the vehicle for water

and dirt accumulation under the floor mats

because that could cause corrosion.

Occasionally check under the mats to

make sure the area is dry.

Keep your garage dry. Do not park your

vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated

garage. In such a garage, corrosion can

be caused by dampness. If you wash the

vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle

into the garage when wet or covered with

snow, that can cause dampness.

If your vehicle is operated in cold weather

and/or in areas where road salts and other

corrosive materials are used, the door

hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hood

latch should be inspected and lubricated

periodically.

Black plate (289,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Cleaning the interior

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate

control panel, audio equipment, instru-

ment panel, center console, combination

meter panel, and switches. (Do not use

organic solvents.)

& Seat fabric

Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a

vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the

fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum

cleaner, use a soft blush then vacuum it.

Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly

wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric

thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe

using a solution of mild soap and luke-

warm water then dry thoroughly.

If the stain does not come out, try a

commercially-available fabric cleaner. Use

the cleaner on a hidden place and make

sure it does not affect the fabric adversely.

Use the cleaner according to its instruc-

tions.

NOTE

When cleaning the seat, do not use

benzine, paint thinner, or any similar

materials.

& Leather seat materials

The leather used by SUBARU is a high

quality natural product which will retain its

distinctive appearance and feel for many

years with proper care.

Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the

surface can cause the material to become

brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular

cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber

cloth should be performed monthly, taking

care not to soak the leather or allow water

to penetrate the stitched seams.

A mild detergent suitable for cleaning

woolen fabrics may be used to remove

difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry

cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If

your SUBARU is to be parked for a long

time in bright sunlight, it is recommended

that the seats and headrests be covered,

or the windows shaded, to prevent fading

or shrinkage.

Minor surface blemishes or bald patches

may be treated with a commercial leather

spray lacquer. You will discover that each

leather seat section will develop soft folds

or wrinkles, which is characteristic of

genuine leather.

& Synthetic leather upholstery

The synthetic leather material used on the

SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap

or detergent and water, after first vacuum-

ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the

soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe

off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial

foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic

leather materials may be used when

necessary.

NOTE

Strong cleaning agents such as sol-

vents, paint thinners, window cleaner

or gasoline must never be used on

leather or synthetic interior materials.

& Ashtray (Canada only, if

equipped)

Particles of ash and tobacco will accumu-

late around the hinges of the ashtray’s

inner lid. Clean them off using a tooth-

Appearance care 10-5

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (290,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

10-6 Appearance care

brush or other narrow-ended implement.

& Climate control panel, audio

panel, instrument panel,

console panel, switches,

combination meter, and other

plastic surfaces

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate

control panel, audio equipment, instru-

ment panel, center console, combination

meter panel, and switches. (Do not use

organic solvents.)

NOTE

Do not use organic solvents such as

paint thinners or gasoline, or strong

cleaning agents that cont ain those

solvents.

Black plate (21,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Maintenance schedule ....................................... 11-3

Maintenance precautions................................... 11-3

Before checking or servicing in the engine

compartment.................................................... 11-4

When you do checking or servicing in the engine

compartment while the engine is running.......... 11-4

Engine hood ....................................................... 11-4

Engine compartment overview.......................... 11-6

Non-turbo models .............................................. 11-6

Turbo models..................................................... 11-7

Engine oil............................................................ 11-8

Checking the oil level ......................................... 11-8

Changing the oil and oil filter .............................. 11-9

Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-10

Recommended grade and viscosity under severe

driving conditions .......................................... 11-11

Synthetic oil..................................................... 11-11

Cooling system ................................................ 11-12

Cooling fan, hose and connections................... 11-12

Engine coolant ................................................. 11-12

Air cleaner element .......................................... 11-15

Replacing the air cleaner element ..................... 11-15

Spark plugs ...................................................... 11-17

Recommended spark plugs .............................. 11-18

Drive belts ........................................................ 11-18

Manual transmission oil .................................. 11-19

Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-19

Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-20

Automatic transmission fluid.......................... 11-20

Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-20

Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-21

Front differential gear oil (AT vehicles).......... 11-21

Checking the oil level ...................................... 11-21

Recommended grade and viscosity.................. 11-22

Rear differential gear oil.................................. 11-22

Checking the gear oil level............................... 11-22

Recommended grade and viscosity.................. 11-23

Power steering fluid ........................................ 11-24

Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-24

Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-25

Brake fluid........................................................ 11-25

Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-25

Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-26

Clutch fluid (MT vehicles) ............................... 11-26

Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-26

Recommended clutch fluid............................... 11-27

Brake booster .................................................. 11-27

Brake pedal ...................................................... 11-27

Checking the brake pedal free play .................. 11-27

Checking the brake pedal reserve distance....... 11-28

Clutch pedal (MT vehicles).............................. 11-28

Checking the clutch function ............................ 11-28

Checking the clutch pedal free play.................. 11-28

Hill holder (MT vehicles – if equipped) .......... 11-29

Maintenance and service

Black plate (22,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Maintenance and service

Replacement of brake pad and lining............. 11-29

Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings........ 11-29

Parking brake stroke........................................ 11-30

Tires and wheels .............................................. 11-30

Types of tires ................................................... 11-30

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

(if equipped)................................................... 11-31

Tire inspection ................................................. 11-32

Tire pressures and wear ................................... 11-33

Wheel balance.................................................. 11-34

Wear indicators................................................ 11-35

Tire rotation direction mark .............................. 11-35

Tire rotation ..................................................... 11-35

Tire replacement .............................................. 11-36

Wheel replacement........................................... 11-36

Aluminum wheels (if equipped) ...................... 11-37

Windshield washer fluid.................................. 11-37

Replacement of wiper blades ......................... 11-39

Windshield wiper blades .................................. 11-39

Rear window wiper blade ................................. 11-40

Battery .............................................................. 11-42

Fuses ................................................................ 11-43

Main fuse.......................................................... 11-44

Installation of accessories .............................. 11-45

Replacing bulbs ............................................... 11-46

Headlights (Vehicle with HID headlights)........... 11-48

Headlights (Vehicle without HID headlights)...... 11-48

Rear combination lights ................................... 11-50

License plate light ........................................... 11-50

Dome light and map light ................................. 11-51

High mount stop light ...................................... 11-51

Black plate (293,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Maintenance schedule

The scheduled maintenance items re-

quired to be serviced at regular intervals

are shown in the “Warranty and Main-

tenance Booklet”.

For details of your maintenance schedule,

read the separate “Warranty and Main-

tenance Booklet”.

Maintenance precautions

When maintenance and service are re-

quired, it is recommended that all work be

done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

If you perform maintenance and service

by yourself, you should familiarize yourself

with the information provided in this

section on general maintenance and

service for your SUBARU.

Incorrect or incomplete service could

cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-

tion. Any problems caused by improper

maintenance and service performed by

you are not eligible for warranty coverage.

WARNING

. Testing of an All-Wheel Drive

vehicle must NEVER be per-

formed on a single two-wheel

dynamometer or similar appara-

tus. Attempting to do so will

result in transmi ssion damage

and in uncontrolled vehicle

movement and may cause an

accident or injuries to persons

nearby.

. Always select a safe area when

performing maintenance on your

vehicle.

. Always be very careful to avoid

injury when working on the vehi-

cle. Remember that some of the

materials in the vehicle may be

hazardous if improperly used or

handled, for example, battery

acid.

. Your vehicle should only be ser-

viced by persons fully competent

to do so. Serious personal injury

may result to persons not experi-

enced in servicing vehicles.

. Always use the proper tools and

make certain that they are well

maintained.

. Never get under the vehicle sup-

ported only by a jack. Always use

a safety stands to support the

vehicle.

. Never keep the engine running in

a poorly ventilated area, such as

a garage or other closed areas.

. Do not smoke or all ow open

flames around the fuel or battery.

This will cause a fire.

. Because the fuel system is under

pressure, replacement of the fuel

filter should be performed only

by your SUBARU dealer.

. Wear adequate eye protection to

Maintenance and service 11-3

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (294,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

11-4 Maintenance and service

guard against getting oil or fluids

in your eyes. If something does

get in your eyes, thoroughly

wash them out with clean water.

. Do not tamper with the wiring of

the SRS airbag system or seat-

belt pretensioner system, or at-

tempt to take its connectors

apart, as that may activate the

system or it can render it inop-

erative. The wiring and connec-

tors of these systems are yellow

for easy identification. NEVER

use a circuit tester for these

wiring.

If your SRS airbag or seatbelt

pretensioner needs service, con-

sult your nearest SUBARU deal-

er.

& Before checking or servicing

in the engine compartment

WARNING

. Always stop the engine and set

the parking brake firmly to pre-

vent the vehicle from moving.

. Always let the engine cool down.

Engine parts become very hot

when the engine is running and

remain hot for some time after

the engine is stopped.

. Do not spill engine oil, engine

coolant, brake fluid or any other

fluid on hot engine components.

This may cause a fire.

. Always remove the key from the

ignition switch. When the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position,

thecoolingfanmayoperate

suddenly even when the engine

is stopped.

& When you do checking or

servicing in the engine com-

partment while the engine is

running

WARNING

A running engine can be dangerous.

Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,

hair and tools away from the cooling

fan, belts and any other moving

engine parts. Removing rings,

watches and ties is advisable.

Engine hood

To open the hood:

1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the

windshield, return them to their original

positions.

2. Pull the hood release knob under the

instrument panel.

Black plate (295,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

3. Release the secondary hood release

located under the front grille by moving the

lever toward the left.

Lift up the hood, release the hood prop

from its retainer and put the end of the

hood prop into the slot in the hood.

To close the hood:

1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the

hood prop from the slot in the hood and

return the prop to its retainer.

2. Lower the hood until it approaches

approximately 12 in (30 cm) from the

closed position and let it drop.

After closing the hood, be sure the hood is

securely locked.

If this does not close the hood, release it

from a slightly higher position. Do not push

the hood forcibly to close it. It could

deform the metal.

WARNING

Always check that the hood is

properly locked be fore you start

driving. If it is not, it might fly open

while the vehicle is moving and

block your view, which may cause

an accident and serious bodily in-

jury.

Maintenance and service 11-5

Black plate (296,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

11-6 Maintenance and service

Engine compartment overview

& Non-turbo models

1) Air cleaner element (page 11-15)

2) Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT)

(page 11-19) or Differential gear oil level

gauge (AT) (page 11-21)

3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-26)

4) Automatic transmission fluid level gauge

(page 11-20)

5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-25)

6) Fuse box (page 11-43)

7) Battery (page 11-42)

8) Windshield washer tank (page 11-37)

9) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-12)

10) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-8)

11) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-8)

12) Radiator cap (page 11-12)

13) Power steering fluid reservoir

(page 11-24)

Black plate (297,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Turbo models

1) Air cleaner element (page 11-15)

2) Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT)

(page 11-19) or Differential gear oil level

gauge (AT) (page 11-21)

3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-26)

4) Automatic transmission fluid level gauge

(page 11-20)

5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-25)

6) Fuse box (page 11-43)

7) Battery (page 11-42)

8) Windshield washer tank (page 11-37)

9) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-12)

10) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-8)

11) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-8)

12) Radiator cap (page 11-12)

13) Power steering fluid reservoir

(page 11-24)

Maintenance and service

11-7

Black plate (298,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

11-8 Maintenance and service

Engine oil

NOTE

. The engine oil consumption rate is

not stabilized, and therefore cannot be

determined until the vehicle has tra-

veled at least several thousand miles

(kilometers). Even after break-in, when

the vehicle is used under severe driv-

ing conditions such as those men-

tionedintheWarrantyandMainte-

nance Booklet, engine oil is consumed

or deteriorated more quickly than un-

der normal driving conditions. If you

drive your vehicle under these severe

conditions, you should check the oil

level at least at every second fuel fill-up

time, and change the oil more fre-

quently. Please refer to the Warranty

and Maintenance Booklet for more de-

tails.

. If the oil consumption rate seems

abnormally high after the break-in

period, for example more than 1 quart

per 1,200 miles or 1 liter per 2,000

kilometers, we recommend that you

contact your SUBARU dealer.

& Checking the oil level

Check the engine oil level at each fuel

stop.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine.

2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and

insert it again.

3. Be sure the dipstick is correctly in-

serted until it stops with the graphic

symbol “

” on its top appearing as

shown in the illustration.

1) Notch

2) Upper level

3) Lower level

4. Pull out the dipstick again and check

the oil level on it. If it is below the lower

level, add oil to bring the level up to the

upper level.

CAUTION

. Use only engine oil with the

recommended grade and vis-

cosity.

Black plate (299,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

. Be careful not to spill engine oil

when adding it. If oil touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

engine oil gets on the exhaust

pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

If you check the oil level just after stopping

the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to

drain back into the oil pan before checking

the level.

Just after driving or while the engine is

warm, the engine oil level reading may be

in a range between the upper level and

the notch mark. This is caused by thermal

expansion of the engine oil.

To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not

add any additional oil above the upper

level when the engine is cold.

& Changing the oil and oil filter

Change the oil and oil filter according to

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

The engine o il and oil filter must be

changed more frequently than listed in

the maintenance schedule when driving

on dusty roads, when short trips are

frequently made, when towing a trailer, or

when driving in extremely cold weather.

1. Warm up the engine by letting the

engine idle for approximately 10 minutes

to ease draining the engine oil.

2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine.

3. Remove the oil filler cap.

4. Open the access cover by removing

the eight clips and turning the access

cover counterclockwise. The drain plug

will be exposed.

5. Drain out the engine oil by removing

the drain plug while the engine is still

warm. The used oil should be drained into

an appropriate container and disposed of

properly.

WARNING

Be careful not to burn yourself with

hot engine oil.

6. Wipe the seating surface of the drain

plug with a clean cloth and tighten it

securely with a new sealing washer after

the oil has completely drained out.

Maintenance and service 11-9

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (300,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

11-10 Maintenance and service

7. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter

wrench.

8. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a

thin coat of engine oil to the seal.

9. Clean the rubber seal seating area of

the bottom of engine and install the oil

filter by hand turning. Be careful not to

twist or damage the seal.

10. Tighten the oil filter by the amount

indicated in the following table after the

seal makes contact with the bottom of

engine.

Oil filter

color

Part

number

Amount of

rotation

Black

15208AA100 1 rotation

White 15208AA09A

2/3 – 3/4

rotation

CAUTION

. Never over tighten the oil filter

because that can result in an oil

leak.

. Thoroughly wipe off any engine

oil that has spilled over the

exhaust pipe and/or under-cover.

If left unremoved, the oil could

catch fire.

11. Close the access cover by turning it

clockwise and reinstall the eight clips in

their original positions.

12. Pour engine oil through the filler neck.

Oil capacity (Guideline):

4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)

The oil quantity indicated above is only a

guideline. The necessary quantity of oil

depends on the quantity of oil that has

been drained. The quantity of drained oil

differs slightly depending on the tempera-

ture of the oil and the time the oil is left

flowing out. After pouring oil into the

engine, therefore, you must use the dip-

stick to confirm that the level is correct.

13. Start the engine and make sure that no

oil leaks appear around the filter’s rubber

seal.

14. Run the engine until it reaches the

normal operating temperature. Then stop

the engine and wait a few minutes to allow

the oil drain back. Check the oil level

again and if necessary, add more engine

oil.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity

Oil grade:

ILSAC GF-4, which can be identified with

the ILSAC certification mark (Starburst

mark)

or API classification SM with the words

“ENERGY CONSERVING”

These recommended oil grades can be

identified by looking for either or both of

the following marks displayed on the oil

container.

Black plate (301,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

API Service label

1) Indicates the oil quality by API designa-

tions

2) Indicates the SAE oil viscosity grade

3) Indicates that the oil has fuel saving

capabilities

ILSAC Certification Mark (Starburst Mark)

In choosing an oil, you want the proper

quality and viscosity, as well as one that

will add to fuel economy. The following

table lists the recommended viscosities

and applicable temperatures.

When adding oil, different brands may be

used together as long as they are the

same API classification and SAE viscosity

as those recommended by SUBARU.

SAE viscosity number and applicable

temperature

*: 5W-30 is recommended.

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel

economy. Oils of lower viscosity provide

better fuel economy. However, in hot

weather, oil of higher viscosity is required

to properly lubricate the engine.

CAUTION

Use only engine oil with the recom-

mended grade and viscosity.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity under severe driv-

ing conditions

If the vehicle is used in desert areas, in

areas with very high temperatures, or

used for heavy-duty applications such as

towing a trailer, use of oil with the following

grade and viscosities is recommended.

API classification SM (or SL):

SAE viscosity No.:

30, 40, 10W-50, 20W-40, 20W-50

& Synthetic oil

You can use synthetic engine oil that

meets the same requirements given for

conventional engine oil. When using

synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same

classification, viscosity and grade shown

in this Owner’s Manual, and must follow

the oil and filter changing intervals shown

in the maintenance schedule.

Maintenance and service 11-11

Black plate (302,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 30

11-12 Maintenance and service

Cooling system

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radia-

tor cap until the engine has been

shut off and has cooled down

completely. Since the coolant is

under pressure, you may suffer

serious burns from a spray of boil-

ing hot coolant when the cap is

removed.

CAUTION

. The cooling system has been

filled at the factory with a high

quality, corrosion-inhibiting,

year-around coolant which pro-

vides protection against freezing

down to −338F(−368C).

Subaru engines use aluminum

components that require the

anti-corrosive and anti-freeze

properties of Subaru Genuine

Coolant, which is specifically

formulated for the Subaru cool-

ing system. Failure to use Subaru

Genuine Coolant along with

Subaru Cooling System Condi-

tioner at the recommended main-

tenance intervals may result in

problems, including, but not lim-

ited to shortened life of engine

components and cooling system

clogging, coolant leaks and en-

gine damage from overheating.

Problems caused by the failure to

use Subaru Genuine Coolant and

Subaru Cooling System Condi-

tioner at recommended intervals

are not covered under the

Subaru Limited Warranty.

While there may be other generic

products that may provide the

required protection, they have

not been tested for compatibility

with Subaru engines and cooling

system components, and there-

fore they are not recommended.

. Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

& Cooling fan, hose and con-

nections

Your vehicle employs an electric cooling

fan which is thermostatically controlled to

operate when the engine coolant reaches

a specific temperature.

If the radiator cooling fan does not operate

even when the engine coolant tempera-

ture gauge exceeds the normal operating

range, the cooling fan circuit may be

defective. Check the fuse and replace it

if necessary. If the fuse is not blown, have

the cooling system checked by your

SUBARU dealer.

If frequent addition of coolant is neces-

sary, there may be a leak in the engine

cooling system. It is recommended that

the cooling system and connections be

checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.

& Engine coolant

! Checking the coolant level

1) “FULL” level mark

2) “LOW” level mark

Black plate (303,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.

1. Check the coolant level on the outside

of the reservoir while the engine is cool.

2. If the level is close to or lower than the

“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the

“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is

empty, remove the radiator cap and refill

as required.

3. After refilling the reserve tank and the

radiator, reinstall the caps and check that

the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap

are in the proper position.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to spill engi ne

coolant when adding it. If coolant

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If engine coolant gets on

the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe

it off.

. Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

! Changing the coolant

Always add genuine Subaru cooling sys-

tem conditioner whenever the coolant is

replaced.

Change the engine coolant and add

genuine Subaru cooling system condi-

tioner using the following procedures

according to the maintenance schedule.

1. Remove the under cover.

2. Place a proper container under the

drain plug and loosen the drain plug.

3. Loosen the radiator cap to drain the

coolant from the radiator. Then drain the

coolant from the reserve tank. Tighten the

drain plug securely.

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radia-

tor cap until the engine has been

shut off and has cooled down

completely. Since the coolant is

under pressure, you may suffer

serious burns from a spray of boil-

ing hot coolant when the cap is

removed.

4. Install the under cover.

Maintenance and service 11-13

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (304,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

11-14 Maintenance and service

Non-turbo models

1) Filler neck

2) Fill up to this level

Turbo models

1) Filler neck

2) Fill up to this level

5. Slowly pour the coolant and fill up to

just below the filler neck, allowing enough

room to add genuine Subaru cooling

system conditioner in the radiator. Add

genuine Subaru cooling system condi-

tioner until the coolant level reaches the

filler neck. Do not pour the coolant too

quickly, as this may lead to insufficient air

bleeding and trapped air in the system.

Guideline of coolant quantity (including

coolant in reservoir tank):

Non-turbo models:

MT: 7.3 US qt (6.9 liters, 6.1 Imp qt)

AT: 7.2 US qt (6.8 liters, 6.0 Imp qt)

Turbo models:

MT: 7.8 US qt (7.4 liters, 6.5 Imp qt)

AT: 7.7 US qt (7.3 liters, 6.4 Imp qt)

1) “FULL” level mark

2) “LOW” level mark

6. Pour the coolant and fill to the reser-

voir tank’s “FULL” level mark.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to spill engine

coolant when adding it. If coolant

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If engine coolant gets on

the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe

it off.

. Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

Black plate (305,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

7. Put the radiator cap back on and

tighten firmly. At this time, make sure that

the rubber gasket in the radiator cap is

correctly in place.

8. Start and run the engine for more than

five minutes at 2,000 to 3,000 rpm.

9. Stop the engine and wait until the

coolant cools down (122 to 1408F [50 to

608C]). If there is any loss of coolant, add

coolant to the radiator’s filler neck and to

the reserve tank’s “FULL” level.

10. Put the radiator cap and reservoir cap

back on and tighten firmly.

Air cleaner element

WARNING

Do not operate the engine with the

air cleaner element removed. The air

cleaner element not only filters

intake air but also stops flames if

the engine backfires. If the air

cleaner element is not installed

when the engine backfires, you

could be burned.

The air cleaner element functions as a

filter screen. When the element is perfo-

rated or removed, engine wear will be

excessive and engine life shortened.

The air cleaner element has a viscous

type and a dry type.

Be sure to use the appropriate type of air

cleaner element, which depends on the

vehicle type.

If there is the embossed requirement “Use

of genuine dry air cleaner element is

required” on the air cleaner case cover,

which is shown in the following figure, use

the dry type air cleaner element.

For vehicles without the requirement on

the air cleaner case cover, use the viscous

type air cleaner element.

1) Embossed requirement

& Replacing the air cleaner

element

Replace the air cleaner element according

to the maintenance schedule in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Un-

der extremely dusty conditions, replace it

more frequently. It is recommended that

you always use genuine SUBARU parts.

Maintenance and service 11-15

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (306,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

11-16 Maintenance and service

! Non-turbo models

1. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air

cleaner case cover.

2. Push the air cleaner case cover in the

direction of the arrow shown in the

drawing.

1) Air cleaner case cover

2) Viscous air cleaner element

Dry air cleaner element (if required)

3. Open the air cleaner case cover and

remove the air cleaner element.

4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner

cover and case with a damp cloth and

install a new air cleaner element.

5. To install the air cleaner case cover,

insert the three projections on the air

cleaner case i nto the slits on the air

cleaner case cover and then snap the

two clamps on the air cleaner case cover.

Black plate (307,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

! Turbo models

1. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air

cleaner case cover.

2. Open the air cleaner case cover and

remove the air cleaner element.

3. Clean the inside of the air cleaner

cover and case with a damp cloth and

install a new air cleaner element.

4. To install the air cleaner case cover,

insert the two projections o n the air

cleaner case cover into the slits on the

air cleaner case and then snap the two

clamps on the air cleaner case cover.

Spark plugs

CAUTION

. When disconnecting the spark

plug cables, always grasp the

spark plug cap, not the cables.

. Make sure the cables are re-

placed in the correct order.

It may be difficult to replace the spark

plugs. It is recommended that you have

the spark plugs replaced by your

SUBARU dealer.

The spark plugs should be replaced

according to the maintenance schedule

in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-

let”.

Maintenance and service 11-17

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (308,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

11-18 Maintenance and service

& Recommended spark plugs

Non-turbo models:

FR5AP-11 (NGK)

Turbo models:

ILFR6B (NGK)

Drive belts

1) Power steering pump pulley

2) Air conditioner compressor pulley

3) Crank pulley

The alternator, power steering pump, and

air conditioner compressor depend on

drive belts. Satisfactory performance re-

quires that belt tension be correct.

To check belt tension, place a straight-

edge (ruler) across two adjacent pulleys

and apply a force of 22 lbs (98 N, 10 kg)

midway between the pulleys by using a

spring scale. Belt deflection should be the

amount specified. If a belt is loose,

cracked, or worn, contact your SUBARU

dealer.

in (mm)

Deflection

New belt

Used belt

0.28 – 0.35

(7.0 – 9.0)

0.35 – 0.43

(9.0 – 11.0)

0.30 – 0.33

(7.5 – 8.5)

0.35 – 0.40

(9.0 – 10.0)

Black plate (309,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Manual transmission oil

& Checking the oil level

Non-turbo models:

1) Yellow handle

Turbo models

Check the oil level monthly.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine.

2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and

insert it again.

1) Upper level

2) Lower level

3. Pull out the dipstick again and check

the oil level on it. If it is below the lower

level, add oil through the dipstick hole to

bring the level up to the upper level.

CAUTION

Be careful not to spill manual trans-

mission oil when adding it. If oil

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a

fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,

be sure to wipe it off.

Maintenance and service 11-19

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (310,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

11-20 Maintenance and service

& Recommended grade and

viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together.

Oil grade:

API classification GL-5

SAE viscosity No. and applicable tempera-

ture

Automatic transmission fluid

& Checking the fluid level

The automatic transmission fluid expands

largely as its temperature rises; the fluid

level differs according to fluid temperature.

Therefore, there are two different scales

for checking the level of hot fluid and cold

fluid on the dipstick.

Though the fluid level can be checked

without warming up the fluid on the

“COLD” range, we recommend checking

the fluid level when the fluid is at operating

temperature.

! Checking the fluid level when the

fluid is hot

Check the fluid level monthly.

1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise

the temperature of the transmission fluid

up to normal operating temperature; 154

to 1768F (70 to 808C) is normal.

2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

set the parking brake.

3. First shift the selector lever in each

position. Then shift it in the “P” position,

and run the engine at idling speed.

1) Yellow handle

1) HOT range

2) COLD range

3) Upper level

4) Lower level

Black plate (311,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

4. Pull out the dipstick and check the fluid

level on the gauge. If it is below the lower

level on the “HOT” range, add the recom-

mended automatic transmission fluid up to

the upper level.

! Checking the fluid level when the

fluid is cold

When the fluid level has to be checked

without time to warm up the automatic

transmission, check to see that the fluid

level is between the lower level and upper

level on the “COLD” range. If it is below

that range, add fluid up to the upper level.

Be careful not to overfill.

CAUTION

Be careful not to spill automatic

transmission fluid when adding it.

If automatic transmission fluid

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a

fire. If automatic transmission fluid

gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to

wipe it off.

& Recommended fluid

Use one of the following types of auto-

matic transmission fluid.

Genuine Subaru Automatic Transmis-

sion Fluid Type-HP

IDEMITSU ATF HP

Castrol Transmax J

NOTE

For optimum transmission perfor-

mance, only use the automatic trans-

mission fluid that is recommended and

provided by Subaru.

If the recommended automatic trans-

mission fluid is unavailable, Dexron III

may be temporarily used. If the Dexron

III is used continuously there will be a

noticeable increase in the vibration and

noise from the automatic transmission.

Front differential gear oil (AT

vehicles)

& Checking the oil level

1) Yellow handle

Check the differential oil level monthly.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine.

2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and

insert it again.

Maintenance and service 11-21

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (312,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

11-22 Maintenance and service

1) Upper level

2) Lower level

3. Pull out the dipstick again and check

the oil level on it. If it is below the lower

level, add oil to bring the level up to the

upper level.

CAUTION

Be careful not to spill front differ-

ential gear oil when adding it. If oil

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a

fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,

be sure to wipe it off.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together.

Oil grade:

API classification GL-5

SAE viscosity No. and applicable tempera-

ture

Rear differential gear oil

& Checking the gear oil level

Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear

differential protector. The differential pro-

tector provides protection to the rear

differential assembly during off-road use.

Removal of the rear differential protector is

not required when checking the oil level.

1) Filler plug

2) Drain plug

Black plate (313,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1) Filler hole

2) Drain hole

3) Oil level

Remove the plug from the filler hole and

check the oil level. The oil level should be

kept even with the bottom of the filler hole.

If the oil level is below the bottom edge of

the hole, add oil through the filler hole to

raise the level.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to spill rear differ-

ential gear oil when adding it. If

rear differential gear oil touches

the exhaust pipe, it may cause a

bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

rear differential gear oil gets on

the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe

it off.

. If the vehicle requires frequent

refilling, there may be an oil leak.

If you suspect a problem, have

the vehic le checked at your

SUBARU dealer.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together.

Oil grade:

API classification GL-5

SAE viscosity No. and applicable tempera-

ture

Maintenance and service

11-23

Black plate (314,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

11-24 Maintenance and service

Power steering fluid

& Checking the fluid level

1) Reservoir tank

WARNING

Be careful not to burn yourself

because the fluid may be hot.

CAUTION

. When power stee ring fluid is

being added, use only clean fluid,

and be careful not to allow any

dirt into the tank. And never use

different brands together.

. Avoid spilling fluid when adding

it in the tank.

. Be careful not to spill power

steering fluid when adding it. If

power steering fluid touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

power steering fluid gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

The power steering fluid expands greatly

as its temperature rises; the fluid level

differs according to fluid temperature.

Therefore, the reservoir tank has two

different checking ranges for hot and cold

fluids.

Check the power steering fluid level

monthly.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface,

and stop the engine.

1) Specified range

2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir

tank.

When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has

been run: Check that the oil level is

between “HOT MIN” and “HOT MAX” on

the surface of the reservoir tank.

When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is

run: Check that the oil level is between

“COLD MIN” and “COLD MAX” on the

surface of the reservoir tank.

3. If the fluid level is lower than the

app licable “MIN” line, add the recom-

mended fluid as necessary to bring the

level between the “MIN” and “MAX” line.

If the fluid level is extreme low, it may

indicate possible leakage. Consult your

SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

Black plate (315,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Recommended fluid

Use one of the following types of auto-

matic transmission fluid.

Genuine Subaru Automatic Transmis-

sion Fluid Type-HP

“Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmis-

sion Fluid

Brake fluid

& Checking the fluid level

WARNING

. Never let brake fluid contact your

eyes because brake fluid can be

harmful to your eyes. If brake

fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-

ately flush them thoroughly with

clean water. For safety, when

performing this work, wearing

eye protection is advisable.

. Brake fluid absorbs moisture

from the air. Any absorbed moist-

ure can cause a dangerous loss

of braking performance.

. If the vehicle requires frequent

refilling, there may be a leak. If

you suspect a problem, have the

vehicle checked at your SUBARU

dealer.

CAUTION

. Never use different brands of

brake fluid together. Also, avoid

mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake

fluids even if they are of the same

brand.

. When adding brake fluid, be care-

ful not to allow any dirt into the

reservoir.

. Never splash the brake fluid over

painted surfaces or rubber parts.

Alcohol contained in the brake

fluid may damage them.

. Be careful not to spill brake fluid

when adding it. If brake fluid

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If brake fluid gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

Check the fluid level monthly.

Check the fluid level on the outside of the

reservoir. If the level is below “MIN”, add

the recommended brake fluid to “MAX”.

Maintenance and service 11-25

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (316,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

11-26 Maintenance and service

Use only brake fluid from a sealed

container.

& Recommended brake fluid

FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake

fluid

Clutch fluid (MT vehicles)

& Checking the fluid level

WARNING

Never let clutch fluid contact your

eyes because clutch fluid can be

harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid

gets in your eyes, immediately flush

them thoroughly with clean water.

For safety, when performing this

work, wearing eye protection is

advisable.

CAUTION

. Clutch fluid a bsorbs moisture

from the air. Any absorbed moist-

ure can cause improper clutch

operation.

. If the vehicle requires frequent

refilling, there may be a leak. If

you suspect a problem, have the

vehicle checked at your SUBARU

dealer.

. Never use different brands of

clutch fluid together.

. When clutch fluid is added, be

careful not to allow any dirt into

the tank.

. Never splash the clutch fluid over

painted surfaces or rubber parts.

Alcohol contained in the clutch

fluid may damage them.

. Be careful not to spill clutch fluid

when adding it. If clutch fluid

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

Check the fluid level on the outside of the

reservoir. If the level is below “MIN” level

mark, add the recommended clutch fluid

to “MAX” level mark.

Use only clutch fluid from a sealed

container.

Black plate (317,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Recommended clutch fluid

FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4

brake fluid

CAUTION

Avoid mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4

brake fluids even if they are of the

same brand.

Brake booster

If the brake booster does not operate as

described in the following, have it checked

by your SUBARU dealer.

1. With the engine off, depress the brake

pedal several times, applying the same

pedal force each time. The distance the

pedal travels should not vary.

2. With the brake pedal depressed, start

the engine. The pedal shou ld move

slightly down to the floor.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop

the engine and keep the pedal depressed

for 30 seconds. The pedal height should

not change.

4. Start the engine again and run for

approximately one minute then turn it off.

Depress the brake pedal several times to

check the brake booster. The brake

booster operates properly if the pedal

stroke decreases with each depression.

Brake pedal

Check the brake pedal free play and

reserve distance according to the main-

tenance schedule in the “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.

& Checking the brake pedal

free play

1) 0.02 – 0.08 in (0.5 – 2.0 mm)

Stop the engine and firmly depress the

brake pedal several times. Lightly press

the brake pedal down with one finger to

check the free play with a force of less

than 2 lbs (10 N, 1 kg).

If the free play is not within proper

specification, contact your SUBARU deal-

er.

Maintenance and service 11-27

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (318,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

11-28 Maintenance and service

& Checking the brake pedal

reserve distance

1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)

Depress the pedal with a force of approxi-

mately 66 lbs (294 N, 30 kg) and measure

the distance between the upper surface of

the pedal pad and the floor.

When the measurement is smaller than

the specification, or when the pedal does

not operate smoothly, contact with your

SUBARU dealer.

Clutch pedal (MT vehicles)

Check the clutch pedal free play and

reserve distance according to the main-

tenance schedule in the “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.

& Checking the clutch function

Check the clutch engagement and disen-

gagement.

1. With the engine idling, check that there

are no abnormal noises when the clutch

pedal is depressed, and that shifting into

1st or reverse feels smooth.

2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal

slowly to check that the engine and

transmission smoothly couple without

any sign of slippage.

& Checking the clutch pedal

free play

1) 0.15 – 0.44 in (4 – 11 mm)

Lightly press the clutch pedal down with

your finger until you feel resistance, and

check the free play.

If the free play is not within proper

specification, contact your SUBARU deal-

er.

Black plate (319,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Hill holder (MT vehicles – if

equipped)

Ensure that the hill holder o perates

properly under the following circum-

stances:

1. Stop the vehicle on an uphill grade by

depressing the brake pedal and clutch

pedal, with the engine running.

2. Make sure that the vehicle does not

move backward even after the brake

pedal is released.

3. Then make sure the vehicle starts

climbing the grade by following the normal

starting procedures.

If the hill holder does not operate as

described above, contact with your

SUBARU dealer.

Replacement of brake pad

and lining

CAUTION

If you continue to drive despite the

scraping noise from the audible

brake pad wear indicator, it will

result in the need for costly brake

rotor repair or replacement.

The right front disc brake and the right rear

disc brake have audible wear indicators

on the brake pads. If the brake pads wear

close to their service limit, the wear

indicator makes a very audible scraping

noise when the brake pedal is applied.

If you hear this scraping noise each time

you apply the brake pedal, have the brake

pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

& Breaking-in of new brake

pads and linings

When replacing the brake pad or lining,

use only genuine SUBARU parts. After

replacement, the new parts must be

broken in as follows:

! Brake pad and lining

While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40

mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake

pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more

times.

! Parking brake lining

WARNING

A safe location and situation should

be selected for break-in driving.

CAUTION

Pulling the parking brake lever too

forcefully may cause the rear

wheels to lock. To avoid this, be

certain to pull the lever up slowly

and gently.

Maintenance and service 11-29

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (320,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

11-30 Maintenance and service

1.Drivethevehicleataspeedof

approximately 22 mph (35 km/h).

2. With the parking brake release button

pushed in, pull the parking brake lever

SLOWLY and GENTLY. (Pulling with a

force of approximately 33 lbs [147 N, 15

kg].)

3. Drive the vehicle for approximately

220 yards (200 meters) in this condition.

4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking

brake to cool down. Repeat this proce-

dure.

5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the

parking brake stroke is out of the specified

range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut

located on the parking brake lever.

Parking brake stroke:

7 – 8 notches / 44 lbs (196 N, 20 kg)

Parking brake stroke

Check the parking brake stroke according

to the maintenance schedule in the

“ Warranty and Maintenan ce Booklet”.

When the parking brake is properly

adjusted, braking power is fully applied

by pulling the lever up seven to eight

notches gently but firmly (approximately

44 lbs, 196 N, 20 kg). If the parking brake

lever stroke is not within the specified

range, have the brake system checked

and adjusted at your SUBARU dealer.

Tires and wheels

& Types of tires

You should be familiar with type of tires

present on your vehicle.

! All season tires

The factory-installed tires on your new

vehicle are all season tires.

All season tires are designed to provide

an adequate measure of traction, handling

and braking performance in year-round

driving including snowy and icy road

conditions. However all season tires do

not offer as much traction performance as

winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow

or on icy roads.

All season tires are identified by “ALL

SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on

the tire sidewall.

! Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed capability

tires best suited for highway driving under

dry conditions.

Summer tires are inadequate for driving

on slippery roads such as on snow-

covered or icy roads.

If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered

or icy roads, we strongly recommend the

use of winter (snow) tires.

When installing winter tires, be sure to

Black plate (321,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

replace all four tires.

! Winter (snow) tires

Winter tires are best suited for driving on

snow-covered and icy roads. However

winter tires do not perform as well as

summer tires and all season tires on roads

other than snow-covered and icy roads.

& Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (if equipped)

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message

by sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel when tire pressure

is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-

ing system will activate only when the

vehicle is driven. Also, this system may

not react immediately to a sudden drop in

tire pressure (for example, a blow-out

caused by running over a sharp object).

If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm

garage and will then drive the vehicle in

cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire

pressures may cause the low tire pressure

warning light to come on. To avoid this

problem when adjusting the tire pressures

in a warm garage, inflate the tires to

pressures higher than those shown on the

tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an

extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm

) for

every difference of 108F (5.68C) between

the temperature in the garage and the

temperature outside. By way of example,

the following table shows the required tire

pressures that correspond to various out-

side temperatures when the temperature

in the garage is 608F (15.68C).

Example:

Tire size: P215/60R16 94H

Standard tire pressures:

Front: 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm

)

Rear: 28 psi (190 kPa, 1.9 kgf/cm

)

Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)

Outside

temperature

Adjusted pressure

[psi (kPa, kgf/cm

)]

front

rear

308F(−18C)

32 (220, 2.2) 31 (215, 2.15)

108F(−128C) 34

(235, 2.35)

(230, 2.3)

−108F

(−238C)

36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)

Example:

Tire size: P215/55R17 93H

Standard tire pressures:

Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Rear: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm

)

Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)

Outside

temperature

Adjusted pressure

[psi (kPa, kgf/cm

)]

front

rear

308F(−18C)

35 (240, 2.4) 33 (230, 2.3)

108F(−128C) 37

(255, 2.55)

(240, 2.4)

−108F

(−238C)

39 (270, 2.7) 37 (255, 2.55)

If the low tire pressure warning light

comes on when you drive the vehicle in

cold outside air after adjusting the tire

pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the

tire pressures using the method described

above. Then, increase the vehicle speed

to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to

see that the low tire pressure warning light

goes off a few minutes later. If the low tire

pressure warning light does not go off, the

tire pressure monitoring system may not

be functioning normally. In this event, go

to a SUBARU dealer to have the system

inspected as soon as possible.

While the vehicle is driven, friction be-

tween tires and the road surface causes

the tires to warm up. After illumination of

the low tire pressure warning light, any

increase in the tire pressures caused by

an increase in the outside air temperature

or by an increase in the temperature in the

tires can cause the low tire pressure

Maintenance and service 11-31

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (322,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

11-32 Maintenance and service

warning light to go off.

System resetting is necessary when the

wheels are changed (for example, a

switch to snow tires) and new TPMS

valves are installed on the newly fitted

wheels. Have this work performed by a

SUBARU dealer following wheel replace-

ment.

It may not be possible to install TPMS

valves on certain wheels that are on the

market. Therefore, if you change the

wheels (for example, a switch to snow

tires), use wheels that have the same part

number as the standard-equipment

wheels. Without four operational TPMS

valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS

will not fully function and the warning light

in the instrument panel will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approximately

one minute.

When a tire is replaced, adjustments are

necessary to ensure continued normal

operation of the tire pressure monitoring

system. As with wheel replacement, there-

fore, you should have the work performed

by a SUBARU dealer.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

does not come on briefly after the

ignition switch is turned ON or the

light illuminates steadily after blink-

ing for approximately one minute,

you should have your Tire Pressure

Monitoring System checked at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

If this light comes on while driving,

never brake suddenly and keep

driving straight ahead while gradu-

ally reducing speed. Then slowly

pull off the road to a safe place.

Otherwise an accident involving

serious vehicle damage and serious

personal injury could occur.

If this light still comes on while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a tire may have significant

damage and a fast leak that causes

the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have

a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire

as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute. This indicates

the TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting. If the light

illuminates steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute,

promptly contact a SUBARU dealer

to have the system inspected.

& Tire inspection

Check on a daily basis that the tires are

free from serious damage, nails, and

stones. At the same time, check the tires

for abnormal wear.

Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately if you find any problem.

NOTE

. When the wheels and tires strike

curbs or are subjected to harsh treat-

ment as when the vehicle is driven on a

rough surface, they can suffer damage

that cannot be seen with the naked eye.

This type of damage does not become

evident until time has passed. Try not

to drive over curbs, potholes or on

other rough surfaces. If doing so is

unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed

down to a walking pace or less, and

approach the curbs as squarely as

possible. Also, make sure the tires are

not pressed against the curb when you

park the vehicle.

Black plate (323,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

. If you feel unusual vibration while

driving or find it difficult to steer the

vehicle in a straight line, one of the

tires and/or wheels may be damaged.

Drive slowly to the nearest authorized

SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle

inspected.

& Tire pressures and wear

Maintaining the correct tire pressures

helps to maximize the tires’ service lives

and is essential for good running perfor-

mance. Check and, if necessary, adjust

the pressure of each tire (including the

spare) at least once a month (for example,

during a fuel stop) and before any long

journey.

Check the tire pressures when the tires

are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust

the tire pressures to the values shown on

the tire placard. The tire placard is located

on the door pillar on the driver ’s side.

Driving even a short distance warms up

the tires and increases the tire pressures.

Also, the tire pressures are affected by the

outside temperature. It is best to check tire

pressure outdoors before driving the

vehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air inside

it expands, causing the tire pressure to

increase. Be careful not to mistakenly

release air from a warm tire to reduce its

pressure.

NOTE

. The air pressure in a tire increases

by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3

kgf/cm

) when the tire becomes warm.

. The tires are considered cold when

the vehicle has been parked for at least

three hours or has been driven less

than one mile (1.6 km).

WARNING

Do not let air out of warm tires to

adjust pressure. Doing so will result

in low tire pressure.

Incorrect tire pressures detract from con-

trollability and ride comfort, and they

cause the tires to wear abnormally.

. Correct tire pressure (tread worn

evenly)

Roadholding is good, and steering is

responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so

fuel consumption is also lower.

Maintenance and service 11-33

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (324,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

11-34 Maintenance and service

. Abnormally low tire pressure (tread

worn at shoulders)

Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con-

sumption is also higher.

. Abnormally high tire pressure (tread

worn in center)

Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire

magnifies the effects of road-surface

bumps and dips, possibly resulting in

vehicle damage.

If the tire placard shows tire pressures for

the vehicle when fully loaded and for the

vehicle when towing a trailer, adjust the

tire pressures to the values that match

current loading conditions.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to deform severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and destruction of

the tires. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

& Wheel balance

Each wheel was correctly balanced when

your vehicle was new, but the wheels will

become unbalanced as the tires become

worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes

the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at

certain vehicle speeds and detracts from

the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can

also cause steering and suspension sys-

tem problems and abnormal tire wear. If

you suspect that the wheels are not

correctly balanced, have them checked

and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.

Also have them adjusted after tire repairs

and after tire rotation.

NOTE

Loss of correct wheel alignment*

causes the tires to wear on one side

and reduces the vehicle’s running

stability. Contact your SUBARU dealer

if you notice abnormal tire wear.

*: The suspension system is designed to hold

each wheel at a certain alignment (relative to

the other wheels and to the road) for optimum

straight-line stability and cornering perfor-

Black plate (325,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

mance.

& Wear indicators

1) New tread

2) Worn tread

3) Tread wear indicator

Each tire incorporates a tread wear

indicato r, which becomes visible when

the depth of the tread grooves decreases

to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be

replaced when the tread wear indicator

appears as a solid band across the tread.

WARNING

When a tire’s tread wear indicator

becomes visible, the tire is worn

beyond the acceptable limit and

must be replaced immediately. With

a tire in this condition, driving at

high speeds in wet weather can

cause th e vehicle to hydroplane.

The resulting loss of vehicle control

can lead to an accident.

NOTE

For safety, inspect tire tread regularly

and replace the tires before their tread

wear indicators become visible.

& Tire rotation direction mark

Example of tire rotation direction mark

1) Front

If the tire has the rotation direction

specification, the tire rotation direction

mark is placed on its sidewall.

When you install a tire that has the tire

rotation direction mark, install the tire with

the direction mark facing forward.

& Tire rotation

Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidirec-

tional tires

1) Front

Maintenance and service

11-35

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (326,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

11-36 Maintenance and service

Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires

1) Front

Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To

maximize the life of each tire and ensure

that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to

rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000

km). Move the tires to the positions shown

in the illustration each time they are

rotated.

Replace any damaged or unevenly worn

tire at th e time of rotation. After tire

rotation, adjust the tire pressures and

make sure the wheel nuts are correctly

tightened.

After driving approximately 600 miles

(1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again

and retighten any nut that has become

loose.

& Tire replacement

The wheels and tires are important and

integral parts of your vehicle’s design;

they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The

tires fitted as standard equipment are

optimally matched to the characteristics

of the vehicle and were selected to give

the best possible combination of running

performance, ride comfort, and service

life. It is essential for every tire to have a

size and construction matching those

shown on the tire placard and to have a

speed symbol and load index matching

those shown on the tire placard.

Using tires of a non-specified size detracts

from controllability, ride comfort, braking

performance, speedometer accuracy and

odometer accuracy. It also creates incor-

rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-

priately changes the vehicle’s ground

clearance.

All four tires must be the same in terms of

manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-

struction, and size. You are advised to

replace the tires with new ones that are

identical to those fitted as standard equip-

ment.

For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU

recommends replacing all four tires at

the same time.

WARNING

. All four tires must be the same in

terms of manufacturer, brand

(tread pattern), construction, de-

gree of wear, speed symbol, load

index and size. Mixing tires of

different types, sizes or degrees

of wear can result in damage to

vehicle’s power train. Use of

different types or sizes of tires

can also dangerously reduc e

controllability and braking per-

formance and can lead to an

accident.

. Use only radial tires. Do not use

radial tires together with belted

bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.

Doing so can dangerously re-

duce controllability, resulting in

an accident.

& Wheel replacement

When replacing wheels due, for example,

to damage, make sure the replacement

wheels match the specifications of the

wheels that are fitted as standard equip-

ment. Replacement wheels are available

from SUBARU dealers.

Black plate (327,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

WARNING

Use only those wheels that are

specified for your vehicle. Wheels

not meeting specifications could

interfere with brake caliper opera-

tion and may cause the tires to rub

against the wheel well housing dur-

ing turns. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

Aluminum wheels (if

equipped)

Aluminum wheels can be scratched and

damaged easily. Handle them carefully to

maintain their appearance, performance,

and safety.

. When any of the wheels is removed

and replaced for tire rotation or to change

a flat, always check the tightness of the

wheel nuts after driving approximately 600

miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,

tighten it to the specified torque.

. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,

wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the

wheel.

. Never let the wheel rub against sharp

protrusions or curbs.

. Be sure to fit tire chains on uniformly

and completely around the tire, otherwise

the chains may scratch the wheel.

. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or

the center cap is replaced, be sure to

replace them with genuine SUBARU parts

designed for aluminum wheels.

Windshield washer fluid

CAUTION

Never use engine coolant as washer

fluid because it could cause paint

damage.

If you spray washer fluid on the windshield

but the supply of washer fluid appears to

diminish, check the level of washer fluid in

the tank.

Maintenance and service 11-37

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (328,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

11-38 Maintenance and service

Washer fluid level gauge

Remove the washer tank filler cap, then

check the fluid level indicated by the level

gauge (attached to the inside of the cap).

If the level is near the “Low” mark, add

fluid until it reaches the “Hi” level on the

level gauge or the “Full” mark on the tank.

Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield

washer fluid is unavailable use clean

water.

In areas where water freezes in winter,

use an anti-freeze type windshield washer

fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid

contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%

surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-

perature varies according to how much it

is diluted, as indicated in the following

table.

Washer Fluid

Concentration

Freezing

Temperature

30%

10.48F(−128C)

50% −48F(−208C)

100% −498F(−458C)

CAUTION

Never use engine coolant as washer

fluid because it could cause paint

damage.

In order to prevent freezing of washer

fluid, check the freezing temperatures in

the table above when adjusting the fluid

concentration to the outside temperature.

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with

a different concentration from the one

used previously, purge the old fluid from

the piping between the reservoir tank and

washer nozzles by operating the washer

for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if

the concentration of the fluid remaining in

the piping is too low for the outside

temperature, it may freeze and block the

nozzles.

CAUTION

Adjust the washer fluid concentra-

tion appropriately for the outside

temperature. If the concentration is

inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid

may freeze on the windshield and

obstruct your view, and the fluid

may freeze in the reservoir tank.

Black plate (329,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Replacement of wiper blades

Grease, wax, insects, or other material on

the windshield or the wiper blade results in

jerky wiper operation and streaking on the

glass. If you cannot remove the streaks

after operating the windshield washer or if

the wiper operation is jerky, clean the

outer surface of the windshield (or rear

window) and the wiper blades using a

sponge or soft cloth with a neutral

detergent or mild abrasive cleaner. After

cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper

blades with clean water. The windshield is

clean if beads do not form when you rinse

the windshield with water.

CAUTION

Do not clean the wiper blades with

gasoline or a solvent, such as paint

thinner or benzene. This will cause

deterioration of the wiper blades.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking even

after following this method, replace the

wiper blades using the following proce-

dures:

& Windshield wiper blades

1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.

1) Stopper

2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by

holding its pivot area and pushing it in the

direction shown by the arrow while de-

pressing the wiper blade stopper.

1) Metal support

3. Grasp the locked end of the blade

rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the

stoppers on the rubber are free of the

metal support.

Maintenance and service 11-39

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (330,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

11-40 Maintenance and service

1) Metal spines

4. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal

spines from the old blade rubber and

install them in the new blade rubber.

5. Align the claws of the metal support

with the grooves in the rubber and slide

the blade rubber assembly into the metal

support until it locks.

1) Stopper

Be sure to position the claws at the end of

the metal support between the stoppers

on the rubber as shown. If the rubber is

not retained properly, the wiper blade may

scratch the windshield.

6. Install the wiper blade assembly to the

wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.

7. Lower the wiper arm.

& Rear window wiper blade

1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear

window.

2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-

terclockwise.

Black plate (331,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

3. Having turned the wiper blade assem-

bly to the angle shown in the illustration,

pull it in the direction of the arrow to

remove it from the wiper arm.

1) Plastic support

4. Pull out the end of the blade rubber

assembly to unlock it from the plastic

support.

5. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of

the plastic support.

1) Metal spines

6. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal

spines from the old blade rubber and

install them in the new blade rubber.

7. Align the claws of the plastic support

with the grooves in the blade rubber

assembly, then slide the blade rubber

assembly into place.

Securely lock the end of the plastic

Maintenance and service 11-41

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (332,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

11-42 Maintenance and service

support as shown in the illustration. If the

rubber is not retained properly, the wiper

may scratch the rear window glass.

8. Install the wiper blade assembly to the

wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.

9. Lower the wiper arm.

Battery

WARNING

. Before beginning work on or near

any battery, be sure to extinguish

all cigarettes, matches, and light-

ers. Never expose a battery to an

open flame or electric sparks.

Batteries give off a gas which is

highly flammable and explosive.

. For safety, in case an explosion

does occur, wear eye protection

or shield your eyes when work-

ing near any battery. Never lean

over a battery.

. Do not let battery fluid contact

eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-

cause battery fluid is a corrosive

acid. If battery fluid gets on your

skin or in your eyes, immediately

flush the area with water thor-

oughly. Seek medical help imme-

diately if acid has entered the

eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water,

and seek medical attention im-

mediately.

. To lessen the risk of sparks,

remove rings, metal watchbands,

and other metal jewelry. Never

allow metal tools to contact the

positive battery terminal and any-

thing connected to it WHILE you

are at the same time in contact

with any other metallic portion of

the vehicle because a short cir-

cuit will result.

. Keep everyone including children

away from the battery.

. Charge the battery in a well-

ventilated area.

. Battery posts, terminals and re-

lated accessories contain lead

and lead compounds, chemicals

known to the State of California

to cause cancer and reproductive

harm. Batt eries also contain

other chemicals known to the

State of California to cause can-

cer. Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION

Never use more than 10 amperes

when charging the battery because

it will shorten battery life.

Black plate (333,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1) Cap

2) Upper level

3) Lower level

It is unnecessary to periodically check the

battery fluid level or periodically refill with

distilled water.

However, if the battery fluid level is below

the lower level, remove the cap. Fill to the

upper level with distilled water.

Fuses

CAUTION

Never replace a fuse with one hav-

ing a higher rating or with material

other than a fuse because serious

damage or a fire could result.

The fuses are designed to melt during an

overload to prevent damage to the wiring

harness and electrical equipment. The

fuses are located in two fuse boxes.

One is located under the instrument panel

behind the cover on the driver’s seat side.

To remove the cover, pull it out.

The other one is housed in the engine

compartment.

1) Fuse puller

2) Spare fuse

The fuse puller and spare fuses are stored

in the main fuse box cover in the engine

Maintenance and service 11-43

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (334,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

11-44 Maintenance and service

compartment.

1) Good

2) Blown

If any lights, accessories or other electrical

controls do not operate, inspect the

corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown,

replace it.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

position and turn off all electrical acces-

sories.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Determine which fuse may be blown.

The back side of each fuse box cover and

the “Fuses and circuits” section in chapter

12 in this manual show the circuit for each

fuse.

4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. Inspect the fuse. If it h as blown,

replace it with a spare fuse of the same

rating.

6. If the same fuse blows again, this

indicates that its system has a problem.

Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.

Main fuse

Main fuse box

The main fuses are designed to melt

during an overload to prevent damage to

the wiring harness and electrical equip-

ment. Check the main fuses if any

electrical component fails to operate (ex-

cept the starter motor) and other fuses are

good. A melted main fuse must be

replaced. Use only replacements with the

same specified rating as the melted main

fuse. If a main fuse blows after it is

replaced, have the electrical system

checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.

Black plate (335,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Installation of accessories

Always consult your SUBARU dealer

before installing fog lights or any other

electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such

accessories may cause the electronic

system to malfunction if they are incor-

rectly installed or if they are not suited for

the vehicle.

Maintenance and service 11-45

Black plate (336,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

11-46 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs

Black plate (337,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Wattage Bulb No.

1) High beam headlight 12V-60W 9005 (HB3)

Low beam headlight

Vehicle with HID headlights 12V-35W D2R

Vehicle without HID headlights 12V-55W H1

Front turn signal light 12V-21W (Amber) 1474

Map light 12V-8W –

Dome light 12V-8W –

Side marker light (Front) 12V-5W 168

7) Front fog light 12V-51W 9006 (HB4)

Parking light 12V-5W 168

High mount stop light 12V-13W 912

10)

Cargo area light 12V-5W –

11)

Tail/stop light 12V-21/5W 7443

12)

Backup light 12V-16W 921

13)

Rear turn signal light 12V-21W (Amber) 1474

14)

Tail/stop light 12V-21/5W 7443

15)

License plate light 12V-5W

168

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new

bulb of the specified wattage. Using

a bulb of different wattage could

result in a fire.

Maintenance and service 11-47

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (338,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

11-48 Maintenance and service

& Headlights (Vehicle with HID

headlights)

WARNING

High-intensity-discharge (HID) bulbs

are used for the low beams of the

headlights on the Canada-spec.

2.5XT. These HID bulbs use an

extremely high voltage. To avoid

the risk of an electric shock and

resulting serious injury, you should

not attempt to replace them. Neither

should you attempt to replace the

high-beam bulbs, remove/refit the

headlight assemblies, or remove

any hea dlight-assembly compo-

nents. For replacement of the head-

light bulbs (low-beam and high-

beam), removal and installation of

the headlight assemblies, and re-

moval of headlight-assembly com-

ponents, contact your SUBARU

dealer.

& Headlights (Vehicle without

HID headlights)

CAUTION

Halogen headlight bulbs become

very hot while in use. If you touch

the bulb surface with bare hands or

greasy gloves , finger prints or

grease on the bulb surface will

develop into hot spots and cause

the bulb to break. If there are finger

prints or grease on the bulb surface,

wipe them away with a soft cloth

moistened with alcohol.

NOTE

. If headlight aiming is required, con-

sult your SUBARU dealer for proper

adjustment of the headlight aim.

. It may be difficult to replace the

bulbs. Have your SUBARU dealer re-

place the bulbs if necessary.

Before replacing the left-hand (battery-

side) low- or high-beam light bulb, remove

the screw that retains the windshield

washer nozzle and tip the windshield

washer nozzle sideways.

! Low beam light bulbs

1. Remove the bulb cover, by turning it

counterclockwise.

Black plate (339,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

2. Remove the retainer spring, then pull

out the bulb and electrical connector unit.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector

from the bulb.

4. Install a new bulb into the electrical

connector, then set the retainer spring

securely.

5. Install the bulb cover.

! High beam light bulbs

1. Di sconnect the electrical conn ector

from the bulb.

2. Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly by turning it counterclockwise.

3. Replace the bulb with new one.

4. Reconnect the electrical connector. At

this time, use care not to touch the bulb

surface.

5. To install the bulb to the headlight

assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.

Maintenance and service 11-49

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (340,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

11-50 Maintenance and service

& Rear combination lights

1. Remove the upper and lower screws.

Then, slide the rear combination lamp

assembly to the rear and remove it from

the vehicle.

1) Tail/stop light

2) Backup light

3) Rear turn signal light

4) Tail/stop light

2. Remove the bulb holder from the rear

combination light assembly by turning it

counterclockwise.

3. Pull the bulb from the holder. Install a

new bulb.

4. Set the bulb holder into the rear

combination light assembly and turn it

clockwise until it locks.

5. Reinstall the rear combination light

assembly.

& License plate light

1. Remove the mounting screws using a

Phillips screwdriver.

2. Remove the cover and lens.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a

new bulb.

4. Reinstall the lens and cover.

5. Tighten the mounting screws.

Black plate (341,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Dome light and map light

Dome light

Map light

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of

the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a

new bulb.

3. Reinstall the lens.

& High mount stop light

1. Remove the mounting screws using a

Phillips screwdriver and then remove the

high mount stop light cover.

2. Pull the bulb from the socket. Install a

new bulb.

3. Reinstall the cover.

4. Tighten the mounting screws then

reinstall the covers.

NOTE

Other bulbs may be difficult to replace.

Have your SUBARU dealer replace

these bulbs if necessary.

Maintenance and service 11-51

Black plate (2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2006/ 1/ 17

Left Page

————————————————————————————————————————

Black plate (23,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Specifications ..................................................... 12-2

Dimensions........................................................ 12-2

Engine ............................................................... 12-3

Electrical system................................................ 12-3

Capacities.......................................................... 12-4

Tires .................................................................. 12-5

Wheel alignment ................................................ 12-5

Fuses and circuits ............................................. 12-6

Fuse panel located behind the instrument

panel............................................................... 12-6

Fuse panel located in the engine

compartment ................................................... 12-8

Bulb chart........................................................... 12-9

Vehicle identification ....................................... 12-10

Specifications

Black plate (344,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

12-2 Specifications

Specifications

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

& Dimensions

in (mm)

Item

2.5-liter non-turbo models

2.5-liter turbo models

Drive system AWD

Transmission type

AT MT AT MT

Overall length 176.6 (4,485)

Overall width

68.3 (1,735)

Overall height

62.6 (1,590) 62.4 (1,585)

Wheel base

99.4 (2,525)

Tread Front

58.9 (1,495)

Rear

58.5 (1,485)

Ground clearance*

8.07 (205) 7.87 (200)

*1: Measured with vehicle empty

AT: Automatic transmission

MT: Manual transmission

Black plate (345,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Engine

Engine model

EJ253 (2.5-liter, SOHC, non-turbo) EJ255 (2.5-liter, DOHC, turbo)

Engine type

Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4 stroke gasoline engine

Displacement cc (cu-in) 2,457 (150)

Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.92 6 3.11 (99.5 6 79.0)

Compression ratio 10.0 : 1 8.4 : 1

Firing order

1 – 3 – 2 – 4

& Electrical system

Battery type and capacity (5HR)

MT models 12V-48AH (55D23L)

AT models 12V-52AH (75D23L)

Alternator

2.5-liter non-turbo models 12V-90A

2.5-liter turbo models

12V-110A

Spark plugs

2.5-liter non-turbo models FR5AP-11 (NGK)

2.5-liter turbo models

ILFR6A (NGK)

Specifications

12-3

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (346,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

12-4 Specifications

& Capacities

Fuel tank 15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal)

Engine oil

4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)

Transmission oil

MT 3.7 US qt (3.5 liters, 3.1 Imp qt)

AT 9.8 US qt (9.3 liters, 8.2 Imp qt)

Front differential gear oil (AT)

1.3 US qt (1.2 liter, 1.1 Imp qt)

Rear differential gear oil

0.8 US qt (0.8 liter, 0.7 Imp qt)

Power steering fluid 0.7 US qt (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp qt)

Engine coolant 2.5-liter non-turbo models

MT 7.3 US qt (6.9 liters, 6.1 Imp qt)

AT 7.2 US qt (6.8 liters, 6.0 Imp qt)

2.5-liter turbo models

MT 7.8 US qt (7.4 liters, 6.5 Imp qt)

7.7 US qt (7.3 liters, 6.4 Imp qt)

AT: Automatic transmission

MT: Manual transmission

Black plate (347,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Tires

Tire size

P215/60R16 94H P215/55R17 93H

Wheel size 16 6 6

JJ or 16 6 6

J176 7JJ

Pressure Front Light load

29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm

) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Full load

29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm

) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Rear Light load

28 psi (190 kPa, 1.9 kgf/cm

) 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm

)

Full load

36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm

) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Trailer towing

41 psi (280 kPa, 2.8 kgf/cm

) 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm

)

Temporary

spare tire

Size T135/80D16 T135/90D16

Pressure

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

)

NOTE

. For the Canada specification non-turbo models, there is a conventional tire installed under the floor of the cargo area.

. For the temporary spare tire, T135/80D16 or T135/90D16 is equipped to the vehicle.

& Wheel alignment

Item

2.5-liter non-turbo models 2.5-liter turbo models

Drive system

AWD

Toe Front

0 + 0.12 in (0 + 3 mm)

Rear 0.079 + 0.12 in (2 + 3 mm)

Camber

Front −0825’ + 45’

Rear

−0850’ + 45’ −0855’ + 45’

Specifications

12-5

Black plate (348,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

12-6 Specifications

Fuses and circuits

& Fuse panel located behind the instrument panel

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

1 15A

. Heater fan

2 15A

. Heater fan

3 15A

. Power door lock

. Remote keyless entry

4 15A

. Power outlet (front)

. Remote controlled rear

view mirrors

5 10A

. Tail light

. Parking light

6 15A

. SRS airbag

7 15A

. Fog light

8 30A

. ABS

. Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system (models

with Vehicle Dynamics

Control system only)

9 15A

. Radio

10 10A

–

11 15A

. Engine ignition system

. SRS airbag

. AT control system

12 10A

. Illumination brightness

control

13 20A

. Wiper deicer

. Outside mirror defogger

Black plate (349,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

14 10A

. Meter

15 30A

. Windshield wiper and

washer

16 20A

. Brake light

17 15A

. Air conditioner

18 15A

. Backup light

. Cruise control

19 15A

. Power outlet (cargo)

20 15A

. Rear window wiper and

washer

21 15A

. Ignition coil (non-turbo

model only)

22 15A

. Seat heater

23 Empty

Specifications

12-7

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (350,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

12-8 Specifications

& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment

A) FWD socket (AT models without Vehicle Dynamics Control system)

B) Main fuse

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

1 30A

. Radiator cooling fan

(main)

2 30A

. Radiator cooling fan

(sub)

3 50A

. Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system (models with

Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system only)

30A

. ABS motor

4 30A

. Engine sensor (non-turbo

models only)

5 20A

. Rear window defogger

6 15A

. Hazard warning flasher

. Horn

7 15A

. Turn signal lights

8 10A

. Automatic transmission

control unit

9 10A

. Alternator

10 15A

. Headlight (right side)

11 15A

. Headlight (left side)

12 20A

. Lighting switch

13 15A

. Clock

. Interior light

Black plate (351,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

14 10A

. Secondary air combina-

tion valve (turbo models

only)

Bulb chart

Description Wattage Bulb No.

Headlight

High beam 12V-60W 9005 (HB3)

Low beam

Vehicle with HID headlights 12V-35W D2R

Vehicle without HID head-

lights

12V-55W H1

Front fog light 12V-51W 9006 (HB4)

Front turn signal light 12V-21W 1474

Parking light

12V-5W 168

Side marker light (Front)

12V-5W 168

Rear combination light

Tail/stop light 12V-21/5W 7443

Turn signal light 12V-21W (amber) 1474

Backup light 12V-16W 921

High mount stop light

12V-13W 912

License plate light

12V-5W 168

Cargo area light

12V-5W –

Dome light

12V-8W –

Map light

12V-8W –

Specifications

12-9

Black plate (352,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

12-10 Specifications

Vehicle identification

1) Vehicle identification number

2) Emission control label

3) Vehicle identification number plate

4) Tire inflation pressure plate

5) Certification label

Bar code label (U.S. only)

6) Model number label

7) Radio noise label (Canada only)

8) Fuel label

Black plate (25,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

For U.S.A. ........................................................... 13-2

Tire information.................................................. 13-2

Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2

Recommended tire inflation pressure.................. 13-5

Glossary of tire terminology ............................... 13-6

Tire care – maintenance and safety practices ...... 13-7

Vehicle load limit – how to determine.................. 13-8

Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle load

capacities ...................................................... 13-11

Adverse safety consequences of overloading on

handling and stopping and on tires ................ 13-11

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit......... 13-11

Uniform tire quality grading standards .......... 13-12

Treadwear ....................................................... 13-12

Traction AA, A, B, C......................................... 13-12

Temperature A, B, C......................................... 13-13

Reporting safety defects (USA) ...................... 13-14

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Black plate (356,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

13-2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

For U.S.A.

The following information has been

compiled according to Code of

Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part

575”.

Tire information

& Tire labeling

Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire

Identification Number or TIN) are

placed on the sidewall of a tire by

tire manufacturers. These marking

can provide you with useful infor-

mation on the tire.

! Tire size

Your vehicle comes equipped with

P-Metric tire size. It is important to

understand the sizing system in

selecting the proper tire for your

vehicles. Here is a brief review of

the tire sizing system with a break-

down of its individual elements.

! P Metric

With the P-Metric system, Section

Width is measured in millimeters.

To convert millimeters into inches,

divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio

(Section Height divided by Section

Width) helps provide more dimen-

sional information about the tire

size.

Example:

(1) P = Certain tire type used on

light duty vehicles such as passen-

ger cars

(2) Section Width in millimeters

(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height

7 section width).

(4) R = Radial Construction

(5) Rim diameter in inches

! Load and Speed Rating Descrip-

tions

The load and speed rating descrip-

tions will appear following the size

designation.

They provide two important facts

about the tire. First, the number

designation is its load index. Sec-

ond, the letter designation indicates

the tire’s speed rating.

Black plate (357,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Example:

(6) Load Index: A numerical code

which specifies the maximum load

a tire can carry at the speed

indicated by its speed symbol, at

maximum inflation pressure.

For example, “94” means 1,477 lbs

(670 kg).

WARNING

Load indices apply only to the

tire, not to the vehicle. Putting

a load rated tire on any vehicle

does not mean the vehicle can

be loaded up to the tire’s rated

load.

(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical

system describing a tire’s capability

to travel at established and prede-

termined speeds.

For example, “H” means 130 mph

(210 km/h)

WARNING

. Speed ratings apply only to

the tire, not to the vehicle.

Putting a speed rated tire on

any vehicle does not mean

the vehicle can be operated

at the tire’s rated speed.

. The speed rating is void if

the tires are worn out, da-

maged, repaired, retreaded,

or otherwise altered from

their original condition. If

tires are repaired, re-

treaded, or otherwise al-

tered, they may not be sui-

table for original equipment

tire designed loads and

speeds.

! Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire Identification Number (TIN) is

marked on the intended outboard

sidewall. The TIN is composed of

four groups. Here is a brief review

of the TIN with a breakdown of its

individual elements.

(1) Manufact urer ’s Identification

Mark

(2) Tire Size

(3) Tire Type Code

(4) Date of Manufacture

The first two figures identify the

week, starting with “01” to represent

the first full week of the calendar

year; the second two figures repre-

sent the year. For example, 0101

means the 1st week of 2001.

! Other markings

The following makings are also

placed on the sidewall.

! Maximum permissi ble inflation

pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which this tire may be

inflated. For example, “300 kpa

(44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-3

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (358,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

13-4 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

! Maximum load rating

The load rating at the maximum

permissible weight load for this tire.

For example, “MAX. LOAD 670 kg

(1477 LBS) @ 300 kpa (44 PSI)

MAX. PRESS.”

WARNING

Maximum load rating applies

only to the tire, not to the

vehicle. Putting a load rated

tire on any vehicle does not

mean the vehicle can be

loaded up to the tire’s rated

load.

! Construction type

Applicable construction of this tire.

For example, “TUBELESS STEEL

BELTED RADIAL”

! Construction

The generic name of each cord

material used in the plies (both

sidewall and tread area) of this tire.

For example, “PLIES: SIDEWALL

POLYESTER 1 TREAD POLYE-

STER 1 + STEEL 2 + NYLON 1”

! Uniform Tire Quality Grading

(UTQG)

For details, refer to “Uniform tire

quality grading standards” in this

chapter.

Black plate (359,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Recommended tire inflation pressure

! Recommended cold tire inflation pressure

Recommended cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires is as follows,

Tire size

P215/60R16 94H P215/55R17 93H

Wheel size 16 6 6

JJ or 16 6 6

JJ 17 6 7JJ

Pressure Front Light load

29 psi

(200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm

)

32 psi

(220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Full load

29 psi

(200kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm

)

32 psi

(220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Rear Light load

28 psi

(190 kPa, 1.9 kgf/cm

)

30 psi

(210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm

)

Full load

36 psi

(250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm

)

32 psi

(220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Trailer towing

41 psi

(280 kPa, 2.8 kgf/cm

)

36 psi

(250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm

)

Temporary spare tire

Size T135/80D16 T135/90D16

Pressure

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

)

NOTE

For the temporary spare tire, T135/80D16 or T135/90D16 is equipped to the vehicle.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-5

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (360,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

13-6 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

! Vehicle placard

The vehicle placard is affixed to the

driver’s side door pillar.

Example:

The vehicle placard shows original

tire size, recommended cold tire

inflation pressure on each tire at

maximum loaded vehicle weight,

seating capacity and loading infor-

mation.

! Adverse safety consequences

of under-inflation

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to flex severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and failure of the

tire(s). Possible resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

! Measuring and adjusting air

pressure to achieve proper in-

flation

Check and, if necessary, adjust the

pressure of each tire (including the

spare) at least once a month and

before any long journey. Check the

tire pressures when the tires are

cold. Use a pressure gauge to

adjust the tire pressures to the

specific values. Driving even a

short distance warms up the tires

and increases the tire pressures.

Also, the tire pressures are affected

by the outside temperature. It is

best to check tire pressure out-

doors before driving the vehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air

inside it expands, causing the tire

pressure to increase. Be careful not

to mistakenly release air from a

warm tire to reduce its pressure.

& Glossary of tire terminology

. Cold tire pressure

The pressure in a tire that has been

driven less than 1 mile or has been

standing for three hours or more.

. Maximum inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which a tire may be inflated.

. Recommended inflation pres-

sure

The cold inflation pressure recom-

mended by a vehicle manufacturer.

. Intended outboard sidewall

(1) The sidewall that contains a

Black plate (361,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

whitewall, bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand,

and/or model name molding that

is higher or deeper than the

same molding on the other side-

wall of the tire, or

(2) The outward facing sidewall

of an asymmetrical tire that has

a particular side that must al-

ways face outward when mount-

ing on a vehicle.

. Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of

those standard items which may be

replaced) of floor mats, leather

seats and cross bars to the extent

that these items are available as

factory-installed equipment

(whether installed or not).

. Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with

standard equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and

coolant and air conditioning.

. Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of curb weight, accessory

weight, vehicle capacity weight and

production options weight.

. Normal occupant weight

150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of

occupants (3 occupants).

. Occupant distribution

Distribution of occupants in a vehi-

cle, 2 in front, 1 in rear seat.

. Production options weight

The combined weight of those

installed regular production options

weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in

excess of those standards items

which they replace, not previously

considered in curb weight or acces-

sory weight.

. Vehicle capacity weight

The total weight of cargo, luggage

and occupants that can be added to

the vehicle.

. Vehicle maximum load on a tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the maximum

loaded vehicle weight and dividing

by two.

. Vehicle normal load on a tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the curb weight,

accessory weight, and normal oc-

cupant weight and dividing by two.

& Tire care – maintenance and

safety practices

. Check on a daily basis that the

tires are free from serious damage,

nails, and stones. At the same time,

check the tires for abnormal wear.

. Inspect the tire tread regularly

and replace the tires before their

tread wear indicators become visi-

ble. When a tire’s tread wear

indicator becomes visible, the tire

is worn beyond the acceptable limit

and must be replaced immediately.

With a tire in this condition, driving

at even low speeds in wet weather

can cause the vehicle to hydro-

plane. Possible resulting loss of

vehicle control can lead to an

accident.

. To maximize the life of each tire

and ensure that the tires wear

uniformly, it is best to rotate the

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-7

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (362,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

13-8 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Rotating the tires involves switch-

ing the front and rear tires on the

right-hand side of the vehicle and

similarly switching the front and

rear tires on the left-hand side of

the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept

on its original side of the vehicle.)

Replace any damaged or unevenly

worn tire at the time of rotation.

After tire rotation, adjust the tire

pressures and make sure the wheel

nuts are correctly tightened. A

tightening torque specification and

a tightening sequence specification

for the wheel nuts can be found

“

Flat tires” section in chapter 9.

& Vehicle load limit – how to

determine

The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by avail-

able cargo space. The load limit of

your vehicle is shown on the

vehicle placard attached to the

driver ’s side B-pillar. Locate the

statement “The combined weight

of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”

on your vehicle’s placard.

Thevehicleplacardalsoshows

seating capacity of your vehicle.

The total load capacity includes the

total weight of driver and all pas-

sengers and their belongings, any

cargo, any optional equipment such

as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike

carrier, etc., and the tongue load of

a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity

can be calculated by the following

method.

Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total

weight of occupants + total weight

of optional equipment + tongue

load of a trailer (if applicable))

For towing capacity information and

weight limits, refer to “

Trailer towing”

section in chapter 8.

! Calculating total and load ca-

pacities varying seating con-

figurations

Calculate the available load capa-

city as shown in the following

examples:

Example 1A

Vehicle capacity weight of the

vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which

is indicated on the vehicle placard

with the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed 900 lbs or

408 kg”.

For example, if the vehicle has one

occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)

plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300

kg).

1. Calculate the total weight.

Black plate (363,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity by subtracting the total

weight from the vehicle capacity

weight of 900 lbs (408 kg).

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo can

be carried.

Example 1B

For example, if a person weighing

176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the

same vehicle (bringing the number

of occupants to two), the calcula-

tions are as follows:

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 92 lbs (42

kg), so the cargo weight must be

reduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more.

Example 2A

Vehicle capacity weight of the

vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which

is indicated on the vehicle placard

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-9

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (364,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

13-10 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

with the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed 408 kg or

900 lbs”.

For example, the vehicle has one

occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)

plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170

kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted

with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs

(10 kg), to which is attached a

trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg).

10% of the trailer weight is applied

to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue

load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo can

be carried.

Example 2B

For example, if a person weighing

143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing

40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same

vehicle (bringing the number of

occupants to three), and a child

restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5

kg) is installed in the vehicle for the

child to use, the calculations are as

follows:

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

Black plate (365,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 32 lbs (15

kg), so the cargo weight must be

reduced by 32 lbs (15 kg) or more.

& Determining compatibility of

tire and vehicle load capaci-

ties

The sum of four tires’ maximum

load ratings must exceed the max-

imum loaded vehicle weight

(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the

maximum load ratings of two front

tires and of two rear tires must

exceed each axle’s maximum

loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original

equipment tires are designed to

fulfill those conditions.

The maximum loaded vehicle

weight is referred to Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR). And each

axle’s maximum loaded capacity is

referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-

ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each

axle’s GAWR are shown on the

vehicle certification label affixed to

the driver’s door.

The GVWR and front an d rear

GAWRs are determined by not only

the maximum load rating of tires but

also loaded capacities of the vehi-

cle’s suspension, axles and other

parts of the body.

Therefore, this means that the

vehicle cannot necessarily be

loaded up to the tire’s maximum

load rating on the tire sidewall.

& Adverse safety conse-

quences of overloading on

handling and stopping and

on tires

Overloading could affect vehicle

handling, stopping distance, vehicle

and tire as shown in the following.

This could lead to an accident and

possibly result in severe personal

injury.

. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.

. Heavy and/or high-mounted

loads could increase the risk of

rollover.

. Stopping distance will increase.

. Brakes could overheat and fail.

. Suspension, bearings, axles and

other parts of the body could break

or experience accelerated wear

that will shorten vehicle life.

. Tires could fail.

. Tread separation could occur.

. Tire could separate from its rim.

& Steps for Determining Cor-

rect Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers that

will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For exam-

ple, if the “XXX” amount equals

1,400 lbs (635kg). and there will be

five- 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in

your vehicle, the amount of avail-

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-11

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (366,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

13-12 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

able cargo and luggage load capa-

city is 650 lbs. (1,400 − 750 (5 6

150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being loaded

on the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo

and luggage load capacity calcu-

lated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult

this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your ve-

hicle.

Uniform tire quality grading

standards

This information indicates the rela-

tive performance of passenger car

tires in the area of treadwear,

traction, and temperature resis-

tance. This is to aid the consumer

in making an informed choice in the

purchase of tires.

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tire sidewall be-

tween tread shoulder and maxi-

mum section width. For example:

Tread wear 200 Traction AA Tem-

perature A

The quality grades apply to new

pneumatic tires for use on passen-

ger cars. However, they do not

apply to deep tread, winter type

snow tires, space-saver or tempor-

ary use spare tires, tires with

nominal rim diameters of 12 inches

or less, or to some limited produc-

tion tires.

All passenger car tires must con-

form to Federal Safety Require-

ments in addition to these grades.

& Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a compara-

tive rating based on the wear rate of

the tire when tested under con-

trolled conditions on a specified

government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150

would wear one and one-half (1-1/

2) times as well on the government

course as a tire graded 100. The

relative performance of tires de-

pends upon the actual conditions

of their use, however, and may

depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

& Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those

grades represent the tire’s ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on spe-

Black plate (367,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

cified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked

C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to

this tire is based on straight-

ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include accel-

eration, cornering, hydroplan-

ing, or peak traction charac-

teristics.

& Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled con-

ditions on a specified indoor labora-

tory test wheel. Sustained high

temperature can cause the material

of the tire to degenerate and reduce

tire life, and excessive temperature

can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of

performance which all passenger

car tires must meet under the

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dards No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of perfor-

mance on the laboratory test wheel

than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this

tire is established for a tire

that is properly inflated and

not overloaded. Excessive

speed, underinflation, or ex-

cessive loading, either sepa-

rately or in combination, can

cause heat buildup and possi-

ble tire failure.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-13

Black plate (368,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

13-14 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Reporting safety defects

(USA)

If you believe that your vehicle has

a d efect which could cause a

crash or could cause injury or

death, you should immediately in-

form the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) in

addition to notifying Subaru of

America, Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-

plaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of vehi-

cles, it may order a recall and

remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved

in individual problems between

you, your deal er, or Subaru of

America, Inc. To contact NHTSA,

you may call the Vehicle Safety

Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write

to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400

Seventh Street, SW., Washington,

DC 20590. You can also obtain

other information about motor ve-

hicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

Black plate (27,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Index

Black plate (2,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

14-2 Index

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-17

Warning light ................................................. 3-13, 7-17

Accessories....................................................... 5-2, 11-45

Accessory power outlet................................................. 6-8

Active head restraint ..................................................... 1-6

Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-15

Air conditioner ............................................................. 4-7

Air filtration system..................................................... 4-12

Air flow selection.......................................................... 4-2

Alarm system ............................................................ 2-13

All-Wheel Drive warning light ....................................... 3-16

Aluminum wheel cleaning............................................ 10-3

Aluminum wheels...................................................... 11-37

Antenna system........................................................... 5-2

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-17

Arming the system ..................................................... 2-13

Armrest..................................................................... 1-10

Ashtray..................................................................... 6-11

AT OIL TEMPerature warning light ............................... 3-13

Audio set .................................................................... 5-3

Auto-dimming mirror/compass...................................... 3-29

Automatic climate control system ................................... 4-8

Automatic transmission ............................................... 7-11

Capacities............................................................. 12-4

Fluid.................................................................... 11-20

Selector lever ........................................................ 7-12

Shift lock release ................................................... 7-14

Temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP)................. 3-13

Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) ........... 1-11

Battery .................................................................... 11-42

Jump starting .......................................................... 9-8

Replacement (Remote keyless entry system) .............. 2-7

Booster seat .............................................................. 1-29

Brake

Booster ....................................................... 7-16, 11-27

Fluid ................................................................... 11-25

Pad and lining...................................................... 11-29

Parking ....................................................... 7-26, 11-30

Pedal .................................................................. 11-27

System.................................................................. 7-16

Brake pedal

Free play............................................................. 11-27

Reserve distance.................................................. 11-28

Brake system............................................................. 7-16

Warning light.......................................................... 3-15

Braking ..................................................................... 7-16

Tips ...................................................................... 7-16

Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings................... 11-29

Bulb

Chart .................................................................... 12-9

Replacing ............................................................ 11-46

Capacities ................................................................. 12-4

Cargo area

Bars...................................................................... 6-14

Cover.................................................................... 6-13

Light ...................................................................... 6-2

Tie-down hooks...................................................... 6-14

Black plate (3,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3

Center

Console .................................................................. 6-4

Ventilators ............................................................... 4-3

Center and side ventilators............................................ 4-3

Changing

Flat tire ................................................................... 9-4

Oil and oil filter ...................................................... 11-9

Charge warning light .................................................. 3-12

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction

indicator lamp......................................................... 3-12

Checking

Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-27

Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-28

Clutch function...................................................... 11-28

Clutch pedal free play............................................ 11-28

Engine oil level ...................................................... 11-8

Fluid level ............................... 11-20, 11-24, 11-25, 11-26

Gear oil level........................................................ 11-22

Child restraint systems ............................................... 1-24

Installation with A/ELR seatbelt................................ 1-26

Lower and tether anchorages .................................. 1-31

Child safety .................................................................... 5

Locks ................................................................... 2-17

Chime

Key ........................................................................ 3-5

Seatbelt ........................................................ 1-12, 3-10

Cigarette lighter ......................................................... 6-10

Cleaning

Aluminum wheels................................................... 10-3

Interior.................................................................. 10-5

Ventilation grille...................................................... 4-11

Climate control system

Automatic ............................................................... 4-8

Manual................................................................... 4-3

Clock ........................................................................ 3-19

Clutch

Fluid ................................................................... 11-26

Pedal .................................................................. 11-28

Coat hook.................................................................. 6-12

Convenience net ......................................................... 6-6

Coolant ................................................................... 11-12

Cooling system ........................................................ 11-12

Corrosion protection............................................ 8-10, 10-4

Cruise control ............................................................ 7-28

Set indicator light.................................................... 3-19

Cruise control indicator light......................................... 3-19

Cup holder ................................................................. 6-7

Front passenger’s.................................................... 6-7

Rear passenger’s .................................................... 6-8

Dashboard storage compartment................................... 6-6

Daytime running light system ....................................... 3-21

Differential gear oil

Front................................................................... 11-21

Rear

................................................................... 11-22

Dimensions................................................................ 12-2

Disarming the system ................................................. 2-15

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................ 7-16

Dome light.................................................................. 6-2

Door

Index 14-3

Black plate (4,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

14-4 Index

Locks ..................................................................... 2-4

Open warning light ................................................. 3-16

Drive belts................................................................ 11-18

Driving

All-Wheel Drive vehicle ........................................... 3-16

Car phone/cell phone .................................................. 7

Drinking ..................................................................... 6

Drugs ........................................................................ 6

Foreign countries ..................................................... 8-4

Pets .......................................................................... 7

Snowy and icy roads ................................................ 8-9

Tips ................................................................ 7-10, 8-5

Tired or sleepy............................................................ 7

Electrical system........................................................ 12-3

Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) system ................................................. 3-15, 7-18

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)............................. 1-11

Engine

Compartment overview ........................................... 11-6

Coolant................................................................ 11-12

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ............................ 5, 8-2

Hood .................................................................... 11-4

Oil ........................................................................ 11-8

Overheating .......................................................... 9-11

Starting................................................................... 7-7

Stopping ................................................................. 7-9

Exterior care.............................................................. 10-2

Flat tires..................................................................... 9-4

Floor mat................................................................... 6-12

Fluid level

Automatic transmission ......................................... 11-20

Brake.................................................................. 11-25

Clutch ................................................................. 11-26

Power steering ..................................................... 11-24

Front

Differential gear oil................................................ 11-21

Fog light button ...................................................... 3-24

Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-20

Seats ..................................................................... 1-2

Front lip spoiler ...................................................... 8-25

Front seats

Fore and aft adjustment ..................................... 1-3, 1-4

Reclining .......................................................... 1-3, 1-5

Fuel ........................................................................... 7-2

Economy hints ........................................................ 8-2

Filler lid and cap...................................................... 7-3

Gauge .................................................................... 3-7

Requirements ......................................................... 7-2

Fuses ..................................................................... 11-43

Fuses and circuits ...................................................... 12-6

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)............................... 8-12

Glove box................................................................... 6-4

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)........................... 8-12

Black plate (5,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Hazard warning flasher ........................................... 3-6, 9-2

Head restraint adjustment ............................................. 1-6

Rear....................................................................... 1-8

Headlight

Beam leveler ......................................................... 3-23

Flasher ................................................................. 3-21

Headlights........................................................ 3-20, 11-48

Heater operation .......................................................... 4-5

High beam indicator light ............................................ 3-17

High mount stop light................................................. 11-51

High/low beam change (dimmer).................................. 3-21

Hill holder (MT vehicles) .................................... 7-27, 11-29

Horn......................................................................... 3-32

Hose and connections ............................................... 11-12

Ignition switch.............................................................. 3-3

Light....................................................................... 3-5

Illuminated entry .......................................................... 2-8

Illumination brightness control...................................... 3-23

Immobilizer.................................................................. 2-3

Indicator light........................................................... 2-4

Indicator light

Cruise control ........................................................ 3-19

Cruise control set................................................... 3-19

High beam ............................................................ 3-17

Shift position (AT vehicles) ...................................... 3-17

Traction Control system OFF................................... 3-14

Turn signal ............................................................ 3-17

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF ................................ 3-14

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation.......................... 3-16

Indicator lights

Vehicle Dynamics Control ........................................ 7-22

Inside mirror .............................................................. 3-29

Interior light................................................................. 6-2

Jack and jack handle .................................................. 9-15

Jump starting .............................................................. 9-8

Key

Interlock release...................................................... 3-5

Keyless entry system ............................................... 2-7

Number .................................................................. 2-2

Reminder chime ...................................................... 3-5

Replacement........................................................... 2-4

Keys .......................................................................... 2-2

Leather seat materials................................................. 10-5

Light

Cargo area ............................................................. 6-2

Control switch ........................................................ 3-20

Dome..................................................................... 6-2

Map....................................................................... 6-3

Limited slip differential (LSD)........................................ 7-15

Loading your vehicle................................................... 8-11

Low fuel warning light .......................................... 3-8, 3-16

Low tire pressure warning light..................................... 3-17

Lower and tether anchorage ........................................ 1-31

Index 14-5

Black plate (6,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

14-6 Index

LSD (Limited slip differential) ....................................... 7-15

Lumbar support ........................................................... 1-5

Main fuse................................................................. 11-44

Maintenance

Precautions ........................................................... 11-3

Schedule .............................................................. 11-3

Seatbelt ................................................................ 1-19

Tools .................................................................... 9-15

Malfunction indicator lamp........................................... 3-12

Manual

Climate control system ............................................. 4-3

Seat ....................................................................... 1-3

Transmission ........................................................... 7-9

Transmission oil.................................................... 11-19

Map light..................................................................... 6-3

Maximum load limits................................................... 8-18

Meters and gauges ...................................................... 3-6

Mirrors...................................................................... 3-29

Moonroof .................................................................. 2-21

New vehicle break-in driving.......................................... 8-2

Odometer/Tripmeter ..................................................... 3-6

Off road driving............................................................ 8-6

Oil filter..................................................................... 11-9

Oil level

Engine.................................................................. 11-8

Front differential gear ............................................ 11-21

Manual transmission ............................................. 11-19

Rear differential.................................................... 11-22

Oil pressure warning light ............................................ 3-12

Outside mirrors .......................................................... 3-30

Outside temperature indicator ....................................... 3-9

Overhead console ....................................................... 6-6

Overheating engine .................................................... 9-11

Parking

Brake.................................................................... 7-26

Brake stroke ........................................................ 11-30

Light switch ........................................................... 3-23

Tips ...................................................................... 7-26

Parking your vehicle ................................................... 7-25

Pcket ......................................................................... 6-7

Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4

Power

Door locking switch.................................................. 2-6

Seat....................................................................... 1-4

Steering ................................................................ 7-15

Steering fluid........................................................ 11-24

Windows ............................................................... 2-18

Precautions against vehicle modification................ 1-23, 1-58

Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-7

Rear

Combination lights ................................................ 11-50

Gate

............................................................. 2-20, 9-14

Seats ..................................................................... 1-7

Black plate (7,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Viscous limited slip differential ................................. 7-15

Rear differential

Gear oil ............................................................... 11-22

Rear seat

Folding down........................................................... 1-9

Rear window

Defogger button ..................................................... 3-28

Wiper and washer switch ........................................ 3-26

Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-40

Recommended

Automatic transmission fluid ................................... 11-21

Brake fluid............................................................ 11-26

Clutch fluid........................................................... 11-27

OIL grade and

viscosity...................... 11-10, 11-11, 11-20, 11-22, 11-23

Power steering fluid............................................... 11-25

Spark plugs.......................................................... 11-18

Remote keyless entry system ........................................ 2-7

Replacement

Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-29

Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-39

Replacing

Air cleaner element ............................................... 11-15

Battery (remote keyless entry system) ........................ 2-7

Lost transmitters (keyless entry system)...................... 2-9

Replacing bulbs ........................................................ 11-46

Dome light ........................................................... 11-51

Headlight ............................................................. 11-48

High mount stop light............................................. 11-51

License plate light ................................................. 11-50

Map light.............................................................. 11-51

Rear combination light .......................................... 11-50

Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-11

Roof rail and crossbar................................................. 8-13

Safety

Precautions when driving............................................. 4

Symbol...................................................................... 2

Warnings ................................................................... 2

Seat

Fabric ................................................................... 10-5

Heater.................................................................... 1-7

Seat height adjustment................................................. 1-4

Seatbelt......................................................................... 4

Extender ............................................................... 1-19

Maintenance .......................................................... 1-19

Pretensioners......................................................... 1-20

Safety tips ............................................................. 1-10

Warning light and chime .................................. 1-12, 3-10

Seatbelts ................................................................... 1-10

Security ID plate.......................................................... 2-3

Selector lever............................................................. 7-12

Self-leveling rear suspension ....................................... 7-31

Shift lock release........................................................ 7-14

Shift position indicator light .......................................... 3-17

Shock sensors

........................................................... 2-17

Shopping bag hook..................................................... 6-14

Snow tires ................................................................. 8-10

Snowy and icy roads ................................................... 8-9

Sounding a panic alarm ............................................... 2-8

Spark plugs ............................................................. 11-17

Index 14-7

Black plate (8,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

14-8 Index

Specifications ............................................................ 12-2

Speedometer............................................................... 3-6

SRS

Frontal airbag ........................................................ 1-39

Side airbag ........................................................... 1-51

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ... 4, 1-35

SRS airbag system

Monitors................................................................ 1-56

Servicing............................................................... 1-57

Warning light ......................................................... 3-10

Starting the engine....................................................... 7-7

State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-6

Steering wheel

Power................................................................... 7-15

Tilt ....................................................................... 3-32

Stopping the engine ..................................................... 7-9

Storage compartment ................................................... 6-4

Sun shade ................................................................ 2-22

Sun visors................................................................... 6-3

Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-35

Synthetic leather upholstery ........................................ 10-5

Tachometer ................................................................. 3-7

Temperature gauge ...................................................... 3-8

Temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP)..................... 3-13

Temporary spare tire .................................................... 9-2

Tie-down hooks ......................................................... 9-12

Tilt steering wheel ...................................................... 3-32

Tire

Chains.................................................................. 8-10

Inspection............................................................ 11-32

Pressures and wear.............................................. 11-33

Replacement........................................................ 11-36

Rotation .............................................................. 11-35

Types.................................................................. 11-30

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ....... 7-24, 9-7, 11-31

Tires ......................................................................... 12-5

Tires and wheels ...................................................... 11-30

Top tether anchorages ................................................ 1-33

Towing ...................................................................... 9-11

All wheels on the ground ......................................... 9-13

Flat-bed truck......................................................... 9-13

Tie-down hooks...................................................... 9-12

Weight .................................................................. 8-18

Trailer

Connecting ............................................................ 8-16

Hitch..................................................................... 8-16

Hitches.................................................................. 8-21

Towing .................................................................. 8-18

Towing tips ............................................................ 8-23

Turn signal

Indicator lights........................................................ 3-17

Lever .................................................................... 3-22

Under-floor storage compartment.................................. 6-15

Valet mode ................................................................ 2-15

Vanity mirror ............................................................... 6-3

Vehicle

Black plate (9,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Capacity weight ..................................................... 8-12

Identification ........................................................ 12-10

Symbols .................................................................... 3

Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light.................................................. 3-14

OFF switch ........................................................... 7-23

Operation indicator light .......................................... 3-16

System ................................................................. 7-20

Warning light ................................................. 3-14, 7-22

Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2

Warning and indicator lights .......................................... 3-9

Warning light

ABS ..................................................................... 3-13

All-Wheel Drive...................................................... 3-16

Anti-lock Brake System........................................... 3-13

AT OIL TEMPerature .............................................. 3-13

Brake system ........................................................ 3-15

Charge ................................................................. 3-12

CHECK ENGINE ................................................... 3-12

Door open............................................................. 3-16

Low fuel.......................................................... 3-8, 3-16

Low tire pressure ................................................... 3-17

Oil pressure .......................................................... 3-12

Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-10

SRS airbag system ................................................ 3-10

Vehicle Dynamics Control ....................................... 3-14

Warranties ..................................................................... 1

Warranties and maintenance ....................................... 8-18

Washing ................................................................... 10-2

Waxing and polishing .................................................. 10-3

Wear indicators ........................................................ 11-35

Wheel

Alignment .............................................................. 12-5

Aluminum ............................................................ 11-37

Balance............................................................... 11-34

Replacement........................................................ 11-36

Windows ................................................................... 2-18

Windshield

Washer fluid......................................................... 11-37

Wiper and washer switches ..................................... 3-25

Wiper blades........................................................ 11-39

Wiper deicer .......................................................... 3-27

Winter driving.............................................................. 8-7

Wiper and washer ...................................................... 3-24

Index 14-9

Black plate (2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2006/ 1/ 17

Left Page

————————————————————————————————————————

Black plate (1,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

000134

Black plate (2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2006/ 1/ 17

Left Page

————————————————————————————————————————

Black plate (2,1)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

GAS STATION REFERENCE

Fuel

! Non-turbo models

Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or

higher.

! Turbo models

Use premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI

or higher. If premium unleaded gasoline is not available, regular

unleaded gasoline with octane rating of 87 AKI or higher may

be temporarily used. For optimum engine performance and

driveability, it is required that you use premium grade unleaded

gasoline.

& Fuel octane rating

This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and

Motor numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock

Index (AKI). Refer to “Fuel” section in this manual.

& Fuel capacity

15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal)

& Engine oil

Use only API classification SM with the words “ENERGY

CONSERVING” and the ILSAC certification mark (starburst

mark) displayed on the container (ILSAC GF-4).

& Engine oil capacity

4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)

& Cold tire pressure

Tire size P215/60R16 94H P215/55R17 93H

Wheel size 1666

JJ or 1666

J1767JJ

Pressure Front Light load

29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm

) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Full load

29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm

) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Rear Light load

28 psi (190 kPa, 1.9 kgf/cm

) 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm

)

Full load

36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm

) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Trailer towing

41 psi (280 kPa, 2.8 kgf/cm

) 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm

)

Temporary spare tire

Size T135/80D16 T135/90D16

Pressure

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

)

NOTE

. For the Canada specification non-turbo models, there is a conventional tire installed under the floor of the cargo area.

. For the temporary spare tire, T135/80D16 or T135/90D16 is equipped to the vehicle.

Black plate (2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2006/ 1/ 17

Left Page

————————————————————————————————————————

Subaru 2008 Forester 2.5X L.L. Bean

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Subaru 2008 FORESTER 2.5X L.L. BEAN Questions and Answers

Related Products

Subaru 2026 Solterra Touring XT Leather

Subaru 2026 Solterra Touring XT

Subaru 2026 Solterra Limited XT

Subaru 2026 Solterra Limited

Vevor YB06-11 High Flow Catalytic Converter Direct Fit Exhaust Manifold for Subaru Impreza Legacy Forester Outback 06-12

Subaru 2026 Solterra Premium